Home

3 - GE Intelligent Platforms: Support Home

1. To complete the cutting operation press the lt Cut area gt key The cut area is removed from the screen DRILL 50 Row Col Text Static 6 22 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 6 Pasting a Region A previously cut region may be pasted any number of times on the current screen The cut paste buffer is retained across the editing of different screens and reports this provides you with an easy way to move copy text from one screen to another The region to be pasted is always placed on the screen with the region s upper left corner positioned at the current cursor location The region is pasted onto the screen in overwrite mode so the cursor should be positioned with care prior to invoking the paste operation As an example of pasting assume that you want to paste a previously cut block of text at the current cursor location DRILL 50 Row 3 Col Text Static To complete the paste operation press the lt Paste area gt key 123456 DRILL 50 Row 3 Col Text Static GFK 0641 Chapter 6 Screen Painter and Report Painter 6 23 6 Section 11 Touch Points For those terminals which support touch points the Pointer supports two additional keys The lt Touch Screen Grid gt key is used to toggle the display of a grid on the screen which outlines the touch points for the target terminal The actual text on the screen is not affected by the touch point grid The scr
2. Action Description LOGTTM x Log message x to message line on screen LOGMES x Log message x to attached printer and to message line on screen REPORT n Output report n to the attached printer HELP n Overlay help screen indexed by n TIDUMP Output the terminal s screen to the attached printer REFRSH Clear and rewrite the screen PORTW p t Output text string to port EXIT Exit the ADS system For more details on the syntax of specifying the above commands as well as for more details on how to use the commands refer to the discussion on Command Scripts found later in this chapter Caution Care should be exercised in using any of the SCREEN ALARM PSHSCN POPSCN or REMSCN commands While these commands can be powerful in certain circumstances when used with display formats it is easy to abuse their use and can result in unwanted system behavior such as lockup of the system execution In almost all cases alarm sources should be used instead of display formats with those commands for event driven screen changes 3 30 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 As an example of assigning an Action to a range assume that whenever the associated range is satisfied that the related object should be displayed in reverse video and that the message text Value is negative should be displayed on the terminal s display line To do this type the desired comman
3. Insufficient memory Data Manager The total available memory on the ADC module dropped to below 17 000 bytes while the Data Manager part of the ADS Executor was attempting to allocate memory Typically this is not a fatal error however data being displayed on the screen may cease to be updated Acknowledging alarms not previously acknowledged may help correct this situation otherwise a soft reset of the ADC module will be required Insufficient memory to load system Not enough free memory exists on the ADC module to load the system into the Executor with the current selection of options CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 MEMORY LEVEL CRITICALLY LOW The amount of free memory on the ADC module has dropped to below 30 000 bytes As a consequence logging to alarm pages has automatically been disabled Additional screen pushes reports etc may fail to execute no fatal error has occurred upon receiving this message however PID option module is not installed One of the PID module access commands was executed without the PID module being installed on the ADC module PLC comms failure for alarm source YYYY PLC comms failure for object XXXX The PLC location referenced in the data source attached to dynamic object XXXX or the PLC location referenced in alarm source YYYY does not exist in the PLC Waiting on data manager to complete initialization The CPU is
4. 4 Any existing text or lines may be overwritten but static text may NOT overwrite an existing dynamic object see Chapter 7 for a discussion of dynamic objects GFK 0641 Chapter 6 Screen Painter and Report Painter 6 11 6 Section 7 Deleting and Undeleting Lines The ability to delete and undelete a line is provided by the screen report editor Whatever line the cursor is positioned on regardless of the column position will be deleted whenever the lt Delete line gt key is pressed The deleted line is saved in a buffer so that it can be restored later if desired The line delete buffer is maintained saved across the editing of different screens and or reports As an example of deleting a line assume that you want to delete the line the cursor is currently on Note that the cursor is not positioned at the beginning of the line it can be on any position on a line 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 1234567890123456789012343 67890123456 7890 1234567890 123456789012345678901234567890 DRILL 50 Row Col Text Static Pressing the lt Delete line gt key deletes the line Note that the cursor position remains unchanged DRILL 50 Row Col Text Static 6 12 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 6 A line which has been previously deleted may be undeleted at the current cursor position This means that the undelete will occur beginning at column 1 only if the cursor is positioned on column 1 This f
5. 6w FE IRRBBLLUU The bottom line of the screen is a status line The entries on that line are defined in the following table Item Definition SSSSS is the name of the currently loaded system NNN is the number assigned to the screen or report being edited RRR is the row where the cursor is currently positioned CCC is the column where the cursor is currently positioned MMMM indicates whether the editor is in Text or Line mode TTTTTTT indicates whether the cursor is currently positioned on Static text or on a Dynamic object DDDDDDDDDDD is blank unless the cursor is positioned on a dynamic object whereby it displays the name of D the dynamic object in reverse video or unless you are currently defining a dynamic object whereby it displays the blinking text defining RR is blank unless you have toggled the reverse video attribute whereby it displays Re BB is blank unless you have toggled the bold video attribute whereby it displays Bo LL is blank unless you have toggled the blink video attribute whereby it displays Bl and UU is blank unless you have toggled the underline video attribute whereby it displays UI Each of these status indicators are displayed and described in more detail on the following pages GFK 0641 6 1 6 Section 1 ADS Screen Painter Keyboard Use of and lt gt Characters with Key Names The and lt gt character pairs have special meaning in this document when used to indicatekeys Ifa key n
6. COM1 ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM DATA_SRC_13 DATA_SRC_14 DATA_SRC_15 DATA_SRC_16 DATA_SRC_1 7 DATA_SRC_18 DATA_SRC_19 DATA_SRC_20 DATA_SRC_21 DATA_SRC_22 DATA_SRC_23 DATA_SRC_24 DRILL Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination Print data sources from J to A prompt is displayed at the bottom of the screen 1 00 s 1 00 s STDPRN Delete a data source View current sources rsion List sources Print sources New data source Modify a data source Print data sources from H FHHHHFHFHHE to HHHH HHHH H HHHH HHHH Depending upon the response entered into the from and to field several different listings can be generated The listing options are as shown below from from from from from from from from lt idl gt lt idl gt rn rxn lt idl gt nxn rn nxn to to to to to to to to lt id2 gt we lt id2 gt lt id2 gt Wa we Wy Wa print print print print print print print print out out out out out out out out data sources idl to id2 data source idl data source id2 all all all all all data data data data data sources up to id2 sources from ill sources sources sources Pressing the lt Quit gt key cancels the print operation After selection of the required range of data sources to be printed t
7. Loaded will be displayed next to that entry items not installed will have Not Loaded displayed next to that entry Filling in the ADS Main Menu GFK 0641 The following example is the ADS menu screen that you will interact with Note that in this example the ADS Builder and Executor are both shown as being Loaded CIMPLICITY tm 90 ADS Version 3 01 COPYRIGHT 1989 1992 GE FANUC AUTOMATION NORTH AMERICA INC Prepared for GE Fanuc Automation by Control Systems International Pty Ltd Perth Australia 1 Run ADS Builder Loaded 2 Run ADS Executor Loaded 3 Set default system name Set default terminal module Set default printer module Run ADS Fault Not loaded Run ADS PID Not loaded Enter item number 1 7 9 to exit 1 1 1 2 Required User Entries While in this screen you must define and make the following entries on the menu system name terminal module e printer module Note that these entries correspond to what must be defined by you in order to load the ADS Execute Only environment onto the ADC module Selecting a Menu Entry To select a menu entry to fill in simply press the numeric key corresponding to the entry and then press the Enter key At that point the ADS menu program will prompt you for the needed information For example to define a system name of PUNCH press the key sequence 3 Enter CIMPLICITY tm 90 ADS Version 3 01 COPYRIGHT 1989 1992 GE FANUC AU
8. Press lt RETURN gt to view next data source else lt QUIT gt Pressing the Enter key at this point will display the next data source in the list PARTS_COUNT Each time the Enter key is pressed the form for the next data source is displayed After the last data source is displayed the next time that the Enter key is pressed for this example the menu page will again be displayed 3 20 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 List Sources On the left hand side of the screen a list of data source names is maintained in alphabetical order The ADS system provides a way to page through the total list of data source names To initiate the listing of a system s data source names select the List sources menu option either by cursoring to the desired option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the L key ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Data Sources ADS Print Destination STDPRN DATA_SRC_01 DATA_SRC_13 DATA_SRC_02 DATA_SRC_14 DATA_SRC_03 DATA_SRC_15 DATA_SRC_04 DATA_SRC_16 DATA_SRC_05 DATA_SRC_1 7 DATA_SRC_06 DATA_SRC_18 DATA_SRC_0 DATA_SRC_19 DATA_SRC_08 DATA_SRC_20 DATA_SRC_09 DATA_SRC_21 DATA_SRC_10 DATA_SRC_22 DATA_SRC_11 DATA_SRC_23 DATA_SRC_12 DATA_SRC_24 New data source Modify a data source Dele
9. eee eee A 1 ADS Menu Screen Items oeeie n E E E E EE E S A 1 Configuration Operations berreste sugeei eee e eee A 2 Modify System Parameters 0666 6 A 2 PL Data SOURCE ics oui nila icine Su Sine dt AAA Se ae ake A 2 Display Formats 0 eee eens A 3 Translation lables aria sst0iiseaonn ate dntolslate aides oh ahha nate steed ash 8 A 4 Lookup Tablett eiin ea oN hole suet ihe ace ORL alt Eee as A 4 Engineering Units Conversion Table 00sec cece eee A 5 Command Scripts eie t patti nie aah Garo ES DEEE Re seared Dle A 5 Screen Operations neresno ceed een oe SR es aie ne eek Ee a EO A 6 New ModifyScreen oesi cernas sa dera nein oi E a e aA ai ai A 6 Key Assignm rnts as emio aai aD E A N a lea ANE EAE RG a A 7 Report Operations mariar a E aE E E E EE D A S A 8 New ModifyReport ie onere ep ne epesi eee eee ene A 8 Screen ReportEditing cre seehorse eee eee A 8 screen Attributes ereo ang eeta etna hawt dea ea nian a adeno A 9 Create Dynamic Object 6 n eee EE A 10 Alarm Operations ausara a PA e eee eens A 10 New ModifyAlarm Page 0 066 c ccc eee A 10 Alann SOULCES ice vedon seen les act cio Steal HOE MAER dietitian E ES A 11 New ModifyAlarm Sources 0 cece eee eee A 11 GFK 0641C CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual xiii March 1994 Contents Figure 2 1 ADS System Major Components and Interconnections 660 c cece eee eee 2 1 GFK 0641C CIMPLIC
10. valid entries are 0 through 4 PLC_STATUS 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PLC State N Prg OEM Run IO Prg IO PLC IO PLC Con Ovr U chg prot SW SW Att flt flt chg chg Swp Swp PLC State Current State as opposed to switch settings or commanded state Possible values are 0 RUN_ENABLED 1 RUN_DISABLED 2 STOP_IO_DISABLED 3 CPU_STOP_FAULTED 4 CPU_LHALTED 5 CPU_SUSPENDED 6 STOP_IO_ENABLED NU Not used reserved for future expansion Prg chg Program changed flag 1 Program change 0 No program change 90 70 rel 2 X and later OEM prot OEM protected flag 1 OEM protection in effect 0 No OEM protection Run SW Front panel RUN STOP switch setting 1 RUN 0 STOP IO SW Front panel ENABLE DISABLE switch setting 1 Outputs Disabled 0 Outputs Enabled Prg Att Programmer Attachment flag Shows whether or not there is a programmer attachment in the system 1 Programmer attachment found 0 No programmer attachment found IO flt I OFault Entry present flag 1 Fault entry in I O fault table 0 I O fault table is empty PLC flt PLC Fault Entry present flag 1 Fault entry in PLC fault table 0 PLC fault table is empty IO chg I OFault Entry changed flag 1 I O fault table has changed since last read by this device 0 I O fault table same as when last read PLC chg PLC Fault Entry changed flag 1 PLC fault table has changed since last read by this device 0 PLC fault table same as when la
11. which memory the data comes from and how frequently it should be gathered Optionally the data source s data may be scaled The data source associated with a dynamic object may be changed at run time using the ATTACH command Translation table entries provide for linear scaling offsetting and data type conversion Lookup table entries provide for non linear scaling and data type conversions e g signed word to string etc Engineering Unit Conversion table entries provide for converting a value to engineering units with optional data type conversion Translation table lookup table and engineering unit conversion entries may be used multiple times The translation lookup or engineering unit conversion table entries associated with a dynamic object may be changed at run time using the ATTACH command Since a single data source may be used to animate multiple dynamic objects the ability is provided to apply scaling directly to the dynamic object to support those cases where the same data must be handled in different forms in different places in the system Based on a particular value the display format provides an optional capability to affect a dynamic object s display attributes and movement A display format may be used with multiple dynamic objects Each screen may have up to fifteen user defined function keys associated with it Pressing a function key results in some action being taken This action may be to display a different sc
12. 5 Save the system to disk 6 Exit the Builder and execute the MS DOS command DEL ADS_PC lt system gt PCM QUAD to remove the QUAD system from your new folder You can now proceed to use the Builder as normal with your new system You can cut and paste any of the Quad size character representations you need When you have completed your system you may delete the screens containing the Quad size character representations from it to free up the ADC memory they would otherwise consume Note Though the GE Fanuc Mini OIT and Touch Mini OIT support a subset of the Quad Size characters described for the terminals above the QUAD system may NOT be used to create a system to be executed on one of those terminals CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 6 Section 6 Entering Static Text Static text is text that you can directly enter or change on a displayed screen as opposed to dynamic objects which are displayed by the system as a result of an event occurring dynamic objects are discussed further later in this section Entering static text in the screen report editor is easy a few basic guidelines must be followed 1 Text is always entered at the cursor position with the current video attributes color and character set applied to the text 2 Text entry is always performed in replace or overwrite mode 3 Wraparound does NOT occur at the right side of the screen or report
13. Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Command Scripts ADS Print Destination STDPRN SCRIPT_01 SCRIPT_13 SCRIPT_02 SCRIPT_14 SCRIPT_03 SCRIPT_15 SCRIPT_04 SCRIPT_16 SCRIPT_O5 SCRIPT_17 SCRIPT_06 SCRIPT_18 SCRIPT_07 SCRIPT_19 SCRIPT_08 SCRIPT_20 SCRIPT_09 SCRIPT_21 SCRIPT_10 SCRIPT_22 SCRIPT_11 SCRIPT_23 SCRIPT_12 SCRIPT_24 New script Modify a script Delete a script View current scripts sion List command scripts Print command scripts Press lt RETURN gt to list more entries else lt QUIT gt When the Enter key is again pressed the remaining group of command script names will be displayed and you will be returned to the menu page since all command scripts have been listed Pressing the lt Quit gt key exits the list operation The command script names currently displayed on the screen will remain displayed ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Command Scripts ADS Print Destination STDPRN SCRIPT_25 SCRIPT_28 SCRIPT_29 SCRIPT_30 New script Modify a script Delete a script View current scripts sion List command scripts Print command scripts SCRIPT_26 SCRIPT_2 Press lt RETURN gt to list more entries else lt QUIT gt CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manu
14. Graph trend 7 15 GREEN attribute Index 3 Index Index 4 H Handling alarms during system execu tion Help screen Screen report editor HELP command b 30 8 28 Hints miscellaneous 6 27 Horizontal lines drawing 6 19 I O fault table IBM PC based builder Initial startup 14 2 Input data type 3 41 3 61 Input range 3 63 Insert simulating in text mode INVISIBLE attribute IO_FAULT command K Key assignments Keyboard screen painter 6 2 o use of 2 4 6 2 selection for function table 2 4 special meaning 2 4 L LA100 1 4 Lines deleting Lines undeleting 6 12 Lists object 2 7 Load SaveOperations ADC based builder archive system to PC clear system error messages load system menu modify current directory PC based builder print destination save system to RAM disk 4 Locations examples of specifying Locations special Log to printer alarm text 8 30 LOGMES command LOGTTM command Lookup Table delete a lookup table 3 66 error messages list lookups B 69 modify a lookup table new lookup table entry print lookups view current entries 3 68 Lookup table configuration operations b 59 LUDCO 1 4 M MAGENTA attribute Main menu ADS exiting Menu choosing items 2 4 Menu exiting ADS main Messages operator 14 3 MIBM 1 4 6 3 MINI 1 4 31 Modify System Parameter
15. delete an alarm source 8 35 error messages list sources modify an alarm source new alarm source PLC references print sources view current sources 3 37 Alam text log to printer ALARM command 3 29 Alam confirming an 14 7 Alarm timestamp Alam triggering on transition 8 31 Alarms associated with alarm pages 14 3 Alamns not associated with alarm pages 14 3 Alarms introduction to 8 1 Appearance actions to control 3 27 Appendix A system builder guide A 1 Archive system to PC 9 9 ASCI ASCII character set 6 7 Assignments key ATTACH command B 30 Auto acknowledge B Background colors alarm page Index 1 Index Index 2 Bar chart 7 15 BLACK attribute BLINK attribute BLUE attribute 3 27 BOLD attribute 3 27 Builder guide appendix A Builder PC based p 2 12 1 C Calculation additional Character Set alternate 6 7 character set 2 character set we normal Characters double high wide Characters double wide 6 9 Characters quad size 6 10 Chart bar CIBM 1 4 CLRALM command 3 29 8 27 COIT 1 4 color computer 3 3 Color space Colors foreground 6 5 com1 B 4 COM2 B 4 Command Scripts delete a script error messages list command scri pts B 86 modify a script new script print command scripts view current scripts Commands list of Configuration Operations command
16. gt print out all EUC S from COS Wey Oe gt print out all BUCS from to 7x gt print out all Buc s Pressing the lt Quit gt key cancels the print operation After selection of the required range of engineering units conversion table entries to be printed the ADS Builder sends the information to the Print Destination specified using the Print Destination option see Load Save Operations Chapter 9 GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 57 Engineering units conversion table information is formatted as shown in the following examples Engineering Unit Conversion Listing Eng Unit Conv DEG_C Input value lo 0 Input value hi A 32000 Output value lo 0 Output value hi 160 Input Data Type WORD Output Data Type FLOATING POINT Eng Unit Conv PERCENT Input value lo 32768 Input value hi 32767 Output value lo 0 Output value hi 100 Input Data Type NIL Output Data Type NIL Note A data type of NIL for both the input and the output data type indicates that no data type conversion is to be performed Error Messages for Engineering Units Conversion Table Error messages and their causes for Engineering Units Conversion Tables are listed below ENTRY ERROR Engineering calculation name not unique ENTRY ERROR Engineering calculation used in lookup table ENTRY ERROR Engineering calculation used in Translation Table An engineering units calculation table entry name m
17. 29 PLCGETB command 3 28 ao 3 74 8 26 rales D PLCGETBY command B PLCGETE command B 28 SETHE PLCGETI command 3 ca B 74 8 26 PLCGETL command 3 28 B 28 Erez PLCGETS command 3 28 3 74 B 26 B 28 b 74 B 26 PLCGETW command B 28 ri PLCSETB command 3 28 8 27 PLCSETBY command 3 28 8 27 PLCSETE command B 28 PLCSETI command 3 28 8 27 PLCSETL command 3 28 PLCSETS command 8 28 8 27 PLCSETW command 3 28 8 27 Points touch POPALM command B 27 POPSCN command 8 29 8 75 PORTW command B 30 Predefined dynamic object Print alarm pages details pe 8 alarm source details 8 report details 5 screen details Print destination ADC based builder PC based builder 9 13 Print system summary Printer device Printer module valid settings Printers valid ASCII Printing data to a printer 14 9 Prompts operator 14 3 PSHALM command B 29 8 27 PSHSCN command 3 29 3 75 8 27 R Range input RED attribute 3 27 References PLC B 11 GFK 0641 REFRESH command 3 30 8 28 REFRSH command 14 2 Region cutting a Region pasting a 6 23 Region selecting REMALM command 3 29 REMSCN command 3 29 3 75 8 27 Report Operations copy report delete report error messages 5 8 list report Bd menu modify report new report print report details 5 7
18. Delete a translation View current translations List translations Print translations ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT CON2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Trans lations ADS Print Destination STDPRN Modify a translation Delete a translation View current entries rsion List translations Print translations rs ew translation Each of these options is described on the following pages Note that the status information formerly displayed along the left hand side of the screen has been replaced with a heading Translations As translation table entries are created a list of those entries will be maintained in this area CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 New Translation GFK 0641 When the New translation option is selected a data entry window is opened containing seven fields which you can fill in These fields are Name the three translation equation fields A B and C Specify Data Types Input Data Type and Output Data type A discussion of each field follows ADS BUILDER Current System Name RAM DRILL Terminal CIBM COM1 Default Scan Rate Printer COM2 Default Alarm Scan Rate Memory 182848 Bytes Startup Screen Trans 1 Create a translation entry Name The variables used to perform the translation are described by
19. Monochrome IBM compatible personal computer running TERME e CIBM Color IBM compatible personal computer running TERME e TCOIT OptiTOUCH color touch screen from Nematron e TMOIT OptiTOUCH monochrome touch screen from Nematron e LUDCO Lucas Deeco ST 2200 terminal Four additional terminal tables are used by the PC based Builder MPC for a monochrome computer and CPC for a color computer using the ASCII character set and EIBM EGA adapter and VIBM VGA adapter for a computer using the OIT character set These should always be changed to reflect the target terminal The terminal type is never checked by the ADS Builder only by the ADS Executor If the Executor is run and a mismatch is detected between the attached terminal and what is indicated by the terminal field of the loaded system the Executor will warn you of that fact but then continue to execute the system For example if a system is built specifying the use of a COIT terminal but is then executed specifying a VT100 terminal the message Terminal mismatch using user specified VT100 rather than COIT terminal would be displayed on the attached terminal The system will execute correctly although some terminal specific features such as foreground and background color selections may be lost DEC isa trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 3 Terminal Device 3 4 The Terminal Device field indicates t
20. PLCSETW T241 0 PLCSETL R70 0 Error Messages for Command Scripts 3 88 Error messages and their causes for Command Scripts are listed below ENTRY ERROR Command script name not unique Two command scripts cannot have the same name ENTRY ERROR No Command script name A name must be specified Invalid entry n Alarm page p not located WA Alarm page number p that was referenced in an ACK_ALARM command on line n does not exist Invalid entry n Alarm XXXX not located Alarm source XXXX that was referenced in an ACK ALARM command on line n does not exist Invalid entry n At least 3 parameters are required for ATTACH The ATTACH command on line number n contains less than the three required parameters Invalid entry n Cannot find screen number p Wet Screen number p referenced in the command on line number n does not exist Invalid entry n Failed to find XXXX Wt The dynamic object XXXX referenced in the command on line number n could not be found on the indicated screen Invalid entry n Failed to match input data type for XXXX CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 The input data type for additional calculation XXXX specified in the ATTACH command on line number n does not match what is required by the referenced dynamic object Invalid entry n Failed to match output data type for
21. Positive direction of movement is to the right for horizontal movement and downwards for vertical movement Use of the MOVER move relative action must be handled with care In general the related range should be a single value and not a value range An action is carried out when there has been an actual change in value not just when there has been a change in range For example assume that a MOVER action is associated with the range 12 and another MOVER action is associated with the range 10 20 For the former case the MOVER action will occur the first time the controlling value evaluates to 12 In this case only a single MOVER action can occur for the associated range However in the latter case the MOVER action will occur whenever the controlling value transitions to 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 or 20 In this case if the controlling value is being incremented by 1 the MOVER action has the possibility depending on the controlling value s scan rate of being executed 11 times for a single range Note When moving dynamic objects on a screen it is important to note that each dynamic object is processed in the alphabetical order of the dynamic object names You can use this fact to control which dynamic object should have precedence if more than one occupies the same position on the screen GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 27 Actions Which Cause an Event to Occur The second category of actions actions w
22. Rows Pressing the Enter key again selects the Start Column field Pressing the Enter key a fourth time completes the entry of the screen size and positioning fields The Image field is selected next Image You have the option of specifying that a screen be displayed in the normal foreground background video or in the reverse background foreground video On monochrome terminals the background is normally black and any characters displayed are in the foreground color either white green or amber supported by the terminal By default the ADS Builder will create a screen in normal video designated by the letter N in the field If you would rather have reverse video the letter R must be typed into the Image field A third choice Transparent is also available This choice will display the screen in the same manner as described above for normal N with the addition that screen text and data on screens underneath the screen are allowed to bleed through any blank character positions on the screen This allows for effects such as bar charts superimposed on trend graphs To define a screen as transparent type the letter T into the Image field For example assume that you want the new screen to be created using normal video To complete the entry press the Enter key since normal video is the default choice and you do not need to change the entry The Foreground field is selected next CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display Sys
23. Signed Longword 32 2147483648 to 2147483647 Floating Point 32 999999999 99 to 9999999999 99 Only 7 digits of precision When you cursor onto the Input Data Type field a window is opened on the screen showing what choices are available By default the system selects WORD for the data type A data type must be selected that makes sense with regards to its intended use in the system being built The ADS builder checks to ensure that the type of data specified is consistent with the values specified in the Input Range field and with any other object e g PLC data source it is later associated with For example if a lookup table entry input data type of SIGNED WORD is specified that entry could only operate on a PLC data source whose source data type was SIGNED WORD After the Input data type is selected press the Enter key to complete the selection The Output Data Type field is selected next GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 61 Output Data Type Every lookup table entry must also be tagged as to what type of data it will return as a result of operating on the input value The output data types supported by the ADS system are specified in the table below Table 3 20 Output Data Types Supported for Lookup Tables Data Type Size Bits Value Range State 1 OFE ON Byte 8 0 to 255 Word 16 0 to 65535 Signed Word 16 32768 to 32767 Longword 32 0 to 4294967295 Signed Longword 32 2147483648 to 214
24. TTDUMP REFRESH _ PORTW p t EXIT Report Operations New Modify Report Report Name XXXXXXXX 8 characters max Report Number I to 999 Start Row 1 Rows 1 to 99 Start Column P Columns I t 200 Screen R eport Editing Cursor Moving Table B 1 Cursor Keys Supported by Screen Report Editor Key Resulting Action T Move cursor up one row within the current column J Move cursor down one row within the current column lt Move cursor left one column within the current row gt Move cursor right one column within the current row lt GOLD gt Move cursor to topmost row within the currentcolumn lt GOLD gt J Move cursor to bottommost row within the currentcolumn lt GOLD gt e Move cursor to leftmost column within the current row lt GOLD gt gt Move cursor to rightmost column within the current row TAB Move cursor to next tab stop within the current row Enter Move cursor down one row and to leftmost column of the new row A 8 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Screen Attributes GFK 0641 Table B 2 Key Functions for System Building Terminal MOIT COIT Key Function TMOIT TCOIT MIBM CIBMt VT100 GOLD F11 PF1 Help F12 PF2 Quit F10 KPO Save GOLD F10 GOLD KPO Object list GOLDS GOLDS Refresh screen Clear field Beginning of line End of line Top of screen Bottom of screen Video
25. alarm sources from the PLC defined in the PLC Location field By default this field is set to indicating that the data should be gathered at the system default alarm scan rate For information on the default alarm scan rate refer to the discussion Modify System Parameters Default Alarm Scan Rate in Section 1 This setting should be changed only if you want to guarantee a specific alarm scan rate regardless of the default setting The format for specifying a specific scan rate is given by HH MM SS CC where HH refers to hours MM to minutes SS to seconds and CC to hundredths of a second Any time between 00 00 00 01 and 59 59 59 99 inclusive may be entered The ADS Executor s basic time element is defined to be 0 25 second because of this the ADS Builder will round all times up to the nearest 0 25 second This means that the fastest rate which can be specified is 00 00 00 25 and the slowest 60 60 60 00 When specifying a time the entire specification must be given not just the significant portion For instance to specify an alarm scan rate of 3 seconds you must enter 00 00 03 00 not just 3 or 3 00 As an example of a scan rate setting assume that you want the alarm source to be scanned at the system default alarm scan rate Since the desired setting is the default for the field you do not need to alter the setting Pressing the Enter key completes the entry and selects the next field Additional Calculation Additional Cal
26. and alarms associated with one or more alarm pages The reason for this distinction is that the ADS Executor provides a standard mechanism for dealing with alarm pages which is not user configurable Alarms that are associated with alarm pages will always be dealt with in the same way regardless of how you have configured other parts of the system Alarms Not Associated with Alarm Pages Alarms that are not associated with alarm pages i e no alarm pages defined for alarms to be displayed on follow a simple set of rules during system execution When it is detected for a particular alarm source that there has been a transition into one of the four possible alarm states the ADS Executor carries out any actions that are defined for that particular alarm state If the NOTIFY flag for the alarm source is set the TEXT defined for the alarm state is displayed to the operator on the bottom line of the terminaldisplay The TEXT is not timestamped regardless of the setting of the TIMESTAMP flag When there is a transition out of the alarm state the operator prompt is erased from the bottom line of the terminal display If the LOG TO PRINTER flag is set the TEXT defined for the alarm state will be printed to the defined printer If the TIMESTAMP flag is set the TEXT will be preceded on the same line of the printout with a time and date stamp the time and date as maintained in the Series 90 CPU For alarms that are not associated with ala
27. exited press the Y key and then the Enter key to initiate the exit from the ADS Builder Note It is important to note that once the ADS Builder is exited with unsaved modifications in the ADS Builder s working memory all changes made to the system since it was last loaded or saved will be lost and can not be recovered CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Chapter Terminal ADS Off line PC Based Builder 12 Only The Terminal menu option gives you access to the TERMF terminal emulator and file server software without leaving the PC based Builder See Chapter 8 of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display Systems User s Manual for more details on the PC based Builder This functionality is useful when you are building your system totally off line on an attached computer but want to periodically execute the system on the target terminal The following must be performed in order for the Terminal function to work properly 1 You must use the ADS Setup Utility see Chapter 9 of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display Systems User s Manual to define the target terminal appropriately 2 The ADS Execute Only environment must be installed on the ADC module 3 Begin with the ADC module hard reset 4 Execute the ADS Builder selecting the system referenced in step 2 above If the indicated system has not yet been created you should do so The system should be saved
28. first specify an appropriate terminal type for the current display device e g COIT then select option 6 Run ADS Fault A message Fault Tables Module Starting will be displayed followed by the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS copyright screen Upon pressing the Enter key the PLC fault table screen will initially be displayed Pressing the lt Exit gt function key will return you to the ADS Menu Program Screen Accessing the Fault Module From an ADS System GFK 0641 The Fault Tables module may be accessed from within an ADS system when either the Development or the Execute Only environment is installed on the ADC In either case the Fault Tables module must have been included in the applicable environment via the ADS Setup Utility When you are in an ADS system the Fault Tables module is accessed by one of two commands PLC_FAULT IO_FAULT These commands are more fully described in Chapter 3 Command Scripts The PLC_FAULT command causes the PLC fault table screen to be displayed while the IO_FAULT command causes the I O fault table screen to be displayed Pressing the lt Exit gt function key returns you to the ADS screen from which the command was invoked Using the Fault Tables Module The next two screens show the PLC and I O fault table screens respectively PLC FAULT TABLE TOP FAULT DISPLAYED 0001 TOTAL FAULTS 0003 FAULT TABLE LAST CLEARED ENTRIES OVERFLOWED PLC DATE TIME FAULT LOC
29. flag you can view the configuration screen The Loop Configuration screen is accessed from all other screens by pressing the F2 key The Loop Configuration screen consists of five sections Loop Identification Current Loop SP PV CV values Loop GAIN parameters Loop OUTPUT parameters Loop INPUT parameters Of these five sections three GAIN OUTPUT and INPUT may be modified by the user if the User Configurable flag is set The other two sections are for information only The values in all sections except for Loop Identification are updated once per second from the PLC to ensure that the data is up to date Updates are suspended for a section being modified You should understand the various loop configuration parameters before attempting to modify them Refer to the Series 90 70 Programmable Controller Reference manual for details CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 LOOP CONFIGURATION LOOP ALGORITHM TYPE PROCESS GROUP GAIN VALUES Proportional PU Integral Differential Error 7 Deadband Deadband Derivative Clamp Clamp Slew C S Invert Y N OUTPUT Bias Interval 01s SETUP 4 EMONITORETUNE ESELECT GAIN OUTPUT SINPUT o IROEXIT Selecting a Loop to Configure Upon entry to the Configuration screen the current loop s information will be displayed The current loop is either the first loop
30. lt QUIT gt Pressing the lt Quit gt key exits the list operation displayed on the screen will remain displayed Chapter 8 Alarm Operations New alarm source Modify an alarm source Delete an alarm source Copy an alarm source View current sources List sources Print sources The alarm source names currently 8 39 Print Sources 8 40 The Print sources option allows the details of the defined alarm sources to be printed on an attached printer When running the ADC version of the ADS Builder access to the Print options is only available if the ADS Print Module and Spooler are installed To initiate a print of the defined alarm sources select the Print sources option by either cursoring to the option and pressing the Enter key or by pressing the P key ADS BUILDER Terminal Printer Dir ALARM_SRC_01 ALARM_SRC_02 ALARM_SRC_03 ALARM_SRC_04 ALARM_SRC_05 ALARM_SRC_06 ALARM_SRC_0 ALARM_SRC_08 ALARM_SRC_09 ALARM_SRC_10 ALARM_SRC_11 ALARM_SRC_12 COIT Current System Name COM2 COM1 ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Alarm Sources ALARM_SRC_13 ALARM_SRC_14 ALARM_SRC_15 ALARM_SRC_16 ALARM_SRC_1 ALARM_SRC_18 ALARM_SRC_19 ALARM_SRC_20 ALARM_SRC_21 ALARM_SRC_22 ALARM_SRC_23 ALARM_SRC_24 DRILL Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination 1 00 s 1 00 s STDPRN New alarm source Modify an alarm source Delete an alarm source Copy
31. up to 10 pages GFK 0641 A ACK_ALARM B 29 B 77 8 28 ACK ALARM lt alarm source gt B 29 3 77 8 28 ACK_ALARM lt page number gt B 29 Acknowledge auto Acknowledgement alarms 14 6 Action list of commands ACTION_OFF ACTION_ON B 77 Actions to control appearance 3 27 Actions which cause an event to occur Actions alarm triggering Additional Calculation 8 23 ADS Builder choosing items from a menu p 4 configuration 2 erations description of entering the ADS builder program p d exit HLT menu selection ADS main menu exiting 1 5 ADS Menu program ADS Menu screen printer selection required entries screen display selecting an entry terminal selection 8 3 ADS menu screen required entries 1 2 ADS system components of 2 1 description of running ADS system running Alarm acknowledgement 14 6 Alarm handling during system execution Alarm Operations alarm sources delete an alarm p age 8 9 error messages Index list pages menu modifying an alarm page new alarm page 8 3 print page pres Ba view pages Alam page display Alam page display stacked 14 5 Alam page text field 8 29 Alam pages alarms associated with 14 3 Alam pages alarms not associated with Alam pages error messages 8 13 Alam pages output text to B 33 Alarm Source action field 8 2 copy an alarm source 8 36 data types
32. 01 A PLCSETF command would have to be specified in order to utilize the translation The operator would be required to enter a floating point value it would then be multiplied by 100 converted to WORD and then sent to the PLC If a PLCSET command is specified that defines a subset of bits wihin a reference e g PLCSETB R1 4 the referenced PLC location is first read the indicated bit s operationperformed and then the value is written back to the PLC The read and write operations may occur after different PLC logic scans If the PLC logic program changes the value between the read and write operations the non referenced bits of the reference will not be protected as expected Table 3 23 Screen Commands Action Description SCREEN rt Removeall screens and go to screen n PSHSCN n r c Overlay screen n at optionally specified row and column positions r and c POPSCN n2 Remove last screen overlaid or all down to and including n REMSCN r2 Remove last screen overlaid or only n lifn 0a prompt will appear on the terminal s display line asking you to specify the screen alarm page to be selected 2Ifn 0 only the most recently pushed screen alarm page will be removed from the terminaldisplay Four commands are provided to allow you to manipulate the screens on your terminal display when your system is executed The SCREEN command is used to remove all the screens currently displayed on the terminal and disp
33. 32767 Longword 32 0t0 4294967295 Signed Longword 32 2147483648 to 2147483647 Floating Point 32 999999999 9 to 9999999999 99 Only 7 digits of precision If the Specify Data Types flag has been set to N the Input Data Type field will be set to NIL Output Data Type If the Specify Data Types flag has been set to Y the Output data typ field is used to indicate the data type that the input value is to be converted to prior to the engineering units conversion equation being applied This data type becomes the output data type of the engineering units conversion table entry Valid data types are Table 3 18 Output Data Types Supported for EUC Tables Data Type Size Bits Value Range State 1 OFE ON Byte 8 0 to 255 Word 16 0 to 65535 Signed Word 16 32768 to 32767 Longword 32 0t0 4294967295 Signed Longword 32 2147483648 to 2147483647 Floating Point 32 999999999 9 to 9999999999 99 Only 7 digits of precision If the Specify Data Types flag has been set to N the Output Data Type field will be set to NIL 3 52 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Modify a Unit Conversion An existing engineering units conversion table entry may be modified in much the same manner in which it was originally created All information about the entry may be changed except its name Changing the name of an engineering units conversion table entry req
34. 65 30 SP gt 25 00 Seconds V gt 34 03 M CONFIG EMONITOR ESELECT MODIFY GRATE STOP TGEXIT Stopping Loop Trending To stop the gathering and display of data press the F8 key This causes the screen image to change as follows e data remains displayed but is not updated the RUNNING message is changed to STOP the soft key for F8 is changed from STOP to START Modifying Loop Parameters Loop parameters can only be modified if the loop setup specifies that the loop is user configurable i e the User Configurable flag is set to Y To modify the loop parameters in response to the trending information that is displayed press the F6 key The first field of the parameters screen is now displayed in reverse video and you can enter new values into the fields To move between fields press the Return or key to go to the next field or the to go to the previous field When the required values have been entered press Return while positioned on the last field to save the new values They will then be written to the PLC To abandon any changes press the lt Quit gt key The values will revert to the original values CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Appendix CIMPLICITY90 ADS A Display System Builder Guide This appendix provides a quick reference to the system parameters and entries required to build an Operator Interface System using the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS System sof
35. 999999 999999 999999_ DRILL 50 Row Col Text Static After you have completed the modifications to the screen select the lt Save gt key to exit the screen report editor the contents of the screen will be saved in the ADS Builder s working memory You are returned to the menu page The lt Quit gt key may be used to exit the Screen Painter without saving the changes you have made Delete Screen 4 8 Ascreen may be irrecoverably removed from a system by deleting it Any dynamic objects defined on the screen will also be lost but not any referenced PLC data source display format translation table entry lookup table entry or command script To initiate a screen deletion select the Delete screen menu option either by cursoring to Delete screen on the menu and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the D key The ADS Builder will prompt you for the number of the screen to be deleted For example assume that you want to delete screen 50 REGS Type the desired screen number into the prompt field Pressing the Enter key completes the delete screen operation You are returned to the menu page the listing of existing screens on the left hand side of the terminal display is updated to reflect the deletion you have just made CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Copy Screen Anew screen may be created by making a copy of an existing screen The copy will include the scree
36. ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Engineering Units Conversion Table New Modify Unit Conversion Name Xo EL Ol Specify Data Types Input Output Command Scripts New Modify Script Name XXXXXXXXXXXX Commands PLCGETB loc PLCGETBY loc PLCGETW loc PLCGETI loc PLCGETL loc PLCGETS loc PLCGETF loc PLCSETB loc val PLCSETBY loc va PLCSETW loc val PLCSETI loc val PLCSETL loc val PLCSETS loc val PLCSETF loc val GFK 0641 XXXXXXXXXXXxX 12 Characters max Xi I1 Ou Ol 01 fu L Output value Xi Input value low Iu Output value low Ou State State 1 OFF ON Byte 8 0 to 255 Word 16 0 to 65535 Signed Word 16 Longword 32 0 to 4294967295 Signed Longword 32 Floating Point 32 Only 7 digits of precision 12 characters max SCREEN n PSHSCN n 1r C POPSCN n REMSCN n ALARM n PSHALM POPALM REMALM n 1 CLRALM ACTION_OFF ACTION_ON ACK_ALARM ACK_ALARM lt page number gt ACK_ALARM lt alarm source gt n n n Appendix ACIMPLICITY 90 ADS Display System Builder Guide Input value Input value high Output value high 32 108 to 32767 2147483648 to 2147483647 999999999 99 to 9999999999 995 PLC_FAULT f b IO_FAULT f b SETUP_LOOP f b CONFIGURE_LOOP f b MONITOR_LOOP f b TUNE_LOOP f b ATTACH
37. BUS_mno M_mnopp MEMORY MAX_BLOCK Scan Rate Additional Calc CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 leave blank or HH MM SS CC Lookup table entry Translation table entry Engineering Units Conversion table entry Custom translation A Input Value B C GFK 0641 GFK 0641 Display Formats New Modify Display Format Name XXXXXXXXXXXxX 12 characters max Source Data Type State 1 OFF ON Byte 8 0 to 255 Word 16 0 to 65535 Signed Word 16 32768 to 32767 Floating Point 32 Longword 32 0 to 4294967295 Signed Longword 32 2147483648 to 2147483647 999999999 99 to 9999999999 99 Range Lefts E2 10 max range action pairs Action nvisible Black MoveA r c Normal Red MoveR r c Bold Green Reverse Yellow Blink Blue Underscore Magenta Cyan White and or PLCGETB loc SCREEN n PLCGETBY loc PSHSCN n 1r C PLCGETW loc POPSCN n PLCGETI loc REMSCN n PLCGETL loc ALARM n PLCGETS loc PSHALM n PLCGETF loc POPALM n PLCSETB loc val REMALM n PLCSETBY loc val CLRALM PLCSETW loc val ACTION_OFF PLCSETI loc val ACTION_ON PLCSETL loc val ACK_ALARM _ PLCSETS loc val ACK_ALARM lt page number gt PLCSETF loc val ACK_ALARM lt alarm source gt e g ON OFF 32768 Appendix ACIMPLICITY 90 ADS Display System Builder Guide PLC_FAULT f b IO_
38. Background REGS 1 Rows 23 1 Colums 80 N Norm Rev Trans WHITE BLACK Screen Number The screen number is used to uniquely identify screens within a single system Screen numbers may range from 1 to 999 inclusive providing for an absolute maximum of 999 screens in a single system Screen numbers need not be assigned consecutively nor do they need to be defined in a specific numeric order For example assume that you want to assign 50 as the screen number Type the value 50 into the Screen Number field To complete the entry press the Enter key Note that the Start Row field is selected next Start Row Rows Start Column and Columns The size of a screen can be controlled by specifying the screen s starting coordinates row column to fit the physical screen on your terminal and by specifying the total number of rows and columns covered by the screen The screen should be defined to fit within the physical size of you terminal s screen since there is no provision for panning across a larger virtual screen By default the ADS Builder sets these values to exactly match the size of the terminal defined on the Modify System Parameters data entry form You may alter any of these values by typing the new desired values into the appropriate fields The default values are displayed in the appropriate fields when the New screen option is selected The values for this example are start on row 1 with 23 rows and start at col
39. Builder 2 5 Managing the Builder s Memory The ADS Builder makes all changes to a system in a work space not affecting the original system until the changes are saved Screens and reports due to their size are only loaded into the work space when you reference them As more and more screens and reports are created and or modified the ADS Builder may run out of memory in its work space to make any additional changes In the ADC based Builder available memory is displayed at the top of the screen next to the entry Memory Two numbers are shown The first number indicates the total bytes remaining unused on the ADC module and the second indicates the size of the largest contiguous block of bytes remaining unused If insufficient memory is available an error message will be displayed informing you of the situation It is recommended that as you see total available memory shrink to below 60 000 bytes or the largest block available shrink below 25 000 bytes the system be saved to avoid the potential loss of subsequent changes In saving a system the ADS Builder empties its work space of all screens and reports thereby freeing up memory to allow you to continue In addition it is good practice to make frequent saves of the ADS Builder s work space to minimize the potential loss of data due to a power failure Periodic archives of a system to a host computer is also recommended Additional information concerning managing the memory of the A
40. Calc GFK 0641 Chapter 7 Dynamic Objects 7 5 Fill out the PLC data source entry form in the same manner as previously described The value of R100 is EEEE Create Dynamic Ob ject Name R100_DISPLAY Data Source R100_VAL Additional Calc Create a data source Name R100_VAL Source Data Type SIGNED WORD Source Location R100 Scan Rate or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Pressing the Enter or lt Save gt key at this point completes the entry of the PLC data source You are then returned to the dynamic object data entry form An informative message indicates that the PLC data source was added to the system Additional Calculation An additional calculation may be applied to the value supplied by the PLC data source if so desired This feature provides the ability for scaling or type converting a PLC data source value for a single usage as opposed to always if the same additional calculation were specified during the definition of the PLC data source If an additional calculation is specified the data type resulting from the calculation is used to validate any field formatting characters which are used only X formatting characters for State or String data types only 9 for all other data types plus period for floating point The additional calculation may be defined as a custom calculation or may reference the name of a previously defined translation table engineering units conversion table or lookup ta
41. Description SCREEN n Removeall screens and go to screen n PSHSCN nl1 1 c Overlay screen n at optionally specified row and column positions r and c POPSCN n2 Remove last screen overlaid or all down to and including n REMSCN r2 Remove last screen overlaid or only n lifn 0a prompt will appear on the terminal s display line asking you to specify thescreen alarm page to be selected 2Ifn 0 only the most recently pushed screen alarm page will be removed from the terminaldisplay Table 3 9 Alarm Page Commands Action Description ALARM r Removeall alarm pages and overlay n PSHALM r Overlayalarm page n POPALM r2 Remove lastalarm page overlaid or all down to and including n REMALM r Remove lastalarm page overlaid or only n CLRALM Removeall currently displayed alarm pages lifn 0a prompt will appear on the terminal s display line asking you to specify thescreen alarm page to be selected 2 Tfn 0 only the most recently pushed screen alarm page will be removed from the terminal display 3 If n 0 all alarm pages will be removed from the screen and no new alarm page will be displayed Table 3 10 Alarm Source Related Commands Action Description ACTION_OFF Disableactions associated with alarms ACTION_ON Enable actions associated with alarms ACK_ALARM Acknowledgesallalarms in system ACK_ALARM lt page number gt Acknowledgesallalarms ona page ACK_ ALARM lt alam source gt
42. Destination PC DRILL PRN Screens 26 Alarm pages 28 Reports 1 Configuration operations Alarm sources 2 Screen operations Data sources 36 Alarm operations Display formats 36 Report operations Translations entries 28 Lookup table entries 26 Print system summary Command scripts 30 Exit Loading system alarm definitions from MEMRY ALM CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 9 When the system load has been successfully completed the screen status information is updated to reflect the system just loaded ADS BUILDER Current System Name PC MEMRY Terminal VT100 COM2 Default Scan Rate 25 8 Printer NULL Default Alarm Scan Rate 25 S Memory 133648 Bytes Startup Screen ADS Print Destination PC DRILL PRN Screens 10 Alarm pages Reports Configuration operations Alarm sources Screen operations Data sources Alarm operations Display formats Report operations Translations entries Lookup table entries Print system summary Command scripts Exit At this point only the system configuration parameters and alarm definitions files are actually loaded The associated screen and report files are loaded only when an edit operation is attempted on a particular screen or report Once a system has been loaded you may proceed to edit the system as required Any changes are stored in the working memory of the ADS Builder To actually save the c
43. Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 To complete the entry press the Enter key The Scan Rate field is selected next ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name OQVER_TEMP Source Data Type SIGNED WORD PLC Location AIS Scan Rate x Ge or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp N Latched N Notify N Auto ack N Output text to following alarm pages Not all source locations can be specified as simply as in the example above At times you may only be interested in part of the data stored in a PLC memory location In other cases you may need to construct a source location for non consecutive bits of storage in the PLC In still other cases you may only be interested in a subset of a group of bits of storage ina PLC To support those situations the following more complicated grammar is supported by the ADS system lt bit reference gt lt reference subset gt lt PLC memory reference gt lt PLC memory gt lt reference gt lt modifier gt lt reference subset gt lt Source location gt lt PLC memory reference gt 0 lt PLC memory reference gt lt bit offset gt lt bit offset gt lt bit reference gt 0 lt bit reference gt where lt PLC memory gt lt reference gt and lt modifier gt are as defined above lt bit offset gt is a starting bit position within this locat
44. E EE 8 10 Eist RA SOS een eeen shoes e e e eE E E E D GIO 8 11 Print Pag ee tails entinen ean a 8 ae a eE o ea EA E AEAEE EENS 8 12 Error Messages for Alarm Pages a na nanuananunrana rarae 8 13 Alarm Sources oere a E a eo E E E be eae 8 14 Section 3 New Alarm Source esssessssssssssoseeseesees 8 15 Modify an Alarm Source 0 0 66 cece eens 8 34 Delete an Alarm Source 6 cece eee 8 35 Copy an AlarinSource es c3oeh Sie eaten ia E bee EENET 8 36 View Current Sources 6 eee eens 8 37 List SOULCES ice eee eee ait E Ea a Eaa ag eee Peake eh 8 39 Print SourceS enee iua te a ate Sea andsons whem ell nee Sede 8 40 Error Messages for Alarm Sources nanan eee eeee 8 42 GFK 0641C CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual x March 1994 Contents Chapter 9 Load Save Operations sa Hisitswn ti wiageniivad ew td ee oae tae 9 1 Section 1 Load System ssssssssssssssssesseseseseseo 9 3 Section 2 Save System to RAM Disk ssssssssssseseses o 9 6 Section 3 Archive System to PC cece eee e ee eee 9 9 Section 4 Cleat System sri 0004 04 04 eae iri ed ete adote 9 10 Section 5 Modify Current Directory 00e 000 9 12 Section 6 PrintDestination 0c cee cee ec cece eens 9 13 Print Destination for ADS Builder on ADC Module 9 13 Print Destination for PC Based Builder 00 9 13 Section 7 Refresh System
45. Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Modify a Translation An existing translation table entry may be modified in much the same manner in which it was originally created All information about the translation table entry may be changed except its name Changing the name of a translation table entry requires you to first delete it and then recreate it with the new name To initiate a translation table entry modification you must first select the Modify a translation menu option either by cursoring to the Modify a translation option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the M key The ADS Builder will prompt you for the name of the translation table entry to be modified Only existing translation table entries may be modified the New translation menu option must be used in order to create a new translation table entry In this example assume that you wish to modify the translation table entry ONE_HALEF Type the translation table entry name ONE_HALF into the prompt field When you press the Enter key the form for the specified translation table entry is displayed with the equation A field initially selected ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT CONZ Default Scan Rate Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Transl Modify a translation entry Name ONE_HALF ONE_HALF The variables used to perform the translation are described by the follow
46. Parameter Minimum Value Maximum Value A 100000000 1000000000 B 100000000 1000000000 C 100000000 1000000000 1 Only 7 digits of precision 2 Maximum of 6 digits to right of decimal point All three parameters of the equation must be provided If a particular parameter is unwanted that parameter should be specified as zero 0 By default the ADS system assigns the values A 1 B 0 and C 0 the default translation thus yields the same value as the input data value As an example of creating a translation table entry assume that you want to scale an input value so that the resulting translated value was 1 2 the input value with a post scaling offset of 100 You would first type in 0 5 for the scaling factor To complete the entry of the scaling factor press the Enter key Note that the next term the pre scaling offset is then selected Since in this example you do not wish to employ a pre scaling factor the default value of 0 is left unchanged To access the final parameter the post scaling factor press the Enter key You now type in the desired post scaling factor 100 The following example screen shows all of the factors entered in their respective fields ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Trans 1 Create a translation entry Name ONE_HALF The variables used t
47. Printer Device field The following devices are supported COM1 COM2 PC RAM and NULL COM1 and COM2 have the same meanings as discussed above for Terminal Device If PC is selected printer output will be directed to a file named SPOOLER LOG in the current folder on an attached PC which must be running TERMF The printer file will be opened when the Executor begins running the system and will be closed whenever the Executor is exited The RAM selection is similar to PC except that the file is opened on the ADCs RAM disk If printer output is not to be supported NULL is selected Any subsequent printer output will be lost with NULL selected as the printer device By default the printer device is set to NULL no printer output When you cursor onto the Printer Device field a window is opened on the screen showing what choices are available choices as mentioned above Assume that you wish to change the printer device from NULL to COM1 To select the desired choice press the key twice or the key three times COM1 will now be highlighted by the reverse video block ADS BUILDER Current System Name PUNCH Terminal CPC COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer CNULL Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Look
48. Scan Rate Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Transl View a translation entry Name BIAS BIAS ONE_HALF The variables used to perform the translation are described by the following function Output Value Ax Input Value B C A 8 125000 B 12 C 0 Specify Data Types Y N Y Input Data Type WORD Output Data Type FLOATING POINT Press lt RETURN gt to view next translation table entry else lt QUIT gt Pressing the Enter key at this point will display the next translation table entry in the list ONE_HALF Pressing the Enter key again will return you to the menu page since ONE_HALLF is the last translation table entry in the list GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 45 List Translations On the left hand side of the screen a list of translation table entry names is maintained in alphabetical order The ADS Builder allows you to page through the total list of translation table entry names To initiate the listing of a system s translation table entry names first select the List translations menu option either by cursoring to the List translations option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the L key In the example below twenty eight translation table entries are currently defined in the system When the Enter key is pressed the first in alphabetical order group of translation table entry names is displayed along with a prompt on the status line giving you the choice of li
49. TCOIT 1 4 TERME access to 12 1 Terminal menu option 2 1 Index 7 Index Index amp Text field alarm page Text insert mode simulating Text mode simulating insert Text static Timestamp alarm TMINI 1 4 B 3 TMOIT 1 4 6 3 Touch points 6 24 Touch screen assignments 4 13 Translation Table delete a translation error messages list translations modify a translation new translation print translations view current entries B 45 Trend graph 7 15 TTDUME command b 30 TTY TUNE_LOOP command b 78 o Undeleting lines UNDERSCORE attribute Using the fault tables module 15 2 Using the PID templates module 16 4 V Value output Vertical lines drawing 6 19 VIBM vga adapter Viewing data vT100 1 4 8 3 W WAIT_DATA command 30 B 79 B 80 WHITE attribute 3 27 Y YELLOW attribute GFK 0641
50. Use PLC data source MACHINE_1 to animate dynamic object SETPOINT on screen 347 utilizing the new scaling defined by translation table entry DEG_C ATTACH 347 SETPOINT DEG_C Apply a new scaling factor defined by translation table entry DEG_C to dynamic object SETPOINT on screen 347 retaining the PLC data source currently animating the dynamic object DYN_EDIT 347 SETPOINT REVERSE Perform a field edit on dynamic object SETPOINT on screen 347 using reverse video to denote that the edit has been enabled WAIT_DATA 53 NOPARTS Pause execution of the current command sequence until data is scanned for dynamic object NOPARTS on screen 53 Table 3 28 Miscellaneous Commands Action Description LOGTTM x Log message x to message line on screen LOGMES x Log message x to attached printer and to message line on screen REPORT n Output report n to the attached printer HELP n Overlay help screen indexed by n TIDUMP Output the terminal s screen to the attached printer REFRSH Clear and rewrite the screen PORTW p t Output text string to port EXIT Exit the ADS system The LOGTTM command is used to log a 1 19 character text string to the operator message prompt line on the screen Similar to LOGTTM the LOGMES command is used to log a 1 19 character text string to both the operator message prompt line and to the attached printer device The REPORT command is used to output a report to the attached pr
51. Utility Functions menu Note A hard reset of the ADC will be needed before the PCOP software can communicate with the ADC Refer to the beginning of this chapter for details on the file naming conventions followed in naming a system You should refer to that information in order to properly identify what files must be deleted to completely delete a system from either the RAM or the PC disk GFK 0641 Chapter 9 Load Save Operations 9 11 2 Section 5 Modify Current Directory To change the default directory used by ADS to load and save systems select the modify current directory option PC based Builder by cursoring to that option and pressing the Enter key or by pressing the M key At the prompt enter the required device and directory specification ADS BUILDER Current System Name MEMRY Terminal VT100 COM2 Default Scan Rate 25 S Printer NULL Default Alarm Scan Rate 25 S Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens 10 Alarm pages Reports Configuration operations Alarm sources Screen operations Data sources Alarm operations Display formats Report operations Translations entries Lookup table entries Print system summary Command scripts Terninal Exit Enter new default directory Note In general you should only select directories that are PCM compatible folders so that a system saved in it may be accessed later using PCOP 9 12 CIMP
52. XXXX The output data type of additional calculation XXXX must match the data type specified as part of the PLCSET command Invalid entry n Invalid background color has been specified Invalid entry n Invalid foreground color has been specified An invalid foreground background color specification was made for the command WA on line number n Invalid entry n Invalid item XXXX WA The command XXXX specified for line number n is unknown Invalid entry n Log message is too long The LOGTTM or LOGMES command on line number n contains a message string longer than the maximum 19 characters supported Invalid entry n MAX must be greater than or equal to MIN The maximum bound specified in a PLCSET command on line number n must be greater than or equal to the minimum Invalid entry n Missing A valid command always terminates with a right parenthesis but none was found WA on the line n Invalid entry n Must have both MAX and MIN WA The PLCSET command on line number n specified only one of the two bounds for min max value bounding if one is specified both must be Invalid entry n New data type does not match existing dynamic object The data type of the PLC data source specified in the ATTACH command on line number n does not match what is required by the referenced dynamic object Invalid entry n Object XXXX is not editable WA Dynamic
53. You are now returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed on the status line indicating the modification was completed If you want to cancel the modification disregarding any changes which have been made press the lt Quit gt key An informative message will be displayed on the status line indicating that no changes were made to the alarm page If you specify an alarm page number which does not currently exist you will be returned to the menu page with the message Invalid alarm page specified displayed on the status line CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Delete an Alarm Page Analarm page may be irrecoverably removed from a system by deleting it To initiate an alarm page deletion select the Delete an alarm page menu option either by cursoring to that option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the D key The ADS Builder will prompt you for the name of the alarm page to be deleted Only existing alarm pages which are not referenced by any alarm source in the system may be deleted ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Alarm Pages ADS Print Destination STDPRN AREA_4 34 New alarm page Modify an alarm page View alarm pages List pages Print page details Alarm sources Enter
54. access the override indicator for I12 In this case you would specify a source data type of STATE and the source location as I12 0 Assume that you wish to access the current date as maintained in the PLC You would specify a source data type of LONGWORD and a source location of DATE Assume that you wish to access the PLC ID as configured in the PLC You would specify a source data type of BYTE and a source location of PLC_ID Assume that you wish to access the fault indicator for the Genius block configured as block 27 located on bus 1 of the Genius Bus Controller located in slot 5 of rack 1 You would specify a source data type of STATE and a source location of M_15127 Assume that you wish to access the PLC state information from the PLC status word You would specify a source data type of WORD and a source location of PLC_STATUS 12 15 As you can see from the above examples very complicated source locations may be specified When specifying these source locations you must take care however that data values are specified in the correct bit order If they are not in the correct order erroneous data will be gathered and displayed The ADS system assumes that you are correctly specifying what is really desired but you must tell it what you actually want CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Scan Rate The Scan Rate field defines the synchronous rate at which the ADS system wi
55. across the region In the following example the text is to be selected which is between rows 10 and 12 and columns 15 to 24 The cursor is currently located at row 12 column 15 12345678690 1234567890 12345678690 DRILL 50 Row Col Text Static 6 14 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 6 Pressing the lt Select gt key initiates the select operation The character at which the cursor is currently positioned is then displayed in reverse video to indicate that it is currently selected 12345678690 1234567890 1234567890 DRILL 50 Row Col Text Static The key is then pressed 9 times to select the remaining column width of the region to be selected 12345678690 1234567890 1234567890 DRILL 50 Row Col Z Text Chapter 6 Screen Painter and Report Painter 6 15 To complete the select press the key 2 times to select the remaining row depth of the region to be selected 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 DRILL 50 Row Col Z Text Static The select operation can be cancelled by pressing the lt Select gt key again before performing any operation on the selected region The reverse video is removed from the region and the cursor is left in its current position The video attributes and foreground color on supported color terminals of a selected region may be altered To do this first select the region and then press the appropriate video attrib
56. alarm source This command is especially useful in two different situations First it supports an easy method to acknowledge a number of alarms which have been logged due to a single failure without individually acknowledging each one Second when coupled with PLCSET commands in a command script you can provide a mechanism whereby multiple ADS systems running on multiple ADC modules within the same PLC can inform each other when a particular alarm has been acknowledged at one of the stations within one ADS system Disabling of Alarm Logging During execution if the total available memory on the ADC module falls below 30 000 bytes or the largest block of contiguous bytes falls below 8 000 bytes logging alarm text to the alarm pages is automatically disabled alarm actions are unaffected and still occur normally A message noting that alarm logging has been disabled will be placed on the nine lowest numbered alarm pages in the system By acknowledging previously CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 acknowledged alarms memory may be freed up to re enable alarm logging Total available memory must increase to at least 32 000 bytes for alarm logging to be re enabled Again a message will be logged to the nine lowest numbered alarm pages noting that alarm logging has been re enabled Section 5 Printing Data to a Printer Allreports see REPORT command to be sent to a printer du
57. an alarm page Unlike other components of a system the alarm page name is NOT used to uniquely identify the various alarm pages Instead the alarm page number serves that function Because of this the ADS system does NOT enforce uniqueness between alarm page names A name may be from one to eight alphanumeric and underscore _ characters and is NOT case sensitive As an example of naming an alarm page assume that the alarm page is to be named AREA_4 Type the name AREA_4 into the Name field To complete the entry press the Enter key At this point the Name entry is completed and the Number field is selected next Number The alarm page number is used to uniquely identify alarm pages within a single system Alarm page numbers may range from 1 to 999 inclusive providing for an absolute maximum of 999 alarm pages in a single system Alarm page numbers do not need to be assigned consecutively nor do they need to be defined in an increasing numeric order As an example of assigning an alarm page number assume that you want to assign 34 as the alarm page number Simply type the number 34 into the Number field To complete the entry press the Enter key The Starting Row field is selected next Chapter 8 Alarm Operations 8 3 8 4 Starting Row Rows Starting Column and Columns You can control the size of an alarm page and the position it is displayed on the terminal device by specifying the page s starting coordinates on the scree
58. an alarm source View current sources List sources Print sources Print alarm sources fron J to CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 A prompt is displayed at the bottom of the screen Print alarm source details from HHHHFHEHHE to HHFHFHFHHFHFHREHE Depending upon the response entered into the from and to field several different listings can be generated The listing options are as shown below from lt idl gt to lt id2 gt gt print out from lt idl gt to gt print out from to lt id2 gt gt print out from vv to lt id2 gt gt print out from lt idl gt to ARN gt print out from vsr to o gt print out from EOF Si PRE gt print out from e to ar gt print out poop pp PRR PB larm sources idl larm source idl larm source id2 ll alarm sources alarm sources alarm sources alarm sources alarm sources to id2 up to id2 from ill Pressing the lt Quit gt key aborts the print operation After selection of the required range of alarm sources to be printed the ADS Builder sends the information to the Print Destination specified using the Print Destination option see Load Save Operations Chapter 9 Alarm source detail information is formatted as shown in the following examples ALARM SOURCE LISTING Alarm Source TANK_ amp LEVEL Data
59. and to highlight a specific fault table entry The lt Exit gt function key assigned to the F10 key is used to exit the Fault Tables module GFK 0641 Chapter 15 Fault TablesModule 15 3 Chapter PID Templates Module 16 The ADS PID module provides a complete interface to the Series 90 PID loops allowing you to configure monitor and tune loops that have been established in ladder logic The ADS PID module is an optional software module that you can install on the ADC board Once loaded on the board the PID module can be accessed as a stand alone system ie without using an ADS system or as a series of predefined screens which can be invoked by commands within an ADS system Note The PID module may NOT be executed on either the GE Fanuc Mini or Touch Mini OIT terminal It can be run on all other supported terminals Overview of the PID Module For information on how to install the PID module refer to Sections 4 and 5 in Chapter 7 ADS Setup Utility in the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS User s Manual Also refer to Chapter 13 Options PID in this manual for information on using the PC Based Builder to create the necessary loop definitions for the PID option module Running the PID Module in Stand Alone Mode The PID module can be executed in stand alone mode only when the Development environment of the ADS software has been installed on the ADC module The PID module must have been included in the Development version via the ADS Se
60. are as shown below from from from from from from from from lt idl gt lt idl gt rn nxn lt idl gt nxn rn S Wee to to to to to to to to lt id2 gt nn lt id2 gt lt id2 gt Wa we Wa Wa print print print print print print print print out out out out out out out out command scripts idl to id2 command scripts idl command scripts id2 all all all all all command command command command command scripts scripts scripts scripts scripts up to id2 from ill Pressing the lt Quit gt key aborts the print operation After selection of the required range of command scripts to be printed the ADS Builder sends the information to the Print Destination specified using the Print Destination option see Load Save Operations Chapter 9 GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 87 Command script information is formatted as shown in the following examples Command Script Listing Command Script RUN_FAULT ACTION_OFF CLRALM PLC_FAULT ACTION_ON Command Script SETQ PLCSETW Q065 65635 PLCSETW Q81 65535 PLCSETW Q97 21 Command Script SETTER PLCSETB Q1 1 PLCSETB Q2 0 PLCSETB Q3 1 PLCSETB 04 0 PLCSETB Q5 1 PLCSETB I1 0 PLCSETB I2 1 PLCSETB I3 0 PLCSETB I4 1 PLCSETB I5 0 Command Script ZEROS PLCSETW M457 0
61. area only the Enter key located with the QWERTY keys should be used Pressing the lt Save gt key from any field immediately completes the form if all required fields have been filled in The lt Quit gt key may be used to return to a higher menu level or to abort the data entry form Use of 1 and lt gt Characters with Key Names The and lt gt character pairs have special meaning in this document when used to indicatekeys If a key name is enclosed in brackets the key is actually labeled with that name on the keyboard If a key name is enclosed by angle brackets lt gt the key s location on the keyboard must be determined from the following table When using this table be sure to use the column that matches your terminal type based on terminal selection that you made on the menu program screen described in Chapter 1 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Referemce Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Table 2 1 Key Functions for System Building Terminal MOIT COIT Key Function TMOIT TCOIT MPC CPC MIBM CIBMt VT100 EIBM VIBM GOLD F11 PF1 Insert Help F12 PF2 Home Quit F10 KPO Esc or F10 Save GOLD F10 GOLD KPO Alt F10 Object list GOLDS GOLDS Alt S Refresh screen W Clear field X Beginning of line GOLD lt End of line GOLD gt Top of screen GOLD Bottom of screen GOLD 4 Video select F1 Video clear GOLD F1 GOLD KP1 Alt F1 Color F4 Black red green Yellow Blue Magenta Cyan White C
62. bit b1 from 15 bit b2 is from bit b3 of R123 bits b3 b5 are from bits b13 through b15 of R123 and bit b6 is from T7 In this case you have already specified a source data type of WORD The source location would be specified as M1 I5 R123 3 13 15 T7 Assume that you wish to access the override indicator for I12 In this case you would specify a source data type of STATE and the source location as 12 0 Assume that you wish to access the fault indicator for the Genius block configured as block 27 located on bus 1 of the Genius Bus Controller located in slot 5 of rack 1 You would specify a source data type of STATE and a source location of M_15127 Assume that you wish to access the PLC state information from the PLC status word You would specify a source data type of WORD and a source location of PLC_STATUS 12 15 As you can see from the above examples very complicated source locations may be specified When specifying these source locations you must take care however that data values are specified in the correct bit order If they are not in the correct order erroneous data will be gathered and displayed The ADS system assumes that you are correctly specifying what is really desired but you must tell it what you actually want CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Scan Rate The Scan Rate field defines the synchronous rate at which the ADS Executor will scan the
63. displayed will return the status line to the display Color is NOT supported by system s output terminal 6 6 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 6 Section 5 Selecting the Character Set There are up to four character sets which can be selected for screen report editing The normal set consists of the standard ASCII character set An Alternate character set is also supported The alternate character set gives access to the non ASCII characters supported by a terminal These non ASCII characters are typically used to create lines or special symbols on the screen You should consult your terminal user s manual for more details A third character set Character Set 2 is currently supported only for the GE Fanuc Operator Interface Terminal both monochrome and color and the Nematron Touch Operator Interface Terminal both monochrome and color Character set 2 is an extension of the alternate character set refer to GFK 0505 the Operator Interface Terminal User s Manual or GEK 90817 the Series Six OIT User s Manual for more details A fourth character set Character Set 3 is currently supported only for the GE Fanuc Operator Interface Terminal both monochrome and color and the Nematron Touch Operator Interface Terminal both monochrome and color Character set 3 is an extension of the alternate character set refer to GFK 0505 the Operator Interface Terminal User s Manual or
64. double high wide mode The required operation was rejected because the current line has already been set up for double size Paste operation ignored Nothing has previously been cut into the paste buffer System terminal does not support touch screen operations The target terminal does not support a touch screen You must use SELECT before CUT In order to cut a region of static text it first must be selected 6 28 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Chapter Dynamic Objects Dynamic objects are used to display the state of values within the PLC These objects are manipulated within the screen painter refer to the previous chapter for more details on using the painter A dynamic object might be the display of a value in a certain format or the display of a string of text or the changing of a video attribute or color for a block of text or the movement of an object Virtually all the animation of a system is achieved by the definition of dynamic objects In addition two predefined dynamic objects are supported by ADS Bar Chart Trend Graph These objects are predefined in that the selection of one or other of the predefined dynamic objects results in the automatic creation of an object of the correct type All that is required is for the size of the object to be specified by selection Refer to Creating Predefined Dynamic Objects for further details Dynamic object
65. entry may be changed except its name Changing the name of a lookup table entry requires that you first delete the entry and then recreate it with the desired new name To initiate a lookup table entry modification first select the Modify a lookup table entry menu option either by cursoring to the desired option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the M key ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0MZ Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Lookup Table ADS Print Destination STDPRN MESSAGE odify a lookup table entry Delete a lookup table entry View current entries List lookups New lookup table entry Print lookups Enter the name of the lookup table entry to edit DE The ADS Builder will prompt you for the name of the lookup table to be modified Only existing lookup table entries may be modified the New lookup table entry menu option must be used in order to create a new lookup table entry As an example of modifying a lookup table assume that you want to modify the lookup table entry MESSAGE First you must type the desired lookup table entry name MESSAGE into the prompt field When the Enter key is pressed the form for the specified lookup table entry is displayed with the Input Data Type field initially selected which is the default data type WORD You can now proceed to change any
66. fault table has changed since last read by this de vice 0 I O fault table same as when last read PLC chg PLC Fault Entry changed flag 1 PLC fault table has changed since last read by this device 0 PLC fault table same as when last read Con Swp Constant sweep mode setting 1 Constant sweep mode enabled for current control program 0 Constant sweep mode not enabled Ovr Swp Oversweep flag if constant sweep mode enabled Shows whether the constant sweep value was exceeded on the last sweep 1 Constant sweep value was exceeded 0 Normal sweep The Z MEMORY and MAX_BLOCK locations are internal to ADS i e they are not present in the PLC There are 1024 references in Z memory Z1 through Z1024 These are typically used for special interlocks in your system The demonstration systems CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 provided with the product have a number of examples that show how Z memory can be used MEMORY returns the number of free unallocated bytes of memory left on the ADC module while the Executor is running It is useful while you are developing your system to monitor the maximum runtime memory usage You should specify a source data type of LONGWORD Any dynamic object referencing a data source whose PLC location is MEMORY should allow for up to a 6 digit number You may need to monitor memory usage on multiple screens since memory shrinks and expan
67. flagged The Process Name and Group Name fields allow you to enter information about the loop which help identify the part of the process that the loop belongs to These fields are CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 optional and can contain any information desired Up to 12 characters can be entered in each field Note that the data is not forced into upper case it is displayed exactly as you enter it The Process Name entry can also serve as a more detailed description of the functionality of the loop than only the loop name The Process Name is displayed beside the loop name in the PID loop selection menu The Loop Block Location specifies the address of the loop in PLC memory This address specifies a block of information pertaining to the loop For more details refer to Chapter 11 of the Logicmaster 90 Programming Software Reference Manual GFK 0265 Series 90 30 users refer to Chapter 10 of the Series 90 30 90 20 Programmable Controllers Reference Manual GFK 0467 An invalid location is indicated by an error message Note When Loops are setup in PLC ladder logic the maximum control over the loop can be obtained by ensuring that the PV and SP locations point to the PV and SP values contained in the loop block This prevents SP adjustment being automatically overridden by the PLC when the loop is placed back into automatic mode see Loop Monitoring for details Two sets
68. gt or Return when positioned on the last field The values entered will be checked and if valid the new loop information stored The list of defined loops displayed on the Setup screen will be updated to include the new loop An example loop definition is shown below LOOP SETUP Def ined Loops Create Loop Definition Loop Name TANK_1 PLC Loop Number 1 Process Name Pressurizer Group Name Building 4 Loop Block Location R40 PU SP Engineering Units PSI Units Lower Bound PLC Lower Bound Units Upper Bound PLC Upper Bound CV Engineering Units Units Lower Bound PLC Lower Bound Units Upper Bound PLC Upper Bound User Configurable Manual Mode H M CONFIG SMONITORATUNE 3 so SCREATE MODIFY SDELETE SAVE FQEXIT CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Modify a Loop Definition To modify the definition of a previously defined loop press F7 A prompt is displayed on the bottom line of the screen requesting that you enter the name or number of the loop to be modified A loop selection menu which contains all of the currently existing loop names is also displayed LOOP SETUP Def ined Loops TANK_1 1 TANK_1 iPressurizer i M eee LONFIG EMON I TORA TUNE CREATE MODIFY SDELETE SAVE BVEXIT Enter Name or Number of the loop to modify Note The example shown above shows the LOOP CONFIGURATION screen but the same Loop Selection f
69. have chosen into the Name field To complete the entry press the Enter key In addition to completing the entry of your system name the next field Data Type is selected Data Type Every display format must be tagged as to what type of data it operates on The data types supported by the ADS system are specified in the table below Table 3 4 Source Data Types for Display Formats Data Type Size Bits Value Range State 1 OFE ON Byte 8 0 to 255 Word 16 0 to 65535 Signed Word 16 32768 to 32767 Longword 32 0 to 4294967295 Signed Longword 32 2147483648 to 2147483647 Floating Point 32 999999999 99 to 9999999999 99 String 1to 19 ASCII characters Only 7 digits of precision When you cursor onto the Data Type field a window is opened on the screen showing what choices are available By default the system selects WORD for the data type ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate Create a display format Action Signed word Longword Signed longuord Floating point String GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 25 Range A data type must be picked which makes sense with regards to its intended use in the system being built in fact the ADS Builder will ensure that the type of data specified is consistent with the values specified in the Range field see below and with any other object e g PLC data source it is later associated with For exa
70. help is available in the ADS Builder Use the lt HELP gt key to access the help information related to any point in the builder CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Referemce Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Chapter GFK 0641 3 Configuration Operations This chapter describes the Configuration operations submenu When the Configuration operations submenu is selected the following example screen is displayed Another menu window is opened on the screen giving additional options of Modify system parameters PLC data sources Display formats Translation table Eng unit conversion table Lookup table Command scripts This chapter is divided into sections with each section describing one of the options for the Configuration Operations Note that in most cases only the initial screen will be shown for each submenu since the general format for each one is similar Each of the options from each submenu will be described in the text Any unique screens will also be shown ADS BUILDER Current System Name PUNCH Terminal CPC Printer Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts CON2 NULL Dir ADS_PCNRFNAN PCM eooooeoceoceoo Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN odify system paramete
71. in RAM 0 cee e cence 9 14 Section 8 Execute System in RAM 0 cece cee cece 9 16 Error Messages for Load Save Operations 0 eens 9 17 Chapter 10 Print System Summary sie os aGesis tie ose wewedeswnave oe eee 10 1 Chapter 11 Exiting the ADS Builder osha tce wins sateen wee beau ais 11 1 Chapter 12 Terminal ADS Off line PC Based Builder Only 12 1 Chapter 13 Options PID 345 wees to aw anda eee de ewe eine ees 13 1 Create LOop airs canst soins deer ao E R ltd etch E E EEE is arse h 13 2 Modify LOOP a es makpak t aae eho R a BOER RO eee ee eed A 13 3 Delete Ts Op rosta a a EEE Ea Gai ara ie eas Vg eee 13 3 TO aC File eis clon a Eh eM Ae oe ee SAR ts MASA clon ARE Sle MSI ot 13 4 Save File cr octane ha ened Bebia En a Gabi e eee 13 5 Exit Options PID Screen arotan na etae a a a EAA ANE 13 7 Chapter 14 Running an ADS System Starting the ADS Execution 0 cece eee cee eens 14 1 Section 1 Initial Startup 3 sc ias cece en ieee eine tae seb i 14 2 Section 2 Viewing Data on a Screen cee cece eens 14 2 Section 3 Operator Prompts and Messages 4 14 3 Section 4 Alarm Handling During System Execution 14 3 Alarms Not Associated with Alarm Pages 0 cece 14 3 Alarms Associated with Alarm Pages 0 000 c cece 14 3 GFK 0641C CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual xi March 1994 Contents
72. individual commands Table 8 4 Get PLC Data Action Description PLCGETB lod Get a STATE value from location loc PLCGETBY loc Get a BYTE value from location loc PLCGETW lod Get an UNSIGNED WORD value from location loc PLCGETI lo Get aSIGNED WORD value from location loc PLCGETL lod Get an UNSIGNED LONGWORD value from location loc PLCGETS lo Get aSIGNED LONGWORD value from location loc PLCGETF lod Get a FLOATING POINT value from location loc 1 The syntax for specifying the loc reference is the same as for specifying a PLC data source location refer to PLC Data Sources for details except that the references must be consecutive within the same PLC memory type For example PLCGETW R1 and PLCGETW R1 1 9 are valid but PLCGETW R1 1 R2 5 9 and PLCGETW R1 0 14 Q1 are not CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 Table 8 5 Set PLC Data Action Description PLCSETB L v2 p c4 mn mx5 Set location 1 to STATE value v or prompt if no v PLCSETBY 1 v2 p c4 mn3 mx5 Set location 1 to UNSIGNED BYTE value v or prompt if no v PLCSETW E v2 p c4 mn3 mx5 Set location 1 to UNSIGNED WORD value v or prompt if no v PLCSETI L v2 p c4 mn mx Set location 1 to SIGNED WORD value v or prompt if no v PLCSETL L v2 p c4 mn mx Set location 1 to UNSIGNED LONGWORD value v or prompt if no v PLCSETS E v2 p c4 mn m
73. is chosen the ADS software will NOT warn you of that fact the original system will be irretrievably lost when a subsequent system save operation is performed The next example screen assumes that the system name is set to DRILL To set the system name type in the desired name of the system DRILL overwriting the default name in the reverse video block To complete the entry press the Enter key Note that after the Enter key is pressed the next field Terminal is selected next reverse video block is now on this field The terminal field indicates on what type of terminal the resulting system is to be run By default it will indicate the same terminal type on which it is currently running Typically the setting of this field will never need to be changed However it is possible to build a system while connected to one type of terminal and then run the system while connected to a different type In such a case you would enter the name the target terminal in the terminal field CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 The following target terminal types are supported e COIT Color GE Fanuc Operator Interface Terminal IC600KD512 514 532 534 e MOIT Monochrome GE Fanuc Operator Interface Terminal IC600KD510 513 530 533 e MINI Mini GE Fanuc Operator Interface Terminal IC600KD515 e TMINI Touch mini OIT IC600KD516 e VT100 DEC VT100 compatible or superset terminal e MIBM
74. keys associated with an existing screen may be edited For example assume that you want to edit the function keys associated with screen 50 REGS Type that screen number into the prompt field When you press the Enter key the form for the specified screen s function key assignments is displayed The data entry form consists of fifteen fields one field for each of the fifteen function keys AK1 through AK15 Assume that you want to overlay alarm page 12 whenever function key AK1 is pressed You would now type the required command into the key assignment field for AK1 ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Screen key assignments for REGS 50 pshalm 12 GFK 0641 Chapter 4 ScreenOperations 4 11 4 12 Also you want to execute command script END_OF_DAY whenever function key AK4 is pressed The Enter key is pressed three times which completes the assignment for AK1 and then selects AK4 Again type the desired command script assignment into the field ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Screen key assignments for REGS 50 pshalm 12 end_of_day When you are finished editing the key definitions press the lt Save gt key to complete the entry alternatively the Enter key may be pressed with the AK15 field selected You will be returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed on the status line indicating that the key assignments editing function is complete The edit o
75. large A default scan rate greater than the maximum supported has been entered ENTRY ERROR Default alarm scan time is too large A default alarm scan rate greater than the maximum supported has been entered ENTRY ERROR Startup screen does not exist You cannot reference a startup screen that does not exist Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 7 Section 2 PLC Data Sources 3 8 The following pages describe how to define the data sources in the PLC from which data is to be read that is to be used in the operator interface system The PLC data sources must be defined to indicate from where in the PLC data is to come and how it should be treated The ADS system can only access those PLC locations which have been defined There is no predefined limit on the number of data sources which may be defined for a system you are constrained only by the amount of available memory on the ADC module Your data sources can either be defined here before referencing them with a dynamic object see Screen Operations Chapter 4 or they can be created from within the Screen Painter when you are creating a dynamic object In order to access the PLC data sources submenu cursor to that menu selection ADS BUILDER Current System Name Terminal COIT C0MZ Printer C0M1 Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Data Sources DRILL Default Scan Rate 1 00 s 1 00 s Default Al arm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination S
76. least one alarm page should be specified Multiple alarm page specifications are useful if you want to categorize an alarm in multiple ways e g plant area alarm occurred in priority of alarm etc otherwise a single alarm page specification is sufficient Note It is important to remember that you must have previously created any alarm page that is specified on the Output text to Alarm Pages s As an example of specifying an alarm page to which text is to be output assume that you want to log the occurrence of this alarm to alarm page 34 Type the alarm page number into the current field ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name OQVER_TEMP Source Data Type SIGNED WORD PLC Location AIS Scan Rate x or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Range 150 175 Action pshalm 34 Text Boiler temperature is dangerously hight Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp Y Latched Y Notify N Auto ack N Output text to following alarm pages a Pressing the lt Save gt key at this point completes the entry of the alarm source You are returned to the menu page along with an informative message displayed on the status line indicating that the alarm source creation is complete Chapter 8 Alarm Operations 8 33 Modify an Alarm Source 8 34 An existing alarm source may be modified in much the same manner in which it was originally created All information concern
77. may be defined for a single command script The tables below define the commands which are valid for use in a command script Table 3 21 Get PLC Data Action Description PLCGETB lod Get a STATE value from location loc PLCGETBY loc Get a BYTE value from location loc PLCGETW loc Get an UNSIGNED WORD value from location loc PLCGETI loc Get aSIGNED WORD value from location loc PLCGETL lod Get an UNSIGNED LONGWORD value from location loc PLCGETS loc Get a SIGNED LONGWORD value from location loc PLCGETF loc Get a FLOATING POINT value from location loc 1 The syntax for specifying the loc reference is the same as for specifying a PLC data source location refer to PLC Data Sources for details except that the references must be consecutive within the same PLC memory type For example PLCGETW R1 and PLCGETW R1 1 9 are valid but PLCGETW R1 1 R2 5 9 and PLCGETW R1 0 14 Q1 are not The PLCGET commands are used to access infrequently viewed data from the PLC and display it on the operator message prompt line Examples of valid Get PLC Data commands are PLCGETB I1 Get STATE value located at I1 PLCGETW R1 Get WORD value located at R1 Table 3 22 Set PLC Data Action Description PLCSETB L v2 p3 c4 mn5 mx Set location 1 to STATE value v or prompt if no v PLCSETBY 1 v2 p3 c4 mn gt mx gt Set location 1 to UNSIGNED BYTE value v or prompt if no v PLCSETW LL v2 p3 c4 mn gt mx gt
78. name This name must be unique with regards to PLC data source names but does not need to be unique from all other names in the ADS system for example the system itself might be named DRILL and a PLC data source might also be named DRILL A name may be from one to twelve alphanumeric and underscore _ characters and is NOT case sensitive It is recommended that you choose names which reflect the meaning of the data which will be retrieved For example the names PARTS_COUNT TEMP_SETTING and ESTOP are much more meaningful than the names REG1 or XYZ A little forethought in the selection of names will make the resulting system much more self documenting and thus more maintainable As an example of creating a data source assume that the you wish to create a data source with the name PARTS_COUNT Simply type the desired name PARTS_COUNT into the Name field which is highlighted by a reverse video block To complete the entry press the Enter key Note that after the Enter key is pressed the next field Source Data Type is selected next reverse video block is now on this field GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 9 3 10 Source Data Type Every data source must be tagged to indicate what type of data it represents The data types supported by the ADS system are specified in the table below Table 3 1 Source Data Type Supported for Data Sources Data Type Size Bits Value Range State 1 OFE ON Byte 8 0 t
79. not verify system structures prior to save check system configuration Some component of the system e g a display format which is referenced by a dynamic object on a screen or report has been deleted Error opening system configuration file XXXX The typical cause of this error is attempting to load a system XXXX that does not exist in the currently selected folder Invalid file structure in system alarm fileXXXX The alarm ALM file for system XXXX in the currently selected folder has been corrupted Invalid file structure in system configuration file XXXX The configuration CFG file for system XXXX in the currently selected folder has been corrupted GFK 0641 Chapter 9 Load Save Operations 9 17 Chapter Print System Summary 10 The Print System Summary menu option provides the capability of printing out your entire system database or only the statistics concerning the system To initiate the printing of your system first select the Print System Summary menu option either by cursoring to that option on the menu and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the P key The ADS Builder will prompt you for whether or not a full listing is required ADS BUILDER Current System Name MEMRY Terminal VT100 COM2 Default Scan Rate 2 Printer NULL Default Alarm Scan Rate a Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN 5 5 s sS Screens 10 Alarm page
80. object In order to modify a dynamic object the cursor must first be placed somewhere on the dynamic object The status area will indicate when the cursor is properly positioned on the dynamic object The value of R100 is 99999 DRILL 50 Row 3 Col g Text Static Pressing the lt Modify dynamic object gt key initiates the modification of the dynamic object The dynamic object is shown in blinking reverse video and the data entry form is displayed on the screen The value of R100 is EEEE Modify Dynamic Ob ject Name R100_DISPLAY Data Source Additional Calc Display Format NEG_POS Display Value Y Y N Hex Notation Left Justify Zero Fill Available for Edit Pressing the lt Save gt key completes the modification of the dynamic object At any point the modification of the dynamic object can be canceled by pressing the lt Quit gt key 7 10 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Deleting a Dynamic Object A dynamic object may be irrecoverably deleted from the screen or report by first positioning the cursor somewhere on the dynamic object and then pressing the lt Delete dynamic object gt key Both the characters on the screen comprising the dynamic object and the associated data entry form will be deleted from the system In the example below the dynamic object R100_DISPLAY is to be deleted The cursor is first positioned on the object Note Any refere
81. object XXXX referenced in the DYN_EDIT command on line number n was not defined to be available for edit when it was created Invalid entry n Only one parameter is allowed for GET Too many parameters were specified for one of the PL CGET commands Invalid entry n Too many bits for data type WA The PLC location specified in the command on line n requires more storage space bits than provided for by the data type specified as part of the command Invalid entry n XXXX is not a valid attribute The video attribute XXXX specified in the DYN_EDIT or SCN_EDIT command on WA line number n is invalid GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 89 Chapter Screen Operations 4 This chapter describes the Screen Operations submenu When the Screen operations submenu is selected from the main menu screen the following screen is displayed Notice that another menu window is opened on the screen giving the additional options of New screen Modify screen Screen paint Delete screen Copy screen Key assignments List screens Print screen details If the terminal defined for the current system the terminal defined on the Modify System Parameters data entry form supports touch points on the screen for instance the GE Fanuc Touch Mini OIT an additional option is automatically added to the screen operations menu Touch screen assignments Each of the above options is described in thi
82. of the ADS Builder access to the Print options is only available if the ADS Print Module and Spooler are installed To initiate a print of the defined screens select the Print screen details option by either cursoring to the option and pressing the Enter key or by pressing the P key ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Screens ADS Print Destination STDPRN SCREENO1 SCREEN13 13 SCREENO2 SCREEN14 14 SCREENO3 SCREEN15 15 ns SCREENO4 SCREEN16 16 New screen i SCREENOS SCREEN1 17 Modify screen SCREENO6 SCREEN18 18 Screen paint SCREENO SCREEN19 19 Delete screen SCREENOS SCREENZO 20 Copy screen SCREENOS SCREENZ1 21 Key assignments SCREEN10 SCREENZ2 22 List screens SCREEN11 SCREENZ3 23 Print screen details SCREEN12 SCREEN24 24 Print screen details from Jj to A prompt is displayed at the bottom of the screen Print screen details from H HIH HEREHERE CO HHIHH HHH HH H HH HHHH CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 Depending upon the response entered into the from and to field several different listings can be generated The listing options are as shown below from lt idl gt to lt id2 gt gt print out screens idl to id2 from lt idl gt to gt
83. or reset ADC While the refresh operation is proceeding you will be informed as to which file is being loaded to the ADC module via a Loading lt filename gt message Upon successful completion of the refresh operation you will see the message Refresh complete GFK 0641 Chapter 9 Load Save Operations 9 15 9 Section 8 Execute System in RAM The system specified the last time the ADS software was installed on the ADC module may be executed via the Execute system in RAM menu option You may either cursor to that item and press the Return key or just press the E key to initiate the refresh operation This menu option is meant to be used in conjunction with the Refresh system in RAM menu option see Section 7 After initiating the execute operation the Builder will first check that an ADC module is attached and online such that it may be communicated with ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI CSTDIO gt Default Scan Rate 08s Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate 58s Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Load system Save system to disk Modify current directory Refresh system in RAM Clear system Print destination PNOrPUWUMWOrRW Checking for attached onli
84. paragraph second sentence changed your computer s TERME to the target terminal s Added If your system to beginning of third sentence e Added new Chapter 13 Options PID Former Chapter 13 is now Chapter 14 Former Chapter 14 is now Chapter 15 Former Chapter 15 is now Chapter 16 Page 16 1 added sentence beginning with Also refer to at end of paragraph under Overview of the PID Module e Page 16 3 added NOTE after first paragraph Deleted see Appendix at end of item 3 in list Page 16 4 Added NOTE after first paragraph under Setup Screen e Page A 1 added LUDCO and TTY to ADS Menu Screen Items Page A 2 added LUDCO to list of terminals under Modify System Parameters Page A 9 changed several entries in column 4 Content of this Manual This manual contains the following information Chapter 1 ADS Main Menu describes the ADS menu screen which allows you to select either the ADS Builder create or modify a system or the ADS Executor execute an existing system Chapter 2 Introduction to Using the ADS Builder provides a description of components of an ADS system and how to begin using the system Chapters 3 through 10 describe the various submenus that you will use when creating an Operator Interface System and guide you through the entries for each operation Chapter 3 Configuration Operations Chapter 4 Screen Operations Cha
85. print out screens idl from to lt id2 gt gt print out screens id2 from to lt id2 gt gt print out all screens up to id2 from lt idl gt to 7 gt print out all screens from ill from nx EO Se Is gt print out all screens from to Trn gt print out all screens from to 7 gt print out all screens Pressing the lt Quit gt key aborts the print operation After selection of the required range of screens to be printed the ADS Builder sends the information to the Print Destination specified using the Print Destination option see the Load Save menu discussion in Chapter 9 Screen detail information is formatted as shown in the following examples SCREEN DETAILS LISTING Screen Number 5 ATTACH Start Row 3 End Row 14 Start Column 9 End Column 80 Image NORMAL Background BLACK Foreground WHITE Dynamic Object Dynamic Object RAW_VALUE Start Row 9 Start Column 9 End Row 9 End Column 14 Data Source R70 Additional Calc Data Format Display Value Yes SCALED VALUE Start Row 9 Left_justify End Row 9 End Column 40 Start Column 35 Data Source Additional Calc Data Format Display Value Chapter 4 ScreenOperations R70 TIMES 1 Yes Left_justify 4 15 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 oe A E E O teen hea caie gitate Pinte eve Bea seth ntl E E aidan OES ow DYNAMIC ATTA
86. scripts display formats 8 24 lookup table modify system parameters B 2 PLC data sources translation table 3 38 CONFIGURE_LOOP command i B 78 b2 Confirming an alarm 4 7 CPC terminal table b 3 Creating a Dynamic Object additional calculation data source ee Cursor moving Cut and Paste Cutting a region 6 22 CYAN attribute D Data Sources PLC delete a data source error messages list sources modify a data source new data source 3 9 print sources view current sources Data type input 3 41 Data type output 3 42 3 62 Data types 3 25 Data printing Data viewing Debug mode executor debug mode Deleting lines Device printer Display stacked alarm page Display Formats delete a display format 3 33 error messages 3 37 list formats modify a display format 3 32 new display format print formats view current formats Display alarm page Double Wide DoubleHigh Wide Charac ters GFK 0641 GFK 0641 Drawing lines horizontal 6 19 Drawing lines vertical DYN_EDIT command B 30 Dynamic object predefined Dynamic Objects available for edit flag 7 9 cop and pasting a dynamic object 7 13 creating a dynamic object deleting a dynamic object display format 7 7 error messages modifying a dynamic object 7 10 E Editing field Editor screen report EIBM ega adapter B 3 Engineering units conversion tabl
87. special case where the data type is forced to be BYTE within the ADS Builder yet requires an XXXXXXxX field picture in the painter 2The full syntax for Main Program locations is lt program_name gt P lt address gt 3 The full syntax for Sub Program locations is lt block_name gt L lt address gt The parameters listed in this table are as follows GFK 0641 PLCMemory Size Reference Over Diags Slice Ref Write Chapter3 Configuration Operations Refers to the identifier used in the lt location_type gt field of the location reference syntax Data size in bits Is there an override bit associated with the location type Override bits are specified by using O in the lt modifier gt field of the location reference syntax Is there a diagnostic bit associated with the location type Diagnostic bits are specified by using F in the lt modifier gt field of the location reference syntax Indicates whether it is possible to specify individual bits or groups of bits from the location Indicates whether it is necessary to provide an address for the location type Indicates whether a value can be written to the location 3 11 3 12 PLC_ACCESS and PLC_STATUS are special locations that allow you to look at individual bits pertaining to program access and system status These bits are described below PLC_ACCESS 8 15 0 7 CPNum Indicates the number of the Control Program to which the requesting d
88. system are actually written to the PC disk the system could have been loaded from RAM or the system name could have been changed from what was originally loaded After all files have been archived to PC a message is displayed on the prompt message line to indicate that the save operation has been completed GFK 0641 Chapter 9 Load Save Operations 9 9 2 Section 4 Clear System The currently loaded system may be cleared from the ADS Builder s working memory When this option is executed the working memory is re initialized to the NULL empty system Note that clearing the ADS Builder s working memory does NOT affect any system by the same name either on the RAM or the PC disk To initiate clearing of the system currently loaded in the ADS Builder first select the Clear System menu option by cursoring to the desired option and pressing the Enter key or by pressing the C key ADS BUILDER Current System Name PC MEMRY Terminal VT100 CONZ Default Scan Rate 298 Printer NULL Default Alarm Scan Rate 25 Memory 88416 Bytes Startup Screen ADS Print Destination PC DRILL PRN Screens 10 Alarm pages 1 Reports 9 Alarm sources 37 Load system Data sources 34 Save system to RAM Display formats Archive system to PC Translations entries lear system Lookup table entries Print destination Command scripts When the Enter or C key is pressed the ADS Builder prompts you to con
89. the Enter key is pressed the form for the first alarm page is displayed along with a prompt on the status line giving you the choice of viewing the next alarm page in the list or of quitting the view function ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT CON2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Alarm Pages ADS Print Destination STDPRN AREA_3 32 AREA_4 34 ns New alarm page View an alarm page Name Number Starting Row Starting Column Foreground Heading AREA_3 32 1 Rows 23 1 Columns 80 WHITE Background BLACK Alarms for Plant Area 3 Press lt RETURN gt to view next alarm page else lt QUIT gt Pressing the Enter key at this point will display the next alarm page in the list which is AREA 4 ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Alarm Pages AREA_3 32 AREA_4 34 ADS Print Destination STDPRN ns New alarm page Name Number Starting Row Starting Colum Foreground Heading View an alarm page AREA_4 34 1 Rous 1 Columns WHITE Background Alarms for Plant Area 4 Press lt RETURN gt to view next alarm page else lt QUIT gt Pressing the Enter key again will return you to
90. the ADS system for use with alarm sources Table 8 2 Series 90 PLC References Supported by ADS System PLC Memory PLC_STATUS PLC_ACCESS PLC_SWEEP RACK mm SLOT_mn BUS_mno M_mnopp R Al AQ I Q M T 5 SA SB SC G GA GB GC GD GE AP 1 L 2 Z MEMORY MAX_BLOCK Size Description Ref Over Diags Slice Ref Write PLC Status 16 N N Y N N Control Program Pivilege Level 16 N N Y N N Last Sweep Time 16 N N N N N Fault in Rack mm 1 N N N N N Fault in Rack m Slot n 1 N N N N N Fault in Rack m Slot n Bus 0 1 N N N N N Fault in Rack m Slot n Bus 0 Module pp 1 N N N N N Registers 16 N N Y Y Y Analoginputs 16 N Y Y Y Y Analogoutputs 16 N Y Y Y Y Discreteinputs 1 Y Y N Y Y Discreteoutputs 1 Y Y N Y Y Internal coils 1 Y N N Y Y Temporary coils 1 N N N Y Y Special Contacts 1 N N N Y N Special Contacts A 1 Y N N Y Y Special Contacts B 1 Y N N Y Y Special Contacts C 1 Y N N Y Y Global Data 1 Y N N Y Y Global Data A 1 Y N N Y Y Global Data B 1 Y N N Y Y Global Data C 1 Y N N Y Y Global Data D 1 Y N N Y Y Global Data E 1 Y N N Y Y Main program block data 16 N N Y Y Y Sub program Block data 16 N N Y Y Y ADS Internal data 16 N N Y Y Y ADSInternal free memory 32 N N N N N ADSinternal free memory largest block 32 N N N N N 1 The full syntax for Main Program locations is lt program_name gt P lt address gt 2 The full syntax for Sub Program locations is lt bloc
91. the accuracy completeness sufficiency or usefulness of the information contained herein No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc Alarm Master CIMSTAR Helpmate PROMACRO Series Six CIMPLICITY GEnet Logicmaster Series One Series 90 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Genius Modelmaster Series Three VuMaster CIMPLICITYPowerTRAC GeniusPowerTRAC ProLoop Series Five Workmaster Copyright 1991 1994 GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc All Rights Reserved Preface Content of this Manual This manual provides reference information for the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System that you will need to build a custom operator interface system for the Series 90 70 or Series 90 30 Model 331 or Model 341 Programmable Logic Controller The CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software runs on the Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor ADC module and communicates over the Series 90 70 or Series 90 30 PLC s backplane to monitor and optionally modify data tables in the PLC Before using this reference manual to build an operator interface system you should read GFK 0499 the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS User s manual That manual contains the information you need on how to install the ADC module select and setup the computer and terminal you will be using install the ADS software on your computer and download it to the ADC module view the demonstration systems and walk through the develop
92. the status line The ADS system does not allow the deletion of a data source that is referenced by a dynamic object on any screen or report If this is attempted you will be returned to the menu page with the message Data source could not be deleted displayed on the status line Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 19 View Current Sources The ADS system allows you to view all of the existing data sources in a system one by one in alphabetical order To initiate the viewing of a system s data sources first select the View current sources menu option either by cursoring to the desired option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the V key In this example sequence two data sources are currently defined in the system EM_STOP and PARTS_COUNT Upon pressing the Enter key the form for the first data source in the list is displayed along with a prompt on the status line giving the choice of viewing the next data source in the list or of quitting the view function E DESKTOPNEPS0641 gt d ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal C0M2 Printer C0M1 Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Data Sources COIT Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination 1 00 s 1 00 s STDPRN EM_STOP PARTS_COUNT 1 lm New data source View a data source Name Source Data Type Source Location EM_STOP STATE 112 Scan Rate x or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc
93. to UNSIGNED WORD value v or prompt if no v PLCSETI I1 v2 p3 c4 mn gt mx gt Set location 1 to SIGNED WORD value v or prompt if no v PLCSETL 1 v2 p3 c4 mn5 mx gt Set location 1 to UNSIGNED LONGWORD value v or prompt if no v PLCSETS I v2 p3 c4 mn gt mx gt Set location 1 to SIGNED LONGWORD value v or prompt if no v PLCSETF I v2 p3 c4 mn gt mx gt Set location 1 to FLOATING POINT value v or prompt if no v 1The syntax for specifying the loc reference is the same as for specifying a PLC data source location refer to PLC Data Sources for details except that the references must be consecutive within the same PLC memory type For example PLCGETW R1 and PLCGETW R1 1 9 are valid but PLCSETW R1 1 R2 5 9 andPLCSETW R1 0 14 Q1 arenot 2 Ifno value parameter is specified a prompt will appear on the terminal s display line asking you to input a value STATE values are specified as 0 for OFF and 1 for ON 3 Anoptional 1 19 character prompt may be specified any alphanumeric character plus 4 Anadditional calculation may be optionally specified the additional calculation may be either a translation table entry a lookup table entry or an engineering units conversion table entry 5 Min Ma bounding of the user s entry for value v may be optionally specified 3 28 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 Table 3 8 Screen Commands Action
94. to the menu page with the message Invalid lookup table entry specified displayed on the status line GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 67 View Current Entries The ADS Builder provides a method that allows you to view all the existing lookup table entries in a system one by one in alphabetical order To initiate the viewing of a system s lookup table entries first select the View current entries menu option either by cursoring to that option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the V key In the example shown below two lookup table entries are currently defined in the system INVERT and MESSAGE When the Enter key is pressed the form for the first lookup table entry is displayed along with a prompt on the status line giving the choice of viewing the next entry in the list or of quitting the view function ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal col View a lookup table entry Printer Name INVERT Dir NAD Input Data Type STATE Lookup Table Output Data Type STATE INVERT INPUT RANGE OUTPUT VALUE MESSAGE OFF ON ON OFF Press lt RETURN gt to view next lookup table entry else lt QUIT gt Pressing the Enter key at this point will display the next entry in the list MESSAGE Pressing the Enter key again will return you to the menu page since MESSAGE is the last lookup table entry in the list 3 68 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GF
95. within an ADS system when either the Development or the Execute Only ADS environment is installed on the ADC In either case the PID module must have been included in the applicable environment via the ADS Setup Utility When you are in an ADS system the PID module is accessed by one of four commands SETUP_LOOP CONF IGURE_LOOP MONITOR_LOOP TUNE_LOOP These commands are more fully described in Chapter 3 Command Scripts Each of the above commands causes one specific screen to be displayed e g the CONFIGURE_LOOP command causes the PID Configuration Screen to be displayed Once the screen has been displayed you can move freely between the other screens that make up the PID modules Note For security reasons when the PID module is accessed from an ADS system the Loop Setup screens cannot be accessed from any other PID screen it can only be accessed from a SETUP_LOOP command The functionality of the SETUP_LOOP screen will not be accessible if the PID module was installed without the Loop Setup screen See the Setup Screen discussion below and Sections 4 and 5 in Chapter 7 ADS Setup Utility in the ADS User s Manual GFK 0499 for more information on the installation of the PID module with and without Setup functionality Pressing the EXIT function key F10 returns you to the ADS screen from which the command was invoked General Operation of the PID Module Using the PID module consists of a numbe
96. you will want to select a value which allows an appropriate number of alarm entries to be viewed simultaneously When selecting a value for the Columns field you should analyze carefully what is to be displayed on the screen At a minimum you will have to specify a value which is greater than or equal to 10 which allows for a border and the prompt More during system execution If a heading is to be displayed the number of columns should be increased by the length of the heading so that all of the heading will fit on the screen Two other pieces of information must be considered alarm timestamping and alarm message text You should allow for 20 columns if timestamping is used Also enough columns should be provided so that the maximum sized alarm message text will fit on the defined screen area Assume that you want to set the default values so that the new alarm page will be created full sized The cursor is initially on the Starting Row field You do not make an entry in this example since the default value is to be used Press the Enter key to move the cursor to the Rows field ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 S Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Alarm Pages ADS Print Destination STDPRN ns feu alarn page Create an alarm page Name AREA_4 Number 34 Starting Row 1 Rous Starting Colum 1 Columns 80 Foreground
97. 1 End Row 49 End Column NORMAL BLACK Foreground 10 int Definitions 24 45 46 137 55 52 49 t5 WHITE 56 53 50 13 97 54 51 13 10 5 10 6 ALARM PAGE LISTING Alarm Page Start Row Start Column Foreground Heading SYS_ALRM 1 End Row 6 End Column WHITE Background System Alarms ALARM SOURCE LISTING Alarm Source Q1_0433_ON Data Type WORD Location Q1 0433 Scan Rate F Additional Calc Alarm Pages Flags Notify Timestamp Text Q1 and 0433 both ON Action ext Action ext Action ext Action DATA SOURCE LISTING Data Source R1_VALUE Data Type SIGNED WORD Location R1 Scan Rate 00 00 00 50 Additional Calc CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Chapter Exiting the ADS Builder 11 After you have completed building an operator interface system or modified an existing system you must exit the ADS Builder program in order to run the ADS Executor This is done with the Exit function To initiate an exit of the ADS Builder you must first select the Exit menu option either by cursoring to the Exit option on the menu and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the E key ADS BUILDER Current System Name RAM TUTOR Terminal TMINI COM2 Default Scan Rate 00 s Printer NULL Default Alarm Scan Rate 00 s Memory 109008 Bytes Startup S
98. 18 LOOKUP_19 LOOKUP_20 LOOKUP_21 LOOKUP_22 LOOKUP_23 LOOKUP_24 DRILL Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination Print lookup tables fron J to A prompt is displayed at the bottom of the screen 1 00 s 1 00 s STDPRN Modify a lookup table entry Delete a lookup table entry View current entries List lookups Print lookups lookup table entry Print lookup tables from HHHHEHEEEEE CO HAHH HEHEHE HEH HH HH HHH Depending upon the response entered into the from and to field several different listings can be generated The listing options are as shown below from from from from from from from from lt idl gt lt idl gt rn rxn lt idl gt nxn rn Wee to to to to to to to to lt id2 gt we lt id2 gt lt id2 gt Wa we Wa WR print print print print print print print print out out out out out out out out lookups idl lookups idl lookups id2 all lookups all lookups all lookups all lookups all lookups to id2Z up to id2 from ill Pressing the lt Quit gt key aborts the print operation After selection of the required range of lookup tables to be printed the ADS Builder sends the information to the Print Destination specified using the Print Destination option see Load Save operations Chapter 9 3 70 C
99. 19 Section 10 Cut and Paste s ccc 3 votes tee iwi weet iabawan 6 22 Cuttin sa REG OM mesra hoe aa soe a Reka e gree a ek 6 22 Pasting a Region 0 6 eee eee eens 6 23 GFK 0641C CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual ix March 1994 Contents Section 11 Touch Points ssyis a saa sass ase kao dl ae e we eae alae 6 24 Accessing the Screen Report Editor Help Screen 0005 6 26 Exiting the Screen Report Editor 06 c eee eee 6 26 Miscellaneous Hints eie 0ct ee ee ata ieee Gertie ei ees 6 27 Error Messages for Screen Painter and Report Painter 6 28 Chapter 7 Dynamic Objects u 54ietnss ee dee ane deta s sewn eesiads 7 1 Creating a Dynamic Object 0 66 06 7 1 Availabl for Edit sos Aset nade head eae pad OUR EE he E E 7 9 Modifying a Dynamic Object 0 0 0 6 666s 7 10 Deleting a Dynamic Object 0 666 7 11 Copying and Pasting a Dynamic Object 0 e eee eee ee 7 13 Creating a Predefined Dynamic Object 00 7 15 Error Messages for Dynamic Objects 66 6c cece eee eens 7 17 Chapter 8 Alarni Operations s sis504 20052454 ecb cas eee he nee be secon i ES 8 1 Section 1 Introduction to Using Alarms 6 8 1 Section 2 New Alarm Page 0 cc ceeececccecccecees 8 3 Modify an Alarm Page 6 c eects 8 8 Delete an Alarm Page snt sopi enke E E e E E 8 9 View Alariny Rag es ehtima E eect EE E E
100. 641 An operator interface system can be executed by the ADS Executor software The ADS Executor may be accessed either through the ADS Menu program if the ADS Development software is installed or directly if the ADS Execute Only software is installed The name of an existing system must be specified to the ADS Executor or it will immediately terminate execution The location of keys that may be used with the valid terminal types during execution of a system are listed in the following table Table 14 1 Key Functions for System Execution Terminal MOIT COIT Key Function TMOIT TCOIT MINI TMINI MIBM CIBM Exitsystem execution AE AE Clear field X or Home AX Pop topmost alarm page O O Refresh screen W W Pop topmost screen AP AP User defined function key AK1 F1 KP1 F1 or KP1 User defined function key AK2 F2 KP2 F2 or KP2 User defined function key AK3 F3 KP3 F3 or KP3 User defined function key AK4 F4 KP4 F4 or KP4 User defined function key AK5 F5 KP5 F5 or KP5 User defined function key AK6 F6 KP6 F6 or KP6 User defined function key AK7 F7 KP7 F7 or KP7 User defined function key AK8 F8 KP8 F8 or KP8 User defined function key AK9 F9 KP9 F9 or KP9 User defined function key AK10 F10 KPO F10 or KPO User defined function key AK11 F11 PF1 F11 or Insert User defined function key AK12 F12 PF2 F12 or Home User defined function key AK13 F13 PF3 F13 or Delete User defined function key AK14 F14 PF4 F14 or End User defined function
101. 7 Dynamic Objects 7 7 Display Value For every dynamic object you must specify whether or not a value should be displayed This field should only be set to Y if field formatting characters have been specified the typical case Only if a display format is completely controlling the dynamic object e g only moving the object or changing its video attributes or color would this field be set to N If the field is set to Y and the Enter key is pressed you are then allowed to select values for the Hex Notation Left Justify Zero Filland Available for Edit fields By default each of these fields is set to N which means that the default display for a value is a base ten b right justified in the field c leading zeroes are suppressed and d the field may not be edited After all the fields have been filled in with the desired data press the lt Save gt key or the Enter key from the Available for Edit field to complete the entry The name of the dynamic object is now shown in reverse video in the status area The value of R100 is 99999 DRILL 50 Row 3 Col g Text Static iR100_DISPLAY At any point the creation of the dynamic object can be cancelled by pressing the lt Quit gt key The characters selected to be part of the dynamic object will be left on the screen or report CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Available for Edit The Available for Edit flag indicates that
102. 7483647 Floating Point 32 999999999 99 to 9999999999 99 String 1to19 ASCII characters When you cursor onto the Output Data Type field a window is opened on the screen showing what choices are available By default the system selects WORD for the data type A data type must be selected that makes sense regarding its intended use in the system being built As with the Input data type ADS builder checks to ensure that the data type specified is consistent with values specified in the Output Value field and with any other object it is later associated with For example assume that you want to associate various messages with specific unsigned word input values Select the String data type by pressing the key five times or key three times To complete the selection press the Enter key The first Input Range field is then selected ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal col Create a lookup table entry Printer Name MESSAGE Dir NAD Input Data Type WORD Lookup Table Output Data Type STRING INPUT RANGE OUTPUT VALUE 3 62 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 Input Range Input ranges along with their associated output values form the heart of the lookup table entry When the system is running the input value is checked against the specified ranges sequencing from top to bottom with the first range found that includes the value being select
103. ATION DESCRIPTION 06 25 00 03 23 0000 06 25 00 04 54 DATE TIME M D H M Addition of or extra rack Loss of or missing rack Reset of addition of or extra option module 06 25 00 03 59 06 25 00 03 50 06 25 00 03 36 CLEAR PRINT EREFRSH 1 0 STULL DOUN AIP APG DOUNEPG UP MOEXIT I70 FA TOP FAULT DISPLAYED 0001 TOTAL FAULTS 0144 ULT TABLE TABLE LAST CLEARED ENTRIES OVERFLOWED FAULT DESCRIPTION Low Or No Current Flow FAULT CIRC REFERENCE FAULT FAULT LOCATION NO ADDR CATEGORY TYPE 02 19 0112 06 25 DATE M D zI 00113 Circuit Loss of Loss of ZAI 00013 Loss of ZAI 00013 Loss of 29 zQ 00121 Circuit 29 zQ 00121 Circuit 29 zQ 00121 Circuit 29 zQ 00121 Circuit 29 zQ 00121 Circuit 29 zQ 00121 Circuit 29 zQ 00121 Circuit BRR RE RR eee ee Www Www WN Ww PRR RR Ree Fault Discrete Fault 10C 10C 170 Module 170 Module Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault 29 Ql 00121 Add n of I 0 Block 06 25 06 25 06 25 06 19 06 19 06 18 03 28 03 28 03 28 03 28 03 28 03 28 03 28 CLEAR PRINT EREFRSH PLC STULL DOUN AIP APG DOUNEPG UP MOUEXIT 15 2 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 The same set of function keys is provided for each of the two screens Each of the keys is discussed below The lt Clear gt function key is assigned to the F1 key It is used to clear the displayed fault table
104. Acknowledgesaparticularalarm Table 3 11 Option Module Access Commands Action Description PLC_FAULT f b Display the PLC Fault table screen with optionally specified fore ground and background colors f and b IO_FAULT b Displaythe I O Fault table screen with optionally specified fore ground and background colors f and b SETUP_LOOP fb Displaythe PID Loop Setup screen with optionally specified fore ground and background colors f and b CONFIGURE_LOOP fb Displaythe PID Loop Configure screen with optionally specified foreground and background colors fand b MONITOR_LOOP f b Display the PID Loop Monitor screen with optionally specified fore ground and background colors f and b TUNE_LOOP b Display the PID Loop Tuning screen with optionally specified fore ground and background colors fand b Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 29 Table 3 12 Dynamic Object Related Commands Action Description ATTACH n o d c Attach dynamic object o on screen n to optionally PLC data source dusing optionally new calculation c DYN_EDIT n 0 v Enter edit mode for dynamic object o on screen n using video high light v to indicate editing mode SCN_EDIT n v Enter edit mode for all editable dynamic objects on screen n using video highlight v to indicate editing mode for object WAIT_DATA n o Pause until data next scanned for dynamic object o on screen n Table 3 13 Miscellaneous Commands
105. Alarm Scan Rate Dir ADS_PC RFMAN PCM Startup Screen Alarm Pages ADS Print Destination STDPRN ns Modify an alarm page Delete an alarm page View alarm pages List pages Print page details Alarm sources Note When an ADS system is executed it is possible that the ADS Executor may log alarms of its own Those alarms will indicate attempts to access data from the CPU which is not supported by the CPU e g attempt to access R2049 when only 2048 registers have been configured low memory conditions etc These system alarms are logged to the ten lowest numbered alarm pages in the system if any alarm pages exist at all CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Section 2 New Alarm Page GFK 0641 When the New alarm page option is selected a data entry window is opened containing nine fields Name Number Starting Row Rows Starting Column Columns Foreground Color Background Color and Heading ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Alarm Pages ADS Print Destination STDPRN ns ET Create an alarm page Nane Number Starting Row 1 Rows 23 Starting Colum 1 Columns 80 Foreground WHITE Background BLACK Heading Name The alarm page name is used to assign a descriptive tag to
106. C AUTOMATION NORTH AMERICA INC Prepared for GE Fanuc Automation by Control Systems International Pty Ltd Perth Australia 1 Run ADS Builder Loaded 2 Run ADS Executor Loaded Set default system name PUNCH Set default terminal module Set default printer module Run ADS Fault Not loaded Run ADS PID Not loaded Enter item number 1 7 9 to exit For a more detailed discussion of how the ADS Builder and Executor determine where to find the indicated system refer to Section 1 Load System of Load Save Operations located in Chapter 9 The entries for items 4 and 5 terminal module and printer module are filled in similar to the system name with the exception that entries are not arbitrarily selected specific defined valid entries must be made You should choose the terminal table that matches the one the software is being run on now not the intended target terminal except in the GFK 0641 Chapter 1 ADS Main Menu 1 3 case of using the mini or touch mini OIT these are generally one and the same For example if you are going to access the Builder menu choice 1 on a GE Fanuc Workmaster II but the target terminal is a Touch Mini you would specify MIBM to execute the system on the touch mini menu choice 2 you would specify TMINI Valid settings for item 4 terminal module are e COITTBL Color GE Fanuc Operator Interface Terminal IC600KD512 514 532 534 e MOITTBL Monochrome GE Fanuc Operator Int
107. C Based Builder supports two destinations for print output STDPRN the standard printer device File output File output is directed to a file located in the default directory The name of the file is lt system_name gt PRN For example the print output for a system called MIX located in a directory named MIX PCM would be found in the following file MIX PCM MIX PRN To choose either the standard printer or file destination select the Print destination option and respond to the prompt Chapter 9 Load Save Operations 9 13 2 Section 7 Refresh System in RAM 9 14 The current system may be copied or refreshed to the ADC module s RAM disk via the Refresh system in RAM menu option You may either cursor to that item and press the Enter key or just press the R key to initiate the refresh operation As you build your system the Builder will maintain a list of the system files which have been added or modified since the system was last refreshed to the ADC module Each time you first enter the Builder it assumes that all files need refreshing In addition to the system s configuration file CFG alarm file ALM screen files SCN and report files REP the Builder will also refresh the system s help file HLP and the PID module s definition PID and startup STR files if present After initiating the refresh operation the Builder will first check that an ADC module is attached and online su
108. C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Eng u Create an E U C entry Name PERCENT Input value low 32768 Output value low Input value high 32767 Output value high Specify Data Types Y N Input Data Type NIL Output Data Type NIL Specify Data Types The Specify Data Types flag indicates whether or not data type conversion is to occur PRIOR to the engineering units conversion being performed For example if an engineering units conversion is performed on an input value of a SIGNED WORD data type the calculated output value will be truncated to a SIGNED WORD value as well e g a result of 34 64 will become 34 If on the other hand the input data type is first converted to FLOAT the result will retain its decimal precision To indicate that a data type conversion is to be specified enter Y in the Specify Data Types field If N is entered into the field the next two fields input and output data types will be skipped GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 51 Input Data Type If the Specify Data Types flag has been set to Y the Input data type field is used to indicate the data type of the value passed to the engineering units conversion table entry Valid data types are Table 3 17 Input Data Types Supported for EUC Tables Data Type Size Bits Value Range State 1 OFE ON Byte 8 0 to 255 Word 16 0 to 65535 Signed Word 16 32768 to
109. CHMENT TOUCH YOUR CHOICE TO BE DISPLAYED FTF t THIS IS THE RAW THIS IS THE SCALED VALUE READ WRITTEN VALUE SEEN BY FROM TO THE PLC AN OPERATOR l 999999 999999 l ATTACH ATTACH ATTACH SCALE SCALE EDIT EDIT DATA EXIT R70 R71 R72 10 4 RAW VAL SCL VAL WINDOW SCREEN Key definitions AK1 ATTACH_R70 AK2 ATTACH_R71 AK2 ATTACH_R73 AK4 ATTACH 5 SCALED_VALUE TIMES_10 AK5 ATTACH 5 SCALED_VALUE DIV_4 AK6 PSHSCN 999 DYN_EDIT 5 RAW_VALUE REVERSE AK7 PSHSCN 999 DYN_EDIT 5 SCALED_VALUE REVERSE AK8 AK9 PSHSCN 997 AK10 POPSCN 5 AK11 AK12 AK13 AK14 AK15 Touch Point Definitions 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 136 137 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Error Messages for Screen Operations Error messages and their causes for Screen Operations are listed below ENTRY ERROR Invalid item XX XX key AKn Command XXXX referenced for function key number n is invalid undefined ENTRY ERROR Name not specified A name must be specified ENTRY ERROR Row or column sizes are invalid for this terminal The row column specification for the screen would place all or part of the screen off the physical display ENTRY ERROR Screen number is not unique Two screens cannot have the same number ENTRY ERROR Screen number may not be zero A scr
110. Colums 80 5 2 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Report Name The report name is used to assign a descriptive tag to a report Unlike other components of an ADS system the report name is NOT used to uniquely identify the various reports the report number serves that function Because of this the ADS system does NOT enforce uniqueness between report names A name may be from one to eight alphanumeric and underscore _ characters and is NOT case sensitive As an example of creating a report name assume that you want to create a report with the name PROD_REP Type the name PROD_REP into the Report Name field ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Reports ADS Print Destination STDPRN Create Report Report Name Report Number Start Row 1 Rows i 23 Start Colum 1 Colums 80 To complete the entry press the Enter key Also at this point note that the Report Number field is selected next Report Number The report number is used to uniquely identify reports within a single system Report numbers may range from 1 to 999 inclusive providing for an absolute maximum of 999 reports in a single system Report numbers do not need to be assigned consecutively nor do they need to be defined in an increasing numeric order Co
111. D PLC Location AIS Scan Rate or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Range 150 175 Action PSHALM 34 Text Boiler temperature is dangerously hight Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp Y Latched Y Notify N Auto ack N Output text to following alarm pages 34 Press lt RETURN gt to delete this alarm source else lt QUIT gt If the Enter key is pressed at this point the alarm source will be deleted from the system Upon deletion of the alarm source you are returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed on the status line indicating that the deletion was completed If you press the lt Quit gt key indicating that the alarm source deletion should be canceled you will be returned to the menu page no message will be displayed to indicate that the deletion was canceled If you should specify an alarm source which does not currently exist you will be returned to the menu page with the message Invalid alarm source specified displayed on the status line GFK 0641 Chapter 8 Alarm Operations 8 35 Copy an Alarm Source 8 36 Anew alarm source may be created by making a copy of an existing source During the copy process any of the alarm source definition may be altered At a minimum a unique name must be given to the copied alarm source to distinguish it from the original To initiate an alarm source copy first select the Copy an alarm source me
112. DAT on the ADC board This allows these options to be held across system runs and board resets CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Executor Debug Mode The Executor may be invoked while in debug mode during the system development cycle if desired Pressing the Ctrl X key will cause the debug mode to toggle on off when on a lt debug gt indicator will be displayed next to the Executor menu option With debug mode enabled the Executor will display error messages at the bottom of the display screen anytime it is unable to execute a particular command For example pressing a function key to which a command to remove an alarm page is attached will display an error message if the alarm page is not actually displayed If debug mode is turned off the above situation is handled visually as a no operation which is actually the desired effect Exiting the ADS Main Menu Exit from the ADS menu program is done by selecting item number 9 Upon exiting which takes 1 to 2 seconds on a Series 90 70 ADC or 10 to 20 seconds on a Series 90 30 ADC communications may be re established with a computer running TERMF without needing to hard reset the ADC module This is particularly useful if the IBM PC based Builder is being used rather than the ADC based Builder Refer to Chapter 8 in the ADS User s Manual for more detailed information on using the IBM PC based Builder GFK 0641 Chapter 1 ADS Main Men
113. DC module can be found in the file PCOP ADS PCM README 401 which was installed on your computer s hard disk as part of the ADS installation procedure Errors Loading Screens and Reports The ADS Builder does NOT check to see if items such as display formats and command scripts are used anywhere in the system prior to performing a user directed delete operation for one of those items Precautions should be taken to make sure that an item is not referenced any longer before deleting it If such a situation occurs attempting to load a screen or report referencing the deleted item will result in an error message such as Error loading or Error verifying the given screen or report file For example if you attempt to access such a screen via the Screen paint submenu option on the Screen operations menu an error message will be displayed and you will not initially be allowed into the screen report editor However the ADS Builder will show the screen as being loaded into its working memory an asterisk character will be displayed to the right of the screen number in the status area Attempting to access the screen report editor a second time for that screen will succeed Be sure to check all function key assignments and dynamic object definitions to look for references to a previously deleted item If a problem is found either the offending references must be deleted or the item recreated to correct the problem CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanu
114. DataSource t Tih aet Aen e hide SE At i ils SR A ls 3 9 Modify a Data Source 1 orrai na a o EEEE T A E AE 3 18 Delete a Data Source ur tysia pen iar ea eens 3 19 View Current SOuUrces oarnp at Eer Saw genes Soe haw ee ea EEE 3 20 LAStSOULCES painea neiaa aah ele clint ek eats eet cares tn ores 3 21 Print Sources Aisi Pie ihe bet Heath hee ood kobe iether 3 22 Error Messages for PLC Data Sources 0 c cece 3 23 Section 3 Display Formats sssssssssssssssesesessseo 3 24 New Display Format nauanannananrara nn eee 3 24 Name eran hese nae K AEA A E E AEE A EEE 3 25 Data Typeset ngst matna E D E E A A 3 25 Rangen resnim re PB acd nipi a E a a E EE E E ERS 3 26 Actions Which Control the Appearance of an Object 3 26 Actions Which Cause an Event to Occur 1 eee eee 3 28 Modify a Display Format 00 66 3 32 Delete a Display Format 000666 3 33 View Current Formats 00 eee eee eee 3 34 LASt POrmMats sss Lida Athi ae SG eG cee Mt as BAGS read Sie blots 3 35 Print Formats jt 0 sie ten eRe ete RGR Oa ae ean te aes 3 36 Error Messages for Display Formats 0 00 cece e eee 3 37 GFK 0641C CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual vii March 1994 Contents Section 4 Translation Table eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 38 New Iranslationie iin p eri iene kee eile wee alien dae bh eles 3 39 Modify a Translation ccc e
115. FANUC GE Fanuc Automation Programmable Control Products CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual GFK0641C March 1994 GFL 002 Warnings Cautions and Notes as Used in this Publication Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages currents temperatures or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment a Warning notice is used Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken Note Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment This document is based on information available at the time of its publication While efforts have been made to be accurate the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation operation or maintenance Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty expressed implied or statutory with respect to and assumes no responsibility for
116. FAULT f b SETUP_LOOP f b CONFIGURE_LOOP f b MONITOR_LOOP f b TUNE_LOOP f b ATTACH n o d c DYN_EDIT a o v SCN_EDIT n v WAIT_DATA n 0 LOGTTM x LOGMES REPORT HELP n TTDUMP REFRESH _ PORTW p t EXIT x n Translation Table New Modify Translation Name XXXXXXXXXXXxX 12 Characters max A B C ew Value A Input Value B C Specify Data Types State Input Output State 1 OFF ON Byte 8 0 to 255 Word 16 0 to 65535 Signed Word 16 32768 to 32767 Longword 32 0 to 4294967295 Signed Longword 32 2147483648 to 2147483647 Pleating Pointy 32 999999999 99 to 9999999999 99 Only 7 digits of precision Lookup Table New Modify Lookup Table Entry Name XXXXXXXXXXXX 12 characters max Input Data Type State 1 OFF ON Byte 8 0 to 255 Word 16 0 to 65535 Signed Word 16 32768 to 32767 Longword 32 0 to 4294967295 Signed Longword 32 2147483648 to 2147483647 Floating Point 32 999999999 99 to 9999999999 99 Output Data Type State 1 OFF ON Byte 8 0 to 255 Word 16 0 to 65535 Signed Word 16 32768 to 32767 Longword 32 0 to 4294967295 Signed Longword 32 2147483648 to 2147483647 Floating Point 32 999999999 909 to 999999999999 String 1 to 19 ASCII characters Input Range T1 12 10 max input output pairs e g ON OFF 32768 32767 Output Range ON OFF Value or text string A 4 CIMPLICITY90
117. FMAN PCM Startup Screen Screens ADS Print Destination STDPRN REGS C 50 ew screen Modify screen Screen paint Delete screen Copy screen Key assignments List screens Print screen details CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Modify Screen Ascreen s position and attribute information may be modified if you later determine that an incorrect setting was made at the time of creation e g foreground color row column starting position etc Allinformation may be modified except the screen s number To initiate a screen modification first select the Modify screen menu option either by cursoring to the Modify screen option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the M key When you select this option the ADS Builder will prompt you for the number of the screen to be modified Only existing screens may be modified the New screen menu option must be used in order to create a new screen As an example assume that you want to modify screen 50 REGS which we created previously Type the screen number 50 into the prompt field When you press the Enter key the form for the screen is displayed with the Screen Name field initially selected You may now proceed to change any field except the Screen Number field After you have completed the modifications to the screen press the lt Save gt key to complete the modification operation You are then return
118. FORMAT_06 FORMAT_18 FORMAT_0 FORMAT_19 FORMAT_08 FORMAT_20 FORMAT_09 FORMAT_21 FORMAT_10 FORMAT_22 FORMAT_11 FORMAT_23 FORMAT_12 FORMAT_24 New display format Modify a display format E Delete a display format View current formats on List formats Print formats Press lt RETURN gt to list more entries else lt QUIT gt GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 35 Pressing the Enter key at this point will display the remaining thirteen display format names ADS BUILDER Terminal COIT Printer Dir Display Formats FORMAT_25 FORMAT_26 FORMAT_2 FORMAT_28 FORMAT_29 FORMAT_30 FORMAT_31 FORMAT_32 FORMAT_33 FORMAT_34 FORMAT_35 Current System Name COM2 COM1 NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM DRILL Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination 1 00 s 1 00 s STDPRN Delete a display format View current formats on List formats New display format Modify a display format I Print formats Press lt RETURN gt to list more entries else lt QUIT gt Pressing the lt Quit gt key exits the list operation The display format names currently displayed on the screen will be left displayed Print Formats The Print formats option allows the details of the defined display formats to be printed on an attached printer When running the ADC version of the ADS Builder access to the Print options is only available if the ADS Print Modul
119. GEK 90817 the Series Six OIT User s Manual for more details The table below describes the available character sets for each of the supported terminals Terminal Character Set Corresponding Character Set COIT Normal ASCII text MOIT Altemate Set Supplemental Standard Graphics Set TCOIT Character Set 2 Altemate Graphics set TMOIT Character Set 3 SupplementalAlternate Graphics set VT100 Normal ASCII text LUDCO Altemate Set Supplemental Standard Graphics Set Character Set 2 Notsupported Character Set 3 Notsupported CIBM Normal Supported ASCIfext MIBM Altemate Set Supplemental Standard Graphics Set Character Set 2 Notsupported Character Set 3 Notsupported TIMINI Normal ASCII text MINI Altemate Set Supplemental Standard Graphics Set Character Set 2 Notsupported Character Set 3 Notsupported GFK 0641 Chapter 6 Screen Painter and Report Painter 6 7 6 8 As an example of changing the character set assume that you want to change the character set to the alternate character set Press the lt Character set gt key to initiate the change A window is opened up on the screen prompting you to select a character set The default character set highlighted is the one currently selected normal in this example lormal Alternate Set Character Set 2 Character Set 3 DRILL 50 Row Col Text Static Press the key once or the key three times to select the choice of Alternate Set Normal Character Set 2 Chara
120. HH MM SS CC Signed word Longword Signed longuord Action Floating point Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp N Latched N Notify N Auto ack N Output text to following alarm pages 8 16 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 In this example a source data type of Signed word is to be selected Press the key to select the desired source data type Signed Word ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source OVER_TEMP or HH MM SS CC Signed longword Action Floating point Action Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp N Latched N Notify N Auto ack N Output text to following alarm pages Pressing the Enter key completes the entry of the source data type and selects the PLC Location field next ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name OQVER_TEMP Source Data Type SIGNED WORD PLC Location Scan Rate x or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp N Latched N Notify N fAuto ack N Output text to following alarm pages Chapter 8 Alarm Operations 8 17 PLC Location The PLC Location field is used to identify an alarm source with a specific location or collection of locations in the PLC The following table lists memory locations in the PLC supported by
121. ICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 After the system s CFG and ALM files have been loaded you should see your system beginning to execute on the target terminal gt MBX Driver installed ADS Shareable Image Driver installed ADS device installation completed successfully c 1989 1990 GE FANUC AUTOMATION NORTH AMERICA INC ADS shareable images successfully installed c 1989 1990 GE FANUC AUTOMATION NORTH AMERICA INC ADS FAULT TABLE shareable images successfully installed c 1989 1990 GE FANUC AUTOMATION NORTH AMERICA INC PRINT SPOOLER Started c 1989 1990 GE FANUC AUTOMATION NORTH AMERICA INC PLC is currently executing task ADS When you are ready to make changes to the system again exit the ADS Executor see Chapter 14 After a short pause you should see the gt characters displayed on your computer s TERMF screen indicating that the ADC module has been hard reset via exiting the Executor not by pressing the reset button ADS EXECUTOR exiting DATA MANAGER exiting gt GFK 0641 Chapter 12 Terminal ADS Offline PC Based Builder Only 12 3 12 4 Pressing the ALT Z key at this point will return you to the ADS Builder s main menu screen ADS BUILDER Current System Name MEMRY Terminal YT100 STDIO Printer NULL Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Screens 10 Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources D
122. ILDER Current System Name RAM DRILL Terminal CIBM COM1 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer CON2 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Memory 127488 Bytes Startup Screen ADS Print Destination PC DRILL PRN Screens 26 Alarm pages 28 Reports 1 Configuration operations Alarm sources 2 Screen operations Data sources 36 Alarm operations Display formats 36 Report operations Translations entries 28 Lookup table entries 26 Print system summary Command scripts 30 Exit Enter the name of the system to load Jpg When the ADS Builder looks for a new system to load and you have not told the system where it is to be found the ADS Builder first checks the RAM disk on the ADC If the system is found there it is loaded into the ADS Builder If the system is not found on the RAM disk the ADS Builder will next check the PC disk As mentioned previously you must have selected the appropriate folder containing the desired system and be running TERMF prior to accessing the PC disk If the specified system is not found on either the RAM or PC disk the error message Error reading system configuration file PC lt system name gt CFG will be displayed on the prompt message line where lt system name gt is the name of the system requested to be loaded the system name will be set to the reserved empty system named NULL You can explicitly indicate where the ADS Builder is to look for the system by prefacing the sy
123. IMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Lookup table information is formatted as shown in the following examples LOOKUP TABLE LISTING Lookup Table MESSAGE Input Data Type WORD Output Data Type STRING Input Range Output Range 0 1000 TANK 7 IS FILLING 1001 3000 TANK 7 IS FULL 3001 9999 TANK 7 IS OVERFULL Lookup Table STATUS Input Data Type STATE Output Data Type STRING Input Range Output Range ON SWITCH IS ON OFF SWITCH IS OFF Lookup Table WORD_TO_ BIT Input Data Type WORD Output Data Type STATE Input Range Output Range 0 2000 OFF 2001 9999 ON Error Messages for Lookup Table Error messages and their causes for Lookup tables are listed below ENTRY ERROR Input Output values line n The input range and or output value for line number n is invalid or of the wrong form given the specified input or output data type respectively ENTRY ERROR Lookup table entry is not unique ENTRY ERROR Lookup table entry used in EUC table ENTRY ERROR Lookup table entry used in Translation table A lookup table entry name must be unique from any other lookup table translation table or engineering units conversion table entry name ENTRY ERROR No Lookup table entry name A name must be specified GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 71 Section 7 Command Scripts Command scripts are named sequences of run time commands which may be invoked by pressing
124. ITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual xiv March 1994 Contents Table 2 1 Key Functions for System Building 6 6666 2 5 Table 3 1 Source Data Type Supported for Data Sources 0 eee eee 3 10 Table 3 2 Series 90 PLC References Supported by ADS System 666 e cece eee eee 3 11 Table 3 3 Data Range for a Custom Translation 0 0 0 00 00 ccc ccc eee eee eee 3 16 Table 3 4 Source Data Types for Display Formats 0 0c cence eee eee 3 25 Table 3 5 Actions Which Control Appearance of an Object 6 6666 3 27 Table 3 6 Get PLC Data 1 6 6 e cacti rae es bee eee ea ede eee eae ee one Ca 3 28 dabl 3 7 9et PLE D e tm id cg E Me Maen des SRS CL ASR Nl esd MEG Ne nis 3 28 Table 3 8 Screen Commands Ea r E enna 3 29 Table 3 9 Alarm Page Commands sses i aeaa ccc enn eee eee 3 29 Table 3 10 Alarm Source Related Commands 0 0 c ccc ee ee eee eee 3 29 Table 3 11 Option Module Access Commands 0 00 c cece eee eee eee eee 3 29 Table 3 12 Dynamic Object Related Commands n nnns 0 cece eee eee 3 30 Table 3 13 Miscellaneous Commands 06 06000 c occas 3 30 Table 3 14 Data Range for a Translation Equation 0 6 6 eee eee 3 40 Table 3 15 Input Data Types Supported for Translation Tables 0 6 66 c ec eeeeeeeee 3 41 Table 3 16 Output Data Types Supported for Translation Tables 000 0 0000 e ee 3 42 Table 3 17 I
125. K 0641 List Lookups On the left hand side of the screen a list of lookup table entry names is maintained in alphabetical order You can page through the total list of entry names To initiate the listing of a system s lookup table names first select the List lookups menu option either by cursoring to that option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the L key ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Lookup Table ADS Print Destination STDPRN LOOKUP_01 LOOKUP_13 LOOKUP_02 LOOKUP_14 LOOKUP_03 LOOKUP_15 LOOKUP_04 LOOKUP_16 LOOKUP_05 LOOKUP_1 LOOKUP_06 LOOKUP_18 LOOKUP_0 LOOKUP_19 LOOKUP_08 LOOKUP_20 LOOKUP_09 LOOKUP_21 LOOKUP_10 LOOKUP_22 LOOKUP_11 LOOKUP_23 LOOKUP_12 LOOKUP_24 New lookup table entry Modify a lookup table entry Delete a lookup table entry View current entries List lookups Print lookups Press lt RETURN gt to list more entries else lt QUIT gt In this example sequence twenty six lookup table entries are currently defined in the system When you press the Enter key the first in alphabetical order group of entry names is displayed along with a prompt on the status line giving the choice of listing the next group of names or of quitting the list function Pressing the Enter key at this point will display the remaining group of
126. LC Location AIS Scan Rate or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Range 150 175 Action pshalm 34 Text Boiler temperature is dangerously hight Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log J Timestamp N Latched N Notify N Auto ack N Output text to following alarm pages If you want to log the alarm to a printer type Y if you do not want to log the alarm to a printer pressing the Enter key accepts the default choice of N The Timestamp field is selected next CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Timestamp This option allows you to specify whether or not an alarm is timestamped with the date and time that it occurred This feature is useful if you want to display or print the alarm By default the ADS Executor will NOT timestamp an alarm ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name OVER_TEMP Source Data Type SIGNED WORD PLC Location AIS Scan Rate or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Range 150 175 Action pshalm 34 Text Boiler temperature is dangerously hight Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp Latched N Notify N Auto ack N Output text to following alarm pages For example if you want the ADS Executor to timestamp the alarm whenever it occurs type Y into the Timestamp field and press the Enter key If you want to accept the default of N just press the Ente
127. LICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Section 6 Print Destination GFK 0641 Print Destination for ADS Builder on ADC Module By default the print output from the ADC based Builder is directed to PC attached computer running TERMP and will be stored in the file lt system_name gt PRN This is represented by the ADS Print Destination field The ADC Builder supports the following print destinations e A printer attached to COM1 e A printer attached to COM2 e Affile located on ADC RAM e A file located on the attached PC PC File output is directed to a file located on the specified device The name of the file is lt system_name gt PRN The print output for a system called MIX would be found in the following file MIX PRN To choose one of the print destinations select the print destination option and respond to the prompt Caution You should not choose PC for the print destination in either of the following two situations 1 Your system is located on the PC drive rather than the RAM drive 2 You specified either the CIBM or MIBM terminal table on the ADS menu program screen before executing the ADS Builder Print Destination for PC Based Builder By default The IBM Builder directs its print output to the standard printer device which is LPT1 This is represented by the ADS Print Destination displayed in the top right hand corner of the front screen The IBM P
128. MEMRY CFG ADS BUILDER Current System Name YT100 CON2 NULL 118544 Bytes Terminal Printer Memory Screens 10 Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination PC MEMRY 258 25 S PC DRILL PRN Configuration operations Screen operations Alarm operations Report operations Print system summary Exit Saving system configuration parameters in MEMRY CFG The second file saved is the alarm definitions file A message is displayed on the prompt message line indicating that the system is currently saving the alarm definitions in file MEMRY ALM ADS BUILDER Current System Name YT100 COM2 NULL 84160 Bytes Terminal Printer Memory Screens 10 Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Saving system alarm definitions in MEMRY ALM Chapter 9 Load Save Operations Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination PC MEMRY 25 8 25 S PC DRILL PRN Configuration operations Screen operations Alarm operations Report operations Print system summary Exit 9 7 9 8 The ADS Builder will now save each of the screen files and then th
129. OIT OIT colored space Operator prompts and messages 14 3 Options PID menu 13 1 create loop delete loop edit startup file exit options PID screen f13 7 modify loop save file Output data type b 42 Output value 3 64 P Page alarm display Page alarm display stacked Painter report Painter screen Paste and Cut 6 22 PC based builder R 2 12 1 PCNEC Index 5 Index Index 6 PID Loop Configuration Screen configuring loop gain 16 11 configuring loop input 16 13 configuring loop output 16 12 modifying loop configurations 16 11 selecting a loop to configure 16 11 PID Loop Monitoring Screen selecting current faceplate 16 14 selecting loop to monitor 16 14 using manual mode for a loop 16 15 using_setpoint control for the loop 16 17 PID Loop Tuning Screen modifying loop parameters selecting loop to be tuned setting scan rate for tuning 16 starting loop trending stopping loop trending PID Module Screens loop configuration screen loop monitoring screen 1 loop tuning screen setup screen PID options menu 13 1 PID Setup Screen create loop definition delete loop definition modify loop definition save loop definitions to file PID Templates Module accessing from an ADS system 16 2 general operation overview of PID startup file running in stand he mode screens list of 16 4 i PLC fault table 15 PLC See PLC_FAULT
130. P MONITOR 1 LOOP TANK_1 100 MANUAL CU CONTROLLER 11109 87 1 DEG C 120 00 UP 0 00 DOWN 1 75 00 109 87 ES CR PO Control Variable control edit mode selected To adjust the value of CV upward i e to increase the value press the or F6 key This causes the manual mode window to appear as LOOP MONITOR 1 LOOP TANK_1 100 MANUAL CU CONTROLLER 109 871 DEG C 120 00 UP 0 00 DOWN 1 0x 75 00 109 87 CURRENT E A SEDIT Ce RANPE MOEXIT 16 16 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 The or F6 key acts as a toggle switch when you press it again it causes the CV to stop incrementing While the UP indicator is set the value of CV continues to increment To adjust the value of CV downward i e to decrease the value press the or F7 key This causes the manual mode window to appear as LOOP MONITOR 1 2 LOOP TANK_1 100 75 MANUAL CU CONTROLLER 50 109 871 DEG C 25 120 00 UP 1 0 00 DOWN 0 109 87 CURRENT 1 ERG UPURAMP DNENO a OE The or F7 key acts as a toggle switch when you press it again it causes the CV to stop decrementing While the DOWN indicator is set the value of CV continues to decrement Pressing the F8 NO RAMP key will cause incrementing or decrementing to stop If neither the UP nor DOWN fields have been selected pressing
131. PG_22 ALMPG_23 ALMPG_24 page details from E Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN New alarm Modify an Delete an page alarm page I alarm page View alarm pages List pages Print page details Alarm sources A prompt is displayed at the bottom of the screen 1 00 s 1 00 s Print alarm page details from HHHEEHHHHHEHH to HHHH HHHH H HH HHHH HH Depending upon the response entered into the from and to field several different listings can be generated The listing options are as shown below from from from from from from from from lt idl gt lt idl gt rn nxn lt idl gt rxn rn Wee to to to to to to to to lt id2 gt we lt id2 gt lt id2 gt Wa nn myn myn print out al print out al print out al print out al print out al print out al print out al larm pages idl arm page idl arm page id2 l alarm pages l alarm pages l alarm pages l alarm pages print out al ll alarm pages to id2 up to id2 from ill Pressing the lt Quit gt key aborts the print operation After selection of the required range of alarm pages to be printed the ADS Builder sends the information to the Print Destination specified using the Print Destination option see Load Save menu discussion in Chapter 9 8 12 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display Syste
132. PLCSETS loc val PLCSETF loc val Text Log to Printer Timestamp Latched Notify Auto Acknowledge Output text to Alarm pages GFK 0641 XXXXXXXXXXXX 12 characters max State I OFF ON Byte 8 0 to 255 Word 6 0 to 65535 Signed Word 16 32768 to 32767 Longword 32 0 to 4294967295 Signed Longword 32 2147483648 to 2147483647 Floating Point 32 999999999 99 to 999999999999 AI AQ 1I Q M T S SA SB SC G GA GB GC GD GE P L Z R PLC_STATUS PLC_ACCESS PLC_SWEEP RACK_mm SLOT_mn BUS_mno M_mnopp MEMORY MAX_BLOCK or HH MM SS CC leave blank or Lookup table entry Translation table entry Engineering Units Conversion table entry Custom translation A Input Value B C 1 I2 4 max range action text triples e g ON OFF 32768 32767 Command Script Gn Se Screen PLC Message etc on 5 205 SCREEN n PLC_FAULT f b PSHSCN n IO_FAULT f b POPSCN n SETUP_LOOP f b REMSCN n CONF IGURE_LOOP f b ALARM n MONITOR_LOOP f b PSHALM n TUNE_LOOP f b POPALM n ATTACH n 0o d c REMALM n DYN_EDIT a o v CLRALM SCN_EDIT n v ACTION_OFF LOGTTM x ACTION_ON LOGMES x ACK_ALARM REPORT n ACK_ALARM lt page number gt HELP n ACK_ALARM lt alarm source gt TTDUMP REFRESH PORTW p t EXIT Appendix ACIMPLICITY 90 ADS Display System Builder Guide XXX 40 max KKK KEK o 5 Z Z2 Z Z nn
133. Pressurize 12 Enter Name or Number of the loop to modify x Delete Loop Selecting the Delete Loop menu option results in a prompt for the loop to delete Refer to Delete a Loop Definition in Chapter 16 PID Templates Module for details on deleting a loop definition LOOP SETUP Defined Loops STEAM_TANK_1 12 gt STEAM_TANK_i Pressurize 12 Enter Name or Number of the loop to delete PE GFK 0641 Chapter 13 Options PID 13 3 Load File Previously defined loop definitions may be loaded from a loop setup file if desired By default the Options PID menu looks for the file PID PID in the currently selected folder and if found loads it automatically A different file may be manually loaded via the Load File menu item Note that the PID option module on the ADC will look for one of only two possible setup file names It will look first for the file lt system_name gt PID and if not found it will then look for PID PID You are encouraged to use the file PID PID whenever possible as it is not system name dependent LOOP SETUP Defined Loops STEAM_TANK_1 12 Enter Filename SP ag 13 4 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Save File Loop definitions must be saved to a loop setup file for later retrieval by the PID option module on the ADC A saved setup file will be stored in the currently selected folder Note that the PID option
134. SHALM 34 Text Boiler temperature is dangerously hight Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp Y Latched Y Notify N Auto ack N Output text to following alarm pages 734 H Press lt RETURN gt to view next alarm source else lt QUIT gt Pressing the Enter key at this point will display the next alarm source in the list OVER_TEMP_2 ADS BUILDER View an alarm source Name OQVER_TEMP_2 Source Data Type SIGNED WORD PLC Location AI6 Scan Rate s or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Range 150 175 Action PSHALM 34 Text Boiler temperature is dangerously hight Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp Y Latched Y Notify N Auto ack N Output text to following alarm pages 34 Press lt RETURN gt to view next alarm source else lt QUIT gt Pressing the Enter key again will return you to the menu page since OVER_TEMP_2 is the last alarm source in the list 8 38 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 List Sources Alist of alarm source names is maintained in alphabetical order on the left side of the screen The ADS system lets you page through the total list of alarm source names To initiate listing a system s alarm sources first select the List sources menu option by cursoring to that option and upon pressing the Enter key
135. Screen Reports ADS Print Destination STDPRN ns Create Report Report Name PROD_REP Report Number 43 Start Row 1 Rous Start Column 1 Columns Pressing the Enter key at this points completes the specification of the report At this point the report is created initially blank and the ADS Builder enters the screen report editor After you have completed editing the report select the lt Save gt key to exit the screen report editor the contents of the screen will be saved in the ADS Builder s working memory You are returned to the menu page with the status area updated to reflect the creation of the new report Note that an asterisk is displayed to the right of the report number you have just created This designates that the report is currently loaded in the ADS Builder s memory The lt Quit gt key can be used to exit the screen report editor without saving the changes you have made Modify Report 5 4 A report s size information may be modified if it is later determined that an incorrect setting was made at the time of creation All information may be modified except the report s number To initiate a report modification select the Modify Report menu option either by cursoring to that option and pressing the Enter key or by pressing the M key CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 The ADS Builder will prompt you for the number of the report to be
136. Screen Operations 666 c cece eee eee 4 17 Chapter 5 Report Operauions siei icdeion ricaine enoe EEEE toes 5 1 New Report gaten cg ped gri pn pG a E EA bug ETAT EE Ged DANA 5 2 Modify Report fs sinned E AA E Ee AAEE E ARE E AE a tae 5 4 Re port Paint siia piatra re e A E a EE EE REA R E E AE 5 5 Delete Report srie senor Meet be ei het nee Sa eb eee wees 5 5 Copy Reports ret Aane Ake oA Be ek te oe ER Aes MAAR Tete Ml 5 6 List Reports o etutobenothiiees e are E nat a ET e EE E S ll as 5 6 Print Report Details 2 0 n E EEEE E EE E a S 5 7 Error Messages for Report Operations 00 00 c cece eee eee 5 8 Chapter 6 Screen Painter and Report Painter 0 eee cece eee eee 6 1 Section 1 ADS Screen Painter Keyboard 06 6 2 Section 2 Moving the Cursor 0 ccc cece e cece eccees 6 3 Section 3 Controlling the Screen Attributes 6 4 Section 4 Selecting Foreground Colors While Editing 6 5 Section 5 Selecting the Character Set 0 eee eeeeee 6 7 Selecting Double Wide and Double High Wide Characters 6 9 Simulating Quad Size Characters 000 00000 o cece eee ee eee 6 10 Section 6 Entering Static Text ccc cece cee cee eee 6 11 Section 7 Deleting and Undeleting Lines 4 6 12 Section 8 Selecting a Region cece cee eee eee eee 6 14 Section 9 Drawing Horizontal and Vertical Lines 6
137. Section 5 Printing Data to a Printer 0 eee eee eens 14 9 Section 6 EXIFEXecutort sn2saSisaak ates eed a nea eevee 14 9 Error Messages for Running an ADS System Starting the ADS Execution 14 10 Chapter 15 Fault Tables Module 453503 s0 stds seieos scene Sie eee eases 15 1 Overview of the Fault Tables Module 0000 c cece eee 15 1 Running the Fault Tables Module in Stand Alone Mode 15 1 Accessing the Fault Module From an ADS System 15 1 Using the Fault Tables Module 0 0 000 c cece eee eee eee 15 2 Chapter 16 PID Templates Module ccc cece cece ccc ece eens 16 1 Overview of the PID Module 00 ccc 16 1 Running the PID Module in Stand Alone Mode 4 16 1 Accessing the PID Module From an ADS System 256 16 2 General Operation of the PID Module 0 00 cess eee 16 2 PID Startap Fue sent Maa ee e dar ete ena Oba 16 3 PID Module Screens 0 eee ees 16 4 Setup SCHOEN faces E E E E athe Aa tien tts Ge cathe nse chtes Veale 16 4 Loop Configuration Screen ossosa dus ien A A ie eA Ei a E eens 16 10 Loop Monitoring Screen 6 eee ees 16 14 Loop Tuning Screens ae desea hig ase ee hea Bete an a gets ana E EEE 16 18 GFK 0641C CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual xii March 1994 Contents Appendix A CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Display System Builder Guide 0
138. Set location 1 to UNSIGNED WORD value v or prompt if no v PLCSETI I v2 p3 c4 mn gt mx gt Set location 1 to SIGNED WORD value v or prompt if no v PLCSETL 1 v2 p3 c4 mn5 mx gt Set location 1 to UNSIGNED LONGWORD value v or prompt if no v PLCSETS I v2 p3 c4 mn gt mx gt Set location 1 to SIGNED LONGWORD value v or prompt if no v PLCSETF I v2 p3 c4 mn gt mx gt Set location 1 to FLOATING POINT value v or prompt if no v 1 The syntax for specifying the loc reference is the same as for specifying a PLC data source location refer to PLC Data Sources for details except that the references must be consecutive within the same PLC memory type For example PLCGETW R1 and PLCGETW R1 1 9 are valid but PLCSETW R1 1 R2 5 9 and PLCSETW R1 0 14 Q1 are not 2 If no value parameter is specified a prompt will appear on the terminal s display line asking you to input a value STATE values are specified as 0 for OFF and 1 for ON 3 An optional 1 19 character prompt may be specified any alphanumeric character plus 4 An additional calculation may be optionally specified the additional calculation may be either a translation table entry a lookup table entry or an engineering units conversion table entry 5 Min Max bounding of the user s entry for value v may be optionally specified The PLCSET commands are used to change values in the PLC Two forms of each command are supported A value may be specified as part
139. TDPRN rs DOE Modify a data source Delete a data source View current sources rsion List sources Print sources To access the submenu press the Enter key Another menu window is opened on the screen giving the additional options of New data source Modify a data source Delete a data source View current sources List sources Print sources Each of these options is described in this section Note that the status information Screens Alarm Pages etc which had been displayed along the left hand side of the screen has been replaced with a heading Data Sources As data sources are created a list of those sources will be maintained in this area CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 New Data Source When the New data source option is selected a data entry window is opened containing five fields which may be set by entering the appropriate information Name Source Data Type Source Location Scan Rate and Additional Calc ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Data Sources ADS Print Destination STDPRN rs lew data source an Create a data source Name Source Data Type WORD Source Location Scan Rate or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Name Every PLC data source must be given a
140. TOMATION NORTH AMERICA INC Prepared for GE Fanuc Automation by Control Systems International Pty Ltd Perth Australia 1 Run ADS Builder Loaded 2 Run ADS Executor Loaded 3 Set default system name Set default terminal module Set default printer module Run ADS Fault Not loaded Run ADS PID Not loaded Enter default system name CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Next at the prompt for the default system name type in the name you have selected for the system which in this example is PUNCH PUNCH may either be a new or an existing system see Chapter 3 Section 1 for a discussion of valid system names CIMPLICITY tm 90 ADS Version 3 01 COPYRIGHT 1989 1992 GE FANUC AUTOMATION NORTH AMERICA INC Prepared for GE Fanuc Automation by Control Systems International Pty Ltd Perth Australia 1 Run ADS Builder Loaded 2 Run ADS Executor Loaded Set default system name Set default terminal module Set default printer module Run ADS Fault Not loaded Run ADS PID Not loaded Enter default system name PUNCH Pressing the Enter key completes the system name entry The system name PUNCH is now displayed on the menu screen Until the system name entry is changed running either the ADS Builder or the ADS Executor will automatically cause the system named PUNCH to be accessed CIMPLICITY tm 90 ADS Version 3 01 COPYRIGHT 1989 1992 GE FANU
141. The alarm page to be displayed may be specified as part of the command and is identified by alarm page number 1 999 Alternatively indicating an alarm page number of 0 will cause the operator to be prompted on the operator message prompt line to enter the number of the alarm page to overlay The PSHALM command overlays the specified alarm page number on top of those screens and alarm pages already displayed Again specifying an alarm page number of 0 will cause the operator to be prompted for an alarm page number If the indicated alarm page is already on the display but is not the topmost alarm page or is covered by a screen it will be moved to the top of the display CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Similar to the PPHALM command the POPALM command is utilized to remove an alarm page or pages from the display without affecting those screens and alarm pages displayed underneath Specifying an alarm page number of 1 999 indicates that that alarm page and all others displayed on top of it should be removed from the display Analarm page number of 0 indicates that only the topmost alarm page on the display is to be removed Similar to the POPALM command the REMALM command is used to remove a single alarm page from the display Screens and alarm pages on top of and underneath the removed alarm page are unaffected Again an alarm page number of 0 indicates that only the topmost ala
142. Type Location Scan Rate Additional Calc Alarm Pages 1 WORD R41 Flags Print Notify Timestamp Range 100 200 Text TANK 7 LEVEL IS HIGH Action Range 201 300 Text TANK 7 LEVEL IS VERY HIGH Action Range 301 500 Text TANK 7 LEVEL IS CRITICAL URGENT ACTION Action PSHALM 1 Range Text Action Chapter 8 Alarm Operations 8 41 Error Messages for Alarm Sources Error messages and their causes for alarm sources are listed below Bit specifications not allowed on location Bit specification is not allowed for the specified source location Conversion error invalid time format entered The scan rate must be specified as either or HH MM SS CC ENTRY ERROR Alarm source name not unique Two alarm sources may not have the same name ENTRY ERROR Invalid Additional calculation specified The referenced additional calculation does not exist ENTRY ERROR Invalid Alarm page number specified Analarm page must exist prior to being referenced as a destination for logging an alarm ENTRY ERROR n Invalid item XXXX The action command XXXX specified for alarm page number n is unknown ENTRY ERROR No Alarm source name Aname must be specified Error parsing bit specification A bit offset has been specified that exceeds the number of bits provided for by the source data type Failed to find the specified location type Anunsupported incorrect source location has been specified Failed t
143. WHITE Background BLACK Heading CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Press the Enter key again which selects the Starting Column field Again no entry is made since the default value is to be used ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Alarm Pages ADS Print Destination STDPRN ns ET Create an alarm page Name AREA_4 Number 34 Starting Row Rows 23 Starting Colum E Columns 80 Foreground Background BLACK Heading Pressing the Enter key again selects the Columns field Once again no entry is made since you want the default value to be selected ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Alarm Pages ADS Print Destination STDPRN ns Create an alarm page Name AREA_4 Number 34 Starting Rou Rows 23 Starting Column Colums HJ Foreground Background BLACK Heading GFK 0641 Chapter 8 AlarmOperations 8 5 8 6 Foreground and Background Colors The foreground and background colors specify the colors in which to display the alarm page at run time The foreground color specifies the color that the alarm messages are displayed in The f
144. Y N Hex Notation Left Justify Zero Fill Available for Edit 7 14 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Creating a Predefined Dynamic Object The two Predefined Dynamic Objects Bar Chart and Trend Graph first require definition of the size of the object To define the size of the object first press the lt Start Dynamic Object gt key The status line is updated to indicate that a dynamic object is being defined Use the arrow keys and tab key to select the region in which the dynamic object is to be placed Once the required region has been defined press the lt End Predefined Objects gt key A window is then displayed on the screen Trend Chart DRILL 50 Row Col Text Dynamic def ining Select the required predefined object by using the arrow keys or pressing the first letter of the selection A data entry window is then displayed on the screen Create Trend Chart Name Data Source Additional Calc Display Format Direction LEFT Minimum Value 1 0000 Maximum Value 100 0000 Foreground WHITE Background BLACK GFK 0641 Chapter 7 Dynamic Objects 7 15 The Name Data Source Additional Calc and Display Format fields have the same function as in normal dynamic object definition Note that the STRING data types are invalid with predefined dynamic objects The direction field applies to both bar charts and trend graphs Bar charts may g
145. _MOTOR Monitor 4 PRESSURE Tuning MATN_LOOP Note The PID module will only look for startup files in the RAM memory of the ADC module If you want to create a permanent startup file you will need to 1 Set the screens of the PID module up the way that you want the module to startup each time 2 Exit the PID module Copy the PID STR file from the ADC module to the PC using PCOP 4 Edit the file this is only necessary if the PID screens were not setup in the desired position before exiting the system 5 Rename the PID STR file as system_name STR 6 Copy the new file from the PC to the ADC module Now when the PID module starts up it will always read the system_name STR file and when it exits it will still write the PID STR file Chapter 16 PID TemplatesModule 16 3 PID Module Screens Setup Screen The ADS PID module consists of four screens e PID Loop Setup e PID Loop Configuration e PID Loop Monitoring e PID Loop Tuning All of the screens have a set of soft key definitions displayed at the bottom of the screen Function keys F1 to F4 and F10 are defined the same on all screens F1 takes you to the Setup Screen e F2 takes you to the Configuration Screen e F3 takes you to the Monitor Screen e F4 takes you to the Tuning Screen F10 exits the PID module When you are in a particular screen the soft key that takes you to that screen is unavailable The other soft keys vary from screen to screen Not
146. a key value change etc One command script may call another command script allowing you to create very complex sets of commands to be executed There is no predefined limit on the number of command scripts which may be defined for a given system you are constrained only by the amount of available memory on the ADC module When a command script is executed each command is executed in the order they were entered into the script If a command fails to execute or if you cancel a command while it is being executed the execution of the entire script will terminate at that point Any remaining commands will not be executed To access the Command scripts submenu first cursor to the Command scripts menu selection ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Modify system parameters Data sources PLC data sources Display formats Display formats Translations entries Translation table Eng Unit Conv entries Engineering unit conversion Lookup table entries Lookup table Command scripts To access the command scripts submenu press the Enter key Another menu window is opened on the screen giving the additional options of New script Modify a script Delete a script View current scripts List co
147. a transition into a non alarm normal state LATCHED alarms work in a similar manner except that once an alarm transition has occurred a new alarm for that alarm source cannot again be signaled until there has been both a transition into a non alarm state and the alarm has been acknowledged by the operator The procedure for acknowledging alarms is described in the following text Alarm Page Display An example of an alarm page displayed on a screen is shown below The current value of R100 is 348 AREA 1 ALARMS 23 13 56 24 Jun 91 Line 2 on AUTO SHUTDOWN 23 13 40 24 Jun 91 UNKNOWN FAULT detected in Line 3 23 13 31 24 Jun 91 FIRE ALARM activated in Room 12 23 13 22 24 Jun 91 Valve 2 manually closed 23 13 13 24 Jun 91 Value 1 OVER TEMPERATURE Analarm page may contain more entries than can be viewed on one screen In this case a lt Mor e gt indicator will be displayed on the alarm page indicating that the alarm page contains more entries than can be seen on that page Allalarms displayed on an alarm page which have not yet been acknowledged by the operator will be blinking A non blinking alarm page entry indicates that the operator has acknowledged that alarm entry but that the alarm source is still in an alarm condition CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Alarm Page Display Stacked Alarm pages can also be displayed stacked on the screen as shown in the following exam
148. a type Continuing our example assume that whenever the associated range is satisfied the output value to be returned is the text string TANK 7 IS FILLING Type the desired text string into the output value field ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal col Create a lookup table entry Printer Name MESSAGE Dir NAD Input Data Type WORD Lookup Table Output Data Type STRING INPUT RANGE OUTPUT VALUE 0 1000 TANK 7 IS FILLING To complete the entry of the output value press the Enter key The second or next as applicable input range field is selected next When all the required information has been entered press either the lt Save gt key from any field or the Enter key when on the tenth bottommost output value field to complete the creation of the lookup table entry The ADS Builder then verifies that the information entered by the user is consistent If no errors are found you will be returned to the menu screen and an informative message will be displayed indicating that the lookup table entry has been added to the system Also the name of any lookup table entry or entries which had just been created is listed on the screen CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Modify a Lookup Table Entry GFK 0641 An existing lookup table entry may be modified in much the same manner in which it was originally created All information concerning the lookup table
149. acter string dog onto the screen as you type the characters the select region is expanded to follow and include the cursor position 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890dog DRILL 50 Row Col Text Static Examples showing how select is used in drawing lines and cutting a block of text are included on the following pages Note that dynamic objects which are discussed in Chapter 7 cannot be included as part of a selected area Attempting to do so will result in the select designation skipping over the dynamic object s A subsequent cut operation will cut the static text in the select area but not the dynamic object s which will remain in their defined location s 6 18 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Section 9 Drawing Horizontal and Vertical Lines Lines may be drawn in one of three ways One method is that you can select the alternate character set for the terminal and enter the appropriate line drawing characters as normal static text This approach is useful if other characters in the alternate set are needed but is not the easiest method for drawing lines A second method is to press the lt Draw toggle gt key to enable the line drawing mode This is the preferred method when non rectangular objects or simple straight lines are to be drawn In line drawing mode the Z and cursor keys are redefined to draw a line in the direction of movement up down l
150. al March 1994 GFK 0641 Print Command Scripts The Print command scripts option allows the details of the defined command scripts to be printed on an attached printer When running the ADC version of the ADS Builder access to the Print options is only available if the ADS Print Module and Spooler are installed To initiate a print of the defined command scripts select the Print command scripts option by either cursoring to the option and pressing the Enter key or by pressing the P key Terminal Printer Dir ADS BUILDER COIT NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Command Scripts SCRIPT_01 SCRIPT_02 SCRIPT_03 SCRIPT_04 SCRIPT_05 SCRIPT_06 SCRIPT_O SCRIPT_08 SCRIPT_09 SCRIPT_10 SCRIPT_11 SCRIPT_12 Current System Name COM2 COM1 SCRIPT_13 SCRIPT_14 SCRIPT_15 SCRIPT_16 SCRIPT_1 7 SCRIPT_18 SCRIPT_19 SCRIPT_20 SCRIPT_21 SCRIPT_22 SCRIPT_23 SCRIPT_24 DRILL Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination Print command scripts from J to A prompt is displayed at the bottom of the screen 1 00 s 1 00 s STDPRN Delete a script View current scripts sion List command scripts Print command scripts New script Modify a script Print command scripts from H HHHHHHHHHHHHH CO dad HH HH HH HH H HH H H H Depending upon the response entered into the from and to field several different listings can be generated The listing options
151. ame is enclosed in brackets the key is actually labeled with that name on the keyboard If a key name is enclosed by angle brackets lt gt the key s location on the keyboard must be determined from the following table When using this table be sure to use the column that matches your terminal type based on terminal selection that you made on the menu program screen described in Chapter 1 Table 6 1 Key Functions for System Building Terminal Key Functions MOIT COIT MIBM CIBMt TMOIT TCOIT VT100 MPC CPC EIBM VIBMt GOLD F11 PF1 F11 or Insert Help F12 PF2 F12 or Home Quit F10 KPO F10 or KPO Save GOLD F10 GOLD KPO GOLD F10 or GOLD KPO Object list GOLDS GOLDS GOLD S Refresh screen W Clear field X Beginning of line GOLD lt End of line GOLD gt Top of screen GOLD Bottom of screen GOLD J Video select F1 or KP1 Video clear GOLD F1 GOLD KP1 GOLD F1 or GOLD KP1 Color F4 or KP4 Character set GOLD F4 GOLD KP4 GOLD F4 or GOLD KP4 Double wide GOLD W GOLD W GOLD W Double size GOLD D GOLD D GOLD D Draw toggle GOLD F5 GOLD KP5 GOLD F5 or GOLD KP5 Draw area F5 KP5 F5 or KP5 Delete line F14 PF4 F14 or End Undelete line GOLD F14 GOLD PF4 GOLD F14 or GOLD END Select toggle F3 KP3 F3 or KP3 Cut area F6 KP6 F6 or KP6 Paste area GOLD F6 GOLD KP6 GOLD F6 or GOLD KP6 Startdynamic predefinedobject GOLD F7 GOLD KP7 GOLD F7 or GOLD KP7 End dynamic object F7 KP7 F7 or KP7 End predefined objects GOLD F2 GOLD KP2 GOLD F2 or GOLD KP2 D
152. ample assume that you want to delete the engineering units conversion table entry PERCENT Type the desired name PERCENT into the prompt field When the Enter key is pressed the form for the specified entry is displayed on the screen along with a prompt on the status line asking you to either confirm the delete or quit the operation ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Eng u Delete an E U C entry PERCENT Name PERCENT Input value low 32768 Output value low Input value high 32767 Output value high Specify Data Types Y N N Input Data Type NIL Output Data Type NIL Press lt RETURN gt to delete this engineering calc entry else lt QUIT gt If you press the Enter key at this point the entry will be deleted from the system When the engineering units conversion table entry is deleted you are returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed on the status line indicating that the deletion was completed If you press the lt Quit gt key indicating that the engineering units conversion table entry deletion should be canceled you will be returned to the menu page no message will be displayed to indicate that the deletion was canceled If you specify an engineering units conversion table entry that does not currently exist you will be returned to the menu page
153. ams GFK 0265 Series 90 70 Programmable Controller Reference Manual Describes the programming instructions used to create application programs for the Series 90 70 Programmable Logic Controller Provides fault explanations and corrections and contains CPU operation and performance data GFK 0466 Logicmaster 90 30 Programming Software User s Manual Explains how to use the Logicmaster 90 30 software to configure the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller and create application programs GFK 0467 Series 90 30 90 20 Programmable Controller Reference Manual Describes the programming instructions used to create application programs for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller GFK 0487 Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Reference Manual Describes how to use the PCM programmer software PCOP and provides details for developing applications for the PCM Preface v Preface GFK 0505 Operator Interface Terminal OIT Explains how to install startup and program the OIT GFK 0361 Operator Interface Terminal Mini OIT Supplement Explains how to power up operate and configure the Mini OIT We Welcome Your Comments and Suggestions At GE Fanuc automation we strive to produce quality technical documentation After you have used this manual please take a few moments to complete and return the Reader s Comment Card located on the next page Henry A Konat Senior Technical Writer vi CIMPLICITY90 ADS Al
154. anned at their defined rates The function key assignments associated with the initial screen are the ones initially put into effect Depending on what other modules are installed in the PLC along with the ADC module the ADC may be ready to execute before the CPU is ready to communicate with it If this occurs the message Waiting on Data Manager to Complete Initialization will be displayed for several seconds on the terminal screen If the ADC is unable to communicate with the CPU for approximately one minute the ADS software will stop trying to execute If this happens you should verify that the ADC module is still properly configured and that the CPU module is OK Correct whatever problem is found and soft reset the ADC module Viewing Data on a Screen When the system is operating you can view the animation for all dynamic objects appearing on a displayed screen The ADS system allows you to stack many screens on the terminal display one on top of the other The data sources associated with any screen on the display not just those associated with the topmost screen are scanned at their defined rates Thus if a screen not at the top of the stack is not completely covered all the dynamic objects on it still visible can still be seen animated If you have specified a field width for a dynamic object which is too small for the display of the actual value the field will be filled with a string of asterisks rather than a shortened for
155. ans Foreground Background Pressing the lt Save gt key at this point completes the creation form entry All fields not changed are copied from screen 50 s creation form You are returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed on the status line indicating that the copy operation is complete Also the listing of screen names is updated to reflect the addition of the new screen GFK 0641 Chapter 4 ScreenOperations 4 9 ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Printer COM1 Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Screens C 50 299 Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination 1 00 s 1 00 s STDPRN New screen Modify screen Screen paint Delete screen Key assignments List screens Print screen details Screen copied List Screens On the left hand side of the screen a list of screen names and their associated numbers are maintained in numeric not alphabetic order The ADS Builder allows you to page through the total list of screens To initiate the listing of current screens select the List screens menu option either by cursoring to the that option on the menu and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the L key In this example sequence twenty six screens currently exist in the system When you press the Enter key the first group of screens is displayed along with a prompt on the status line gi
156. at the operator may view entries not currently displayed on the alarm page and optionally confirm an entry not originally displayed at the top of the alarm page CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 Confirming an Alarm In the example below assume that you want to confirm the second entry on the alarm page Press the key to position the entry at the top of the alarm page The current value of R100 is 348 AREA 1 ALARMS 23 13 56 24 Jun 91 Line 2 on AUTO SHUTDOWN 23 13 40 24 Jun 91 UNKNOWN FAULT detected in Line 3 23 13 31 24 Jun 91 FIRE ALARM activated in Room 12 AREA 2 ALARMS 23 13 40 24 Jun 91 UNKNOWN FAULT detected in Line 3 Note that a lt Mor e gt prompt is now shown at the top of the alarm page to indicate that an entry has been scrolled off the page at the top Additionally note that this particular alarm is also displayed on the alarm page under the topmost one Press the Enter key to confirm the alarm If the alarm condition no longer exists as in this example it will be removed from all alarm pages containing it both pages in this example If the alarm condition still exists after being confirmed the entry will stop blinking and remain on all pages containing it If this were the case the source of the alarm condition would still need to be removed Note that the alarm confirmation mode is still in effect The current value of R100 i
157. at this point will display the remaining three alarm page names and numbers ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Alarm Pages ADS Print Destination STDPRN ALMPG_25 25 ALMPG_26 26 ALMPG_2 27 New alarm page Modify an alarm page Delete an alarm page View alarm pages List pages Print page details Alarm sources Press lt RETURN gt to list more entries else lt QUIT gt Pressing the lt Quit gt key exits the list operation The alarm page names and numbers currently displayed on the screen will be left displayed GFK 0641 Chapter 8 Alarm Operations 8 11 Print Page Details The Print page details option allows the details of the defined alarm pages to be printed on an attached printer When running the ADC version of the ADS Builder access to the Print options is only available if the ADS Print Module the Enter key or by pressing the P key Print alarm Terminal Printer Dir Alarm Pages ALMPG_01 1 ALMPG_02 2 ALMPG_03 3 ALMPG_04 4 ALMPG_05 5 ALMPG_06 6 ALMPG_0 7 ALMPG_08 8 ALMPG_09 3 ALMPG_10 10 ALMPG_11 11 ALMPG_12 12 ADS BUILDER COIT NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Current System Name DRILL COMZ COM1 ALMPG_13 ALMPG_14 ALMPG_15 ALMPG_16 ALMPG_1 7 ALMPG_18 ALMPG_19 ALMPG_20 ALMPG_21 ALM
158. ate Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Reports ADS Print Destination STDPRN Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s 1 00 s PROD_REP 43 New report Modify report Delete report Copy report List report Print report details Enter the number of the report to paint After completing the modifications to the report press the lt Save gt key to exit the screen report editor the report s contents will be saved in the ADS Builder s working memory You are then returned to the menu page The lt Quit gt key may be used to exit the Report Painter without saving the changes you have made Delete Report A report may be irrecoverably removed from a system by deleting it Any dynamic objects defined on the report will also be lost but not any referenced PLC data source GFK 0641 Chapter 5 ReportOperations 5 5 translation table entry or lookup table entry To initiate a report deletion select the Delete Report menu option either by cursoring to that option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the D key The ADS Builder will prompt you for the number of the report to be deleted For example assume that you want to delete report 43 PROD_REP Type the report number into the prompt field Pressing the Enter key completes the delete report operation You are then returned to the menu page the listing of existing reports on the left hand side of the terminal display is updated to r
159. be executed as a result of a single trigger The lt object list gt key can be used to obtain a list of existing command scripts or to create a new one As an example of defining a command script assume that you want to specify a command to set the value of unsigned WORD PLC register R101 to 0 To do this type the appropriate command into the selected command field which is highlighted by reverse video ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COMZ2 Default Scan Rate Create a command script Name INITIALIZE plcsetu r101 0 Enter ONE valid command per line To complete the command entry press the Enter key The second Command field is selected next When all the required information has been entered press the lt Save gt key from any field or the Enter key when on the tenth bottommost command field to complete the creation of the command script The ADS system then verifies that the information is valid If no errors are found you will be returned to the menu screen along with an informative message being displayed indicating that the command script has been added to the system Also the name of the command script you have just created is listed on the screen GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 81 Modify a Script 3 82 An existing command script may be modified in much the same manner in which it was originally created All information concerning the command script may be change
160. be modified in much the same manner in which it was originally created The alarm page s Name and Number fields may not be changed only the page s size position heading and foreground and background color fields To initiate an alarm page modification first select the Modify an alarm page menu option either by cursoring to that option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the M key The ADS Builder will prompt you for the number of the alarm page to be modified Only existing alarm pages may be modified the New alarm page menu option must be used in order to create a new alarm page ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT CON2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Alarm Pages ADS Print Destination STDPRN AREA_4 34 New alarm page Delete an alarm page View alarm pages List pages Print page details Alarm sources Enter the number of the alarm page to edit J For example assume that you want to modify alarm page 34 AREA_4 Type the alarm page number into the prompt field When you press the Enter key the form for the alarm page is displayed with the Starting Row field initially selected You can now proceed to change any of the fields except the Name and Number fields Pressing the lt Save gt key from any field or the Enter key with the Heading field selected completes the modification
161. ble entry The lt object list gt key can be used to obtain a list of existing additional calculations or to create a new one CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Display Format Optionally a display format may be applied to the dynamic object This is useful in displaying the dynamic object with certain video attributes or color based on the value driving the dynamic object You may reference the name of a display format which has been previously defined or may specify the name of a new display format If a new display format is specified a data entry form for its definition is displayed on the screen You can use the lt object list gt key to obtain a list of existing display formats or as an alternative method for creating a new one In the following example assume that NEG_POS has been specified for the display format which has not yet been defined The appropriate data entry form is displayed on the screen The display format entry form is filled out in the same manner as has been described previously The value of R100 is EBEE Create a display format Name NEG_POS Data Type SIGNED WORD Range Action 32768 1 reverse 0 32767 Pressing the lt Save gt key at this point completes the entry of the display format You are then returned to the dynamic object data entry form An informative message indicates that the display format was added to the system GFK 0641 Chapter
162. ble high object over normal wide line Cannot paste double wide object over normal double high line Cannot paste normal object over double high wide line A dynamic object may only be pasted onto a line whose size matches the size of the dynamic object Cannot PASTE dynamic OBJECT A dynamic object may not be pasted on top of any part of another dynamic object DEFINITION ERROR Can t find valid formatting characters When the Display Value field is set to Y data formatting characters are searched for Either no data formatting characters were specified or the characters specified are improper for the data type specified by the data source or additional calculation field Definition error data types don t match The output data type of the specified additional calculation does not match the input data type of the specified display format Direction must be LEFT or RIGHT Trend graphs may only be defined to animate in the LEFT or RIGHT directions Direction must be UP or RIGHT Bar charts may only be defined to animate in the UP or RIGHT direction ENTRY ERROR Invalid Additional calculation specified An additional calculation has been referenced that does not exist ENTRY ERROR No display defined for object If the display value field is set to N a display format must be specified to control the dynamic object ENTRY ERROR No Object name A name must be specified ENTRY ERROR Object name not unique Two dynam
163. bles alarm source actions The three variants of the ACK_ALARM command provide an alternative method for acknowledging alarms in a system Depending on the variant used you can acknowledge all alarms in the entire system acknowledge only those alarms logged on a particular alarm page or acknowledge only those alarms resulting from a specified alarm source Examples of valid Alarm Source Related Commands are ACTION_OFF PLC_FAULT ACTION_ON Disable alarm source actions display the PLC fault table screen re enable alarm source actions upon exiting the fault table screen ACK _ALARM Acknowledge all alarms across all alarm pages ACK _ALARM 3 Acknowledge all alarms on alarm page 3 ACK_ALARM LOW_TEMP Acknowledge all alarms generated by alarm source LOW_TEMFP across all alarm pages GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 77 Table 3 26 Option Module Access Commands Action Description PLC_FAULT f b Display the PLC Fault table screen with optionally specified fore ground and background colors f and b IO_FAULT b Displaythe I O Fault table screen with optionally specified fore ground and background colors f and b SETUP_LOOP fb Displaythe PID Loop Setup screen with optionally specified fore ground and background colors f and b CONFIGURE_LOOP fb Displaythe PID Loop Configure screen with optionally specified foreground and background colors f and b MONITOR_LOOP f b Display the PID Loop Monito
164. ch that it may be communicated with ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI CSTDIO Default Scan Rate B8 s Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate 58s Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Load system Save system to disk Modify current directory Execute system in RAM Clear system Print destination BPN OFPUMWOrF W Checking for attached online ADC CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 9 Should the Builder be unable to communicate with the ADC module you will be informed of this fact and will be prompted to correct the situation and to attempt the operation again ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI CSTDIOD Default Scan Rate 8s Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate 58s Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Load system Save system to disk Modify current directory Execute system in RAM Clear system Print destination PNOrPUWUMWOrW Function not available when ADC is Offline Attach
165. cified which does not currently exist you will be returned to the menu page with the message Invalid command script specified displayed on the status line CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Delete a Script Acommand script may be irrecoverably removed from a system by deleting it Note You should be careful to not delete a command script referenced by a function key on any screen any display format action or any alarm source action To initiate a command script deletion first select the Delete a script menu option either by cursoring to the Delete a script option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the D key The ADS system will prompt you for the name of the command script to be deleted As indicated above only existing command scripts which are not referenced by any object in the system may be deleted For example if you wish to delete the command script INITIALIZE type the command script name INITIALIZE into the prompt field When you press the Enter key the form for the specified command script is displayed on the screen along with a prompt on the status line asking you to confirm the delete Pressing the Enter key at this point will cause the command script to be deleted from the system Upon deletion of the command script you are returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed on the status line indicating that the deletion
166. creen ADS Print Destination PC TUTOR PRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Configuration operations Screen operations Alarm operations Report operations Load Save operations Print system summary Exit SeecocorPrPOorPU When the Enter key is pressed the ADS Builder will immediately exit the program unless you have modifications to the system currently loaded in the ADS Builder s working memory since it was last saved to either RAM or PC If unsaved modifications have been made the ADS Builder prompts you to confirm that the exit should continue GFK 0641 11 1 11 2 ADS BUILDER Current System Name RAM TUTOR Terminal TMINI C0M2 Default Scan Rate 00 s Printer NULL Default Alarm Scan Rate 00 s Memory 109008 Bytes Startup Screen ADS Print Destination PC TUTOR PRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Lookup table entries Command scripts SeecoocorPrPOoru All changes to the current system will be lost continue Y N IN DE By default the ADS Builder initializes the response to the prompt to N don t exit the Builder If you decide that the ADS Builder should not be exited at this time press the Enter key to cancel the exit request If you are sure that the ADS Builder should be
167. cter Set 3 DRILL 50 Row Col Text Static Press the Enter key to complete the selection The non ASCII characters making up the alternate character set will now be displayed when keys are pressed on the keyboard rather than the ASCII characters labeled on those keys CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 6 Selecting Double Wide and Double High Wide Characters The ADS system allows individual lines in the screen that is currently displayed to be set to double wide or double high wide Double wide characters are characters which are double the width of normal characters they occupy two columns for each character Double high wide characters occupy two rows and two columns per character The CIBM MIBM CPC and MPC terminal tables do not directly support either the double size or the double wide characters They do perform an emulation of them however allowing you to build systems with them which will later be executed on a terminal which does support them Note Double size and double wide text is required by the terminal hardware to start each character on an odd column number with relation to the physical terminal device This should be taken into account when overlaying a screen which contains double size or double wide text so that the odd column alignment is maintained Note The double size and double wide lines are a terminal characteristic This means that you shou
168. culation Often data retrieved from the PLC is not in the proper form for use by any part of the ADS system and may need to be converted to a usable format For example a counts value might need to be converted to engineering units prior to being used by the ADS system The Additional Calculation field provides a method for doing this In this field you can optionally specify one of four different types of calculations e lookup table entry e translation table entry e engineering units conversion table entry custom translation Only the custom translation calculation will be discussed in detail here for a discussion of lookup table entries translation table entries and engineering unit conversion table entries see Lookup Table Translation Table and Engineering Units Conversion Table earlier in this chapter An existing lookup table translation table or engineering units conversion table entry may be referenced Multiple calculations may be specified by separating each reference by a space output input data type matching must be maintained The lt object list gt key can be used to obtain a list of existing additional calculations or to create a new one A custom translation allows you to apply the formula A Input Value B C where A is the scaling factor B is the pre scaling offset C is the post scaling offset to the data retrieved from the PLC with the data interpreted according to the Source Data Type
169. d except its name Changing the name of a command script requires you to first delete the script and then recreate it with the desired new name To initiate a command script modification first select the Modify a script menu option either by cursoring to that option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the M key The ADS system will prompt you for the name of the command script to be modified Only existing command scripts may be modified the New script menu option must be used in order to create a new script As an example of modifying a command script assume that you wish to modify the command script INITIALIZE First you must type the desired command script name INITIALIZE into the prompt field When you press the Enter key the form for the specified command script is displayed with the first Command field initially selected You can now proceed to change any of the fields except the Name field Pressing the lt Save gt key from any field or the Enter key with the tenth command field selected completes the modification You are returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed on the status line indicating that the modification was completed If you want to cancel the modification disregarding any changes which have been made press the lt Quit gt key An informative message is displayed on the status line indicating that no changes were made to the command script If a command script is spe
170. data type Failed to find the specified location type Arunspecified incorrect source location has been specified Failed to match input data type for KXXXX The input data type for the referenced additional calculation does not match the data type specified as the source data type Too many bits for data type The PLC location specified requires more storage space bits than provided for by the specified source data type Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 23 Section 3 Display Formats Display formats must be defined to control the way in which data is displayed Display formats are intended to provide an easily accessible method for displaying data without the need to specify separate rules for every screen built There is no predefined limit on the number of display formats which may be defined for a system the only constraint is by the amount of available memory on the ADC module Your display formats can either be defined here before referencing them with a dynamic object see Screen Operations Chapter 4 or they can be created from within the Screen Painter when creating a dynamic object In order to access the Display formats submenu first cursor to that item on the menu selection on the displayed screen By pressing the Enter key the Display format submenu is accessed Another menu window is opened on the screen giving the additional options of New display format Modify a display format Delete a display format V
171. de for dynamic object o on screen n using video high light v to indicate editing mode SCN_EDIT n v Enter edit mode for all editable dynamic objects on screen n using video highlight v to indicate editing mode for object WAIT_DATA n o Pause until data next scanned for dynamic object o on screen n Note The screen referenced by an ATTACH DYN_EDIT SCN_EDIT or WAIT_DATA command MUST have already been displayed PRIOR to executing one of these commands otherwise the command will fail to execute Note Valid video highlighting settings include REVERSE BOLD UNDERLINE BLACK RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE MAGENTA CYAN OR WHITE BLINK should not be used The ATTACH command is used primarily to dynamically alter which PLC data source is referenced by a particular dynamic object on a particular screen Optionally a new translation table entry may be specified in addition to or instead of the PLC data source to use a different scaling factor If a dynamic object has been made available for editing the DY N_EDIT command may be used to invoke the actual edit You can reference a dynamic object on the topmost screen displayed or on any other screen however you should take care to make sure the screen is actually displayed Typically reverse video is chosen for the video specification although any video attribute can be chosen If no video specification is given normal video is the default The SCN_EDIT command functions as a special ty
172. dified in much the same manner in which it was originally created All information concerning the display format may be changed except its name Changing the name of a display format requires the name to first be deleted and then be recreated with the desired new name To initiate a display format modification first select the Modify a display format menu option either by cursoring to the desired option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the M key ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Display Formats ADS Print Destination STDPRN NEG_POS Delete a display format View current formats on List formats Print formats Neu display format odify a display format Enter the name of the display format to edit XR The ADS system will prompt for the name of the display format to be modified Only existing display formats may be modified the New display format menu The desired display format name NEG_POS is typed into the prompt field When the Enter key is pressed the form for the specified display format is displayed with the Data Type field initially selected At this point you can proceed to change any of the fields except the Name field Pressing the lt Save gt key from any field or the Enter key with the tenth action field selected will complete th
173. ds Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 37 Section 4 Translation Table 3 38 Translation table entries must be defined to perform linear scale translations with optional data type conversion on numerical input data Where a data type conversion is not specified the input data type remains unchanged following the translation Truncation of the translated value will be performed if necessary to maintain the data type Translation table entries are intended to provide a globally accessible method for dealing with translations without the need to individually specify rules for every PLC data source or dynamic object created There is no predefined limit on the number of translation table entries which may be defined for a given system you are constrained only by the amount of available memory on the ADC module Your translation table entries can either be defined here before referencing them with a PLC data source alarm source or with a dynamic object see Screen Operations Chapter 4 or they can be created from within the PLC data source or alarm source creation menu or from within the Screen Painter when creating a dynamic object In order to access the Translation table submenu first cursor to the appropriate menu selection Translation table When the Enter key is pressed the Translation table submenu is accessed Another menu window is opened on the screen giving the additional options of New translation Modify a translation
174. ds as screens are pushed and popped Also alarm logging continually shrinks memory until alarms are acknowledged MAX_BLOCK functions identically to MEMORY except that it returns the size in bytes of the largest contiguous block of free unallocated memory The typical information which you must type in to specify a source location is lt source location gt lt PLC memory gt lt reference gt lt modifier gt where lt PLC memory gt is as listed in the table above and lt reference gt is a numeric value specifying a particular reference offset within the PLC memory Optionally a reference lt modifier gt may be specified for some PLC memory types where O indicates the reference s override status and F indicates its point channel fault status For example to indicate a source location for PLC memory reference R1 you would specify R1 The previous field Source Data Type determines how many consecutive references are implied by the source location selection For example if a source location of I1 were specified along with a source data type of WORD the data source would include PLC memory locations I1 to I16 The reason for this is that the WORD data type requires sixteen bits of storage and that each I reference is a single bit in size As an example of a source location entry assume that you want to attach the data source to PLC reference R1 To do this type R1 into the Source Location field Note that for th
175. ds into the Action field ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate Create a display format Name NEG_POS Data Type SIGNED WORD Range Action 32768 1 reverse logttm Value is negative To complete the entry of the action press the Enter key The entry will be completed and the next range field is selected if more are listed It is important to remember that all range action pairs need to be specified to have the system perform as expected If for example an object is to be displayed in red for the range 200 600 but invisible all other times then you must explicitly indicate the ranges for which the object should be invisible If a pertinent range is not specified the effect will be that NO ACTION occurs rather than an assumed default action When all the required information has been entered press the lt Save gt key from any field or the Enter key when on the tenth bottom action field to complete the creation of the display format The ADS system then verifies that the information which has been entered is consistent If no errors are found the menu screen will be displayed along with an informative message indicating that the display format has been added to the system Also the name of the newly created display format is listed on the screen GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 31 Modify a Display Format 3 32 An existing display format may be mo
176. e If you are operating the PID module with touch screens you will have access to one additional soft key on the Configuration Monitor and Tuning screens The F9 key toggles between KYPD EN and KYPD DS and is used to turn the touch keypad on and off as required On all non touch terminals the F9 sofkey is inactive on the three screens mentioned above The Setup Screen provides the mechanism for defining loops under the PID module The information provided allows you to access the loop in PLC memory enforce user access limitations set engineering scales etc Loops must be defined in the Setup Screen prior to using them The PID Setup Screen is accessed from all other screens by pressing F1 only when the PID module is run stand alone Note It is recommended that you use the PC Based Builder to create and modify the loop definitions Refer to Chapter 13 Options PID in this manual for more information The PID module can be installed with or without the functionality of the Setup Screen As a system is being developed there may be frequent and necessary use of the functionality presented by the Loop Setup screen but after a system has been developed there is usually no need to change the definitions of the loops In most cases in an executing system access to the PID loops through the Loop Setup screen is restricted Therefore you are allowed to choose whether or not to install the PID module with or without Loop Setup funct
177. e Executor a startup screen should be specified 3 6 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 This completes the selections on the Modify system parameters screen The modifications you have made must be saved To exit the Modify system parameters submenu press the lt Save gt key from any field or the Enter key with the cursor positioned on the Startup Screen field The modifications are saved and the summary information on the screen is updated to reflect the modifications made to the system parameters ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0MZ Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts odify system parameters PLC data sources Display formats Translation table Engineering unit conversion Lookup table Command scripts eocoocooceceoceo Warning no startup screen yet specified Error Messages for Modify System Parameters Error messages and their causes for system parameters are listed below Cannot load terminal table XXXXX TBL Terminal table XXXXX does not exist you can only specify an existing terminal table ENTRY ERROR Default scan time is too
178. e Screen Operations Chapter 4 or they can be created from within the PLC data source or alarm source creation menu or from within the Screen Painter when creating a dynamic object In order to access the Engineering units conversion submenu first cursor to the appropriate menu selection Engineering unit conversion When the Enter key is pressed the Engineering units conversion table submenu is accessed Another menu window is opened on the screen giving the additional options of New unit conversion Modify a unit conversion Delete a unit conversion View current entries List unit conversions Print unit conversions ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir NADS_PC RFMAN PCM Startup Screen Eng unit conversions ADS Print Destination STDPRN Modify a unit conversion Delete a unit conversion View current entries hl List unit conversions Print unit conversions ew unit conversion Each of these options is described in the following pages Note that the status information formerly displayed along the left hand side of the screen has been replaced with a heading Eng unit conversions As engineering units conversion table entries are created a list of those entries will be maintained in this area GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 49 New Unit Conversion When the New unit conversion opt
179. e delete a unit conversion equation error messages list unit sane E58 modify a unit conversion new unit conversion print unit conversions view current entries EPSON Error Messages display formats B 37 translation nats Bo Error messages alarm pages alarm sources command scripts dynamic objects engineering units conversion table 3 58 load save operations P 17 lookup table modify system parameters b 7 PLC data sources report operations 5 8 running an ADS system starting the ADS execution screen operations Index screen report editing 6 28 Executing a system alarm acknowledgement 14 6 alarm handling alarm page display alarm page display stacked alarms associated with alarm pages 14 3 alarms not associated with alarm pages ite confirming an Alarm error messages exit executor initial startup 14 2 key functions operator prompts and messages printing data toa primes viewing data on a screen Executor exit 14 9 Exit ADS Builder Exit Executor EXIT command 6 30 F Faulttable I O Fault table PLC 15 1 Fault Tables Module accessing from ADS system overview 15 1 running in stand alone mode 15 1 using the Fault tables module 5 1 Field editing Foreground color space 6 27 Foreground colors alarm page 8 6 Foreground colors selecting 6 5 Formatting characters oral pas period
180. e and Spooler are installed To initiate a print of the defined display formats select the Print formats option by either cursoring to the option and pressing the Enter key or by pressing the P key ADS BUILDER Terminal COIT Printer Dir Display Formats FORMAT_01 FORMAT_02 FORMAT_03 FORMAT_04 FORMAT_05 FORMAT_06 FORMAT_0 FORMAT_08 FORMAT_09 FORMAT_10 FORMAT_11 FORMAT_12 Current System Name COM2 COM1 NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM FORMAT_13 FORMAT_14 FORMAT_15 FORMAT_16 FORMAT_1 7 FORMAT_18 FORMAT_19 FORMAT_20 FORMAT_21 FORMAT_22 FORMAT_23 FORMAT_24 DRILL Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination 1 00 s 1 00 s STDPRN Modify a display format E Delete a display format View current formats on List formats Print formats display format Print display formats from J to 3 36 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 A prompt is displayed at the bottom of the screen Print print formats from HHHHHHHEHEEREEEE Co HHH IEH HH HHH HHHH Depending upon the response entered into the from and to field several different listings can be generated The listing options are as shown below from lt idl gt to lt id2 gt gt print out data sources idl to id2 from lt idl gt to gt print out data source idl from to lt id2 gt gt print
181. e displaying the alarm text on the status line can help warn the operator of some condition it should NOT be selected as the ONLY means of providing such a warning Assume that you do not want to be notified of the alarm on the terminal s status line when the alarm is triggered Pressing the Enter key accepts the default choice of not notifying the operator via the status line and selects the Auto ack field Auto Acknowledge The Auto Acknowledge field is used to indicate whether or not an alarm should automatically acknowledge itself without operator intervention The default setting is to NOT automatically acknowledge the alarm You would want to specify auto acknowledgement for any alarm text you would want to see in an alarm page only when the source was still in alarm Setting this field to Y will cause the alarm text to be removed from the alarm page as soon as the alarm condition is cleared To accept the default setting of N press the Enter key Note that the first Output Text to Alarm Pages s is selected next CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 Output Text to Following Alarm Page s The Output Text to Following Alarm Page s field are used to specify up to ten different alarm pages to which the text defined in the Text field above along with the alarm s timestamp if requested should be logged If you intend to view and optionally acknowledge alarms at
182. e from and to fields several different listings can be generated The listing options are as shown below from from from from from from from from lt idl gt lt idl gt rn nxn lt idl gt nxn rn S We to to to to to to to to lt id2 gt nn lt id2 gt lt id2 gt Wa we Wa Wa print print print print print print print print out out out out out out out out data sources idl to id2 data source idl data source id2 all all all all all data data data data data sources up to id2 sources from ill sources sources sources Pressing the lt Quit gt key cancels the print operation After selection of the required range of translation table entries to be printed the ADS Builder sends the information to the Print Destination specified using the Print Destination option see Load Save Operations Chapter 9 GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 47 Translation table information is formatted as shown in the following examples TRANSLATION LISTING Translation Times_10 Variables A 10 B 0 Co 0 Input Data Type NIL Output Data Type NIL Translation WORD_FLOAT Variables A 0 100000 B 0 Cue 0 Input Data Type WORD Output Data Type FLOAT Note A data type of NIL for both the input data type and the output data type indicates that no data type conversion is to be pe
183. e modification You are returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed on the status line indicating the modification was completed The ADS system does not prevent the data type of a display format being modified to a value which may conflict with the display format s use elsewhere in the system Protection is built into the ADS Executor to prevent any abnormal behavior from occurring at run time however you should use caution when changing data types of display formats that have already been used in the system If you change your mind and wish to cancel the modification disregarding any changes which have been made press the lt Quit gt key An informative message is then displayed on the status line indicating that no changes were made to the display format If you should specify a display format which does not currently exist you will be returned to the menu page with the message Invalid display format specified displayed on the status line CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 Delete a Display Format Adisplay format may be irrecoverably removed from a system by deleting it Note You must exercise caution to not delete a display format referenced by a dynamic object on some screen To initiate a display format deletion first select the Delete a display format menu option either by cursoring to the desired option and then pressing the Enter ke
184. e report files A message will be displayed on the prompt message line indicating which file is currently being saved If a screen or report file has not been loaded into the ADS Builder s working memory prior to invoking the save operation it will be loaded first and then written out to ensure that all files making up the system are actually written to the RAM disk the system could have been loaded from PC or the system name could have been changed from what was originally loaded After all files have been saved to the RAM device a message is displayed on the prompt message line to indicate that the save operation has been completed ADS BUILDER Current System Name PC MEMRY Terminal UT100 Printer Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Lookup table entries Command scripts System save complete COM2 NULL Memory 88352 Bytes 10 Default Scan Rate 25 8 Default Alarm Scan Rate 25 S Startup Screen ADS Print Destination PC DRILL PRN Configuration operations Screen operations Alarm operations Report operations Print system summary Exit CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 9 Section 3 Archive System to PC The system currently loaded in the ADS Builder may be stored to the PC disk currently selected folder on an attached computer running TERMF or ju
185. eature is particularly useful when you wish to shift the entire contents of a line to the right Note that any characters which would lie beyond the right hand side of the screen or report boundary as a result of the undelete are lost from the screen or report Continuing with the previous example assume that you want to undelete the line you have just deleted but leave the cursor at its current position Pressing the lt Undelete line gt key restores the previously deleted line beginning at column 25 cursor location As a result the rightmost 24 characters of the previously deleted line are lost for this undelete 3 4 5 6 8 112345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456 DRILL 50 Row Col Text Static GFK 0641 Chapter 6 Screen Painter and Report Painter 6 13 6 Section 8 Selecting a Region The lt Select gt key may be used to initiate the selection of a block of static text dynamic objects may not be selected in this manner Once selected that block of text may be cut into a buffer the display attributes of that block may be changed or a line may be drawn within the outer edge of the selected region Only rectangular regions may be selected irregular shaped regions may not be selected To begin a select operation first place the cursor on one of the four corners of the rectangle The region is then selected by moving the cursor key across the region to be selected Movement of the cursor may be in any direction
186. ecified foreground and background colors f and b Display theI O Fault table screen with optionally specified foreground and background colors f and b Display the PID Loop Setup screen with optionally specified foreground and background col ors f and b Display the PID Loop Configure screen with optionally specified foreground and background colorsf and b Display the PID Loop Monitor screen with optionally specified foreground and background colorsf and b Display the PID Loop Tuning screen with optionally specified foreground and background colorsf and b Table 8 10 Dynamic Object Related Commands Action ATTACH n o d c DYN_EDIT n o v SCN_EDIT n v WAIT_DATA n 0 Description Attach dynamic object o on screen n to optionally PLC data source d using optionally new calculation c Enter edit mode for dynamic object o on screen n using video highlight v to indicate editing mode Enter edit mode for all editable dynamic objects on screen n using video highlight v to indicate editing mode for object Pause until data next scanned for dynamic object o on screen n Table 8 11 Miscellaneous Commands Action LOGTTM x LOGMES x REPORT n HELP n TIDUMP REFRSH PORTW p t EXIT Description Log message x to message line on screen Log message x to attached printer and to message line on screen Output report n to the attached printer Overlay help screen indexed b
187. ed The output value associated with the selected range is then returned Up to 10 input range output value pairs may be specified The format for specifying an input range is lt I gt lt I2 gt where I1 must be defined and I2 Il As stated in the previous discussion a given input range must be consistent with the lookup table entry s assigned input data type This means for instance that only ON and OFF may be used as range designators for lookup table entries with an assigned input data type of STATE and that only numbers in the range 32768 to 32767 may be used with an assigned input data type of SIGNED WORD As an example of specifying an input range assume that you want to specify an output value for the input range 0 1000 Type the desired range into the input range field ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal Create a lookup table entry Printer Name MESSAGE Dir Input Data Type WORD Lookup Table Output Data Type STRING INPUT RANGE OUTPUT VALUE 0 1000 To complete the entry press the Enter key The associated Output value field is selected next Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 63 3 64 Output Value As stated above output values are paired with a given input range with a maximum of 10 input range output value pairs being supported The output value is a single value only which is returned as the result of the lookup The output value must be consistent with the output dat
188. ed in numeric not alphabetic order The ADS Builder allows you to page through the total list of reports in groups of up to twenty two at a time To initiate the listing of current reports select the List report menu option either by cursoring to that option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the L key Pressing the lt Quit gt key exits the list operation The listing of reports currently displayed will remain displayed CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Print Report Details The Print report details option allows details of the defined reports to be printed on an attached printer When running the ADC version of the ADS Builder access to the Print options is only available if the ADS Print Module and Spooler are installed To initiate a print of the defined reports select the Print report details option by either cursoring to the option and pressing the Enter key or by pressing the P key Terminal Printer Dir Reports PROD_REP 43 Print report details from Jj to ADS BUILDER COIT C0M2 C0M1 NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Current System Name Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate DRILL 1 00 s 1 00 s Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN New report Modify report Report paint Delete report Copy report List report Print report details A prompt is displayed at the bottom of the screen Print re
189. ed to the menu page Screen Paint GFK 0641 Screen painting refers to the information that you put on the screen The actual contents of a screen may be changed by using the Screen Paint menu selection To initiate a screen paint select the Screen Paint menu option either by cursoring to the desired option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the S key The ADS Builder will prompt you for the number of the screen to be painted Only existing screens may be painted the New screen menu option must be used in order to create a new screen As an example of painting a screen assume that you wish to paint screen 50 REGS Type the screen number 50 into the prompt field ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT CON2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Screens ADS Print Destination STDPRN REGS C 50 ns New screen i Modify screen Delete screen Copy screen Key assignments List screens Print screen details Enter the number of the screen to paint JJ Chapter 4 ScreenOperations 4 7 When you press the Enter key the ADS Builder enters the screen report editor see Section 4 Screen Report Editing for details on editing a screen You may now make any desired modifications to the screen The following screen is an example of screen painting R05016 R05017 R05018 ROSO19 ROSOZO 999999 999999
190. ee eens 3 43 Delete a Translation 2 0 5 2 es acts be ote wate gl ele Lees eas 3 44 View Current Entries errs daner tiayan eee eens 3 45 List Translations 3 c0s 00 ess pees bene gece weed peek eee eee ee 3 46 Print Translations de 8 se wide Soe a See take A A ba as 3 47 Error Messages for Translation Tables 0 000 c eee eee 3 48 Section 5 Engineering Units Conversion Table 3 49 New Unit Conversion 0 cece cee ee eee eens 3 50 Names s iesea a ea e abo Wash tee baa A ta pea a aac 3 50 Engineering Units Conversion Equation 20 ee eee 3 50 Specify Data Types isis a iiei aot Ea wae ede asin ee E Eai 3 51 Input Data ly pe sitesi wnat ves mid ge peis to Banden a catia Oni 3 52 Output Data Ty Pe seis io idee ce Pewee heel hd EEE EHS heel deg WL 3 52 Modify a Unit Conversion 00 666 c cece 3 53 Delete a Unit Conversion 0 cece eee eee 3 54 View Current Entries 00 eee eee eee 3 55 List Unit Conversion sees rebier sicari ery te noek sitt iaei Reb ee 3 56 Print Unit Conversions 0 cece eee eens 3 57 Error Messages for Engineering Units Conversion Table 3 58 Section 6 Lookup Table coc iss taveeadeneaaiess cee eScas 3 59 New Lookup Table Entry siester renni es E EEEE E Ee 3 60 Modify a Lookup Table Entry 0 0 0 66 3 65 Delete a Lookup Table Entry 0 6 6 3 66 View Current Entries no essnee tape eee eens 3 68 List LOOKUPS mer
191. ee tie es Ra ddan eS PEE hat 8 27 Table 8 6 Screen Commands 0 tesiri nitid Erid annetd aa d apad nena 8 27 Table 8 7 Alarm Page Commands 6c ccc annaran erraren 8 27 Table 8 8 Alarm Source Related Commands 000 c cece eee eee eens 8 28 Table 8 9 Option Module Access Commands 0000 c cece eee eee eee e eee 8 28 Table 8 10 Dynamic Object Related Commands 6 6 nee eens 8 28 Table 8 11 Miscellaneous Commands 60 000 c ccc eee eee nena 8 28 Table 14 1 Key Functions for System Execution 0 0 0 6660s 14 1 Table A 1 Cursor Keys Supported by Screen Report Editor 0 cee eee A 8 Table A 2 Key Functions for System Building 6 606 A 9 GFK 0641C CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual xv March 1994 Chapter 1 ADS Main Menu When the ADS development environment is loaded onto the ADC module and the module is either soft reset or the rack the module resides in is power cycled or the Series 90 70 PLC main rack containing the CPU module is power cycled the ADS menu screen is displayed The ADS menu screen allows you to switch between running the ADS Builder to create or modify a system and the ADS Executor to execute an existing system This screen also allows you to run any of the items which are currently installed Any of the items ADS Builder ADS Executor Fault Tables or PID may or may not be installed If an item is installed
192. een below is to be created for display on a GE Fanuc Mini OIT Touch Terminal TOUCH 37 Row J Col f Text Static Pressing the lt Touch Screen Grid gt key displays the touch point grid to aid in text placement on the screen TOUCH 37 Row J Col f Text Static 6 24 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 6 The touch point key values may be assigned from within the screen pointer if desired Press the lt Touch Screen Assignments gt key to begin assigning the touch point values Ri 999999 ENTER NEW VALUE The first field on the touch point grid is displayed in reverse video To move between touch points press the Enter key or key to move to the next touch point or the key to move to the previous touch point The values entered into the touch point fields represent the numeric key value to be returned when you actually touch the touch point Refer to Appendix B of the ADS User s Manual for the touch point values used for the GE Fanuc Mini OIT Touch and Nematron OptiTOUCH terminals Chapter 6 Screen Painter and Report Painter 6 25 When all required values have been added press the lt Save gt key If you decide to abandon the changes press the lt Quit gt key Note Touch Point assignments may also be made and viewed from the Screen Operations Touch Screen Assignments page Accessing the Screen Report Editor Help Screen Pressin
193. een number must be specified Note See Chapter 3 Section 7 Command Scripts for a list of error messages pertaining to specific commands GFK 0641 Chapter 4 ScreenOperations 4 17 Chapter GFK 0641 5 Report Operations This chapter describes the Report Operations submenu When the Report operations submenu is selected the following screen is displayed Another menu window is opened on the screen giving the additional options of New report Modify report Report paint Delete report Copy report List report Print report details Each of these options is described on the following pages ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Reports ADS Print Destination STDPRN Modify report Report paint Delete report Copy report List report Print report details 5 1 New Report When the New report option is selected a data entry window is opened containing six fields Report Name Report Number Start Row Rows Start Column and Columns ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Reports ADS Print Destination STDPRN PE Create Report Report Name Report Number Start Row Rous 23 Start Column
194. eflect the deletion Copy Report Anew report may be created by making a copy of an existing report During the copy process you may alter the report definition information report name and report size A unique report number must be assigned to the copied screen To initiate a report copy select the Copy Report menu option either by cursoring to that option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the C key The ADS Builder will prompt you for the number of the report from which the copy will be made For example assume that you want to create a new report which is a copy of existing report 43 PROD_REP Type the existing report number 43 into the prompt field When you press the Enter key a data entry window is opened which is identical to that used for creating a new report Assume that you want the new report to be named ALPHA and to be assigned report number 157 Type the new information into the appropriate fields Pressing the lt Save gt key at this point completes the creation form entry All fields not changed are copied from the creation form for report 43 You are then returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed on the status line indicating that the copy operation is complete Also the listing of report names is updated to reflect the addition of the new report List Report On the left hand side of the report a list of up to twenty two report names and their associated numbers are maintain
195. eft right as opposed to only positioning the cursor Corners are drawn automatically as you change the direction of movement by 90 degrees All other keys function as they do for normal text editing As an example of line drawing assume that you want to draw an irregular object beginning at the current cursor position First press the lt Draw toggle gt key to enable line drawing mode Note that the status area is updated to show that you are now in the Line mode instead of the original Text mode DRILL 50 Row Col Line Static GFK 0641 Chapter 6 Screen Painter and Report Painter 6 19 To draw the figure on the following screen press the key sequence IH LLLE L t LCF L AL BLICLEE DE LE LI Liz Lz 1 DRILL 50 Row A Col J Line Static When you have finished drawing exit the line drawing mode by again pressing the lt Draw toggle gt key The status line is updated to reflect the return to Text mode A third method for drawing lines which is useful only for regular shaped rectangles and straight lines is to draw a box around a selected region The box is drawn around the inside perimeter of the selected region so it is important to select the appropriate size region As an example of drawing a box around a select region assume that you want to draw a box around the block of text shown below Note that the cursor is initially shown one line above and one column to the left of the block of text this position w
196. egan with the letter C you could type that letter into the Data Source field prior to pressing the lt object list gt key The same window would be opened on the screen but this time only those data sources beginning with the letter C are listed The option of creating a new data source is also provided Depend ing uration s be shown w MEM R AIL AQI Create Dynamic Ob ject Name CART_DISPLAY Data Source C Additional Calc Display Format Display Value Plc Data Sources CART_LOAD ata Srce CONSTANT_SWP Data Srce 99999 PBL CONTROL_PROG Data Srce 99999 Z CONVYR_LS ata Srce Create Data Source The and keys can be used to scroll through the list of objects the object currently displayed in reverse video is called the current object Pressing the Enter key selects the current object for use the window is automatically closed when an entry is selected Pressing the lt Quit gt key closes the window without selecting any object The keys that are available when an object list window is open on the screen are summarized in the table below Key 7 L lt GOLD gt T lt GOLD gt J lt GOLD gt T lt GOLD gt B Enter lt Quit gt Function previousentry next entry previous page of entries next page of entries top of list bottom of list select current entry and close window close window with no entry selected Note Extensive context sensitive
197. elete dynamic object GOLD F8 GOLD KP8 GOLD F8 or GOLD KP8 Modify dynamic object F8 KP8 F8 or KP8 Copy dynamic object F9 KP9 F9 or KP9 Paste dynamic object GOLD F9 GOLD KP9 GOLD F9 or GOLD KP9 Touch screen grid F13 PF3 F13 or Delete Touch screen assignments GOLD F13 GOLD PF3 GOLD F13 or GOLD Delete t Num Lock must be set to OFF for 83 key keyboard The MPC CPC EIBM and VIBM terminal tables are used for the PC based Builder only CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 6 1 For those keyboards which only support function keys F1 through F10 F11 through F15 may be generated by pressing SHIFT F1 through SHIFT F5 2 Keys marked as x refer to the appropriate control key Ctrl key held down while simultaneously pressing the appropriate key 3 Keys marked as KPx refer to the appropriate numeric key on the numeric keypad normally found on the right hand side of the keyboard 4 Keys marked as GOLD xxx refer to the two key sequence of the GOLD key followed by the appropriate key 5 F11 F12 F13 and F14 are not available for use with the PC based Builder Section 2 Moving the Cursor Anumber of keys are supported in the screen report editor for positioning the cursor Each of these keys is summarized in the table below Table 6 2 Cursor Keys Supported by Screen Report Editor Key Resulting Action T Move cursor up one row within the current column J Move cursor do
198. en created a screen s function keys have no default assignments i e no action will occur when one of the keys is pressed if the system were executed at that point It is possible to create a system which makes no use of the function keys however if this were the case you would not be able to affect what is displayed on the terminal When assigning commands to function keys it is important to think about how the system will flow when executed If one screen overlays is pushed onto another its function key assignments are then the current active set Removing the overlaid screen popping restores the previous screen s function key assignments as the active set Each function key may be assigned to a command script or to any of the individual commands which make up a command script see the section on Command Scripts Multiple commands and or command scripts may be specified for each key through the function key assignment form multiple commands must be separated by a space character or by a semicolon The lt object list gt key can be used to obtain a list of existing command scripts or to create a new one To initiate the editing of a screen s function key assignments select the Key Assignments menu option either by cursoring to that option on the menu and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the K key The ADS Builder will prompt you for the number of the screen for which the function keys are to be edited Only function
199. ent System Name RAM DRILL Terminal CIBM C0M1 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM2 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Memory 133856 Bytes Startup Screen ADS Print Destination PC DRILL PRN Screens 26 Alarm pages 28 Reports 1 Alarm sources 2 Data sources 36 Save system to RAM Display formats 36 Archive system to PC Translations entries 28 Clear system Lookup table entries 26 Print destination Command scripts 30 GFK 0641 9 1 9 2 An ADS system consists of a series of files which store information regarding system parameters alarm definitions screens and reports At a minimum every system consists of at least two files lt system gt CFG system configuration parameters lt system gt ALM alarm definitions The CFG file contains everything defined for a system except the alarm definitions screens and reports This includes the system parameters system scan rate printer definition etc PLC data sources display formats translation table entries lookup table entries and command scripts The size of this file will vary with the number and type of objects which have been defined The ALM file contains all alarm source and alarm page definitions The size of this file will vary with the number of alarm sources and alarm pages which have been defined it will be created even if no alarm sources or alarm pages have been defined For every screen that you create a file lt system gt l
200. er in the currently selected foreground color Simulating Text Insert Mode Alltext entry in the report screen editor is accomplished in overwrite or replace mode a true insert mode is not provided To simulate insert mode you can select the text following the insertion point cut it and then paste it where it would fall if a text insert mode were directly supported Then the text to be inserted may be typed into the opened space GFK 0641 Chapter 6 Screen Painter and Report Painter 6 27 Error Messages for Screen Painter and Report Painter Error messages and their causes for screen and report editing are listed below Cannot paste double high over double wide normal line Cannot paste over double high wide line Cannot paste wide over double high normal line Static text of one character width may not be pasted onto a line of a different character width Cannot SELECT across different character widths A select operation cannot cross a line which is in a different character width than the one the SELECT operation began on Cannot set line 1 into double wide high mode select line 2 The target terminal does not allow line 1 to be selected as the bottom line of a double size line Color is NOT supported by system s output terminal The target terminal does not support color Line is already double wide The requested operation was rejected because the current line has already been set up for double wide Line is already in
201. erence Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Current value of PLC register SROOOO1 is 999999 Display Change value System Alarms of R1 Remove Display of System Alarms Key definitions AK1 PSHSCN 999 PLCSETI R1 AK2 AK3 AK4 AK5 PSHSCN 998 PSHALM 1 AK6 POPALM 1 AK7 AK8 AK9 AKLO EXIT AK11 AK12 AK13 AK14 AK15 Touch point Definitions 128 128 132 132 128 128 133 133 GFK 0641 Chapter 10 Print System Summary 10 EXIT 137 10 3 10 4 Screen Number EXIT Key 998 ALR_KYPD Start Row Start Column Image Background 1 End Row 54 End Column NORMAL BLACK Foreground Touch point Definitions 20 EE AATE et Fa t gt 10 ENTER definitions AK1 AK2 AK3 AK4 AK5 AK6 AK7 AK8 AK9 AK10 POPSCN 998 AK11 AK12 AK13 AK14 AK15 180 137 184 178 13 15 80 WHITE CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 13 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 Screen Number 999 NUM_KYPD Start Row Start Column Image Background 10 20 30 ois Ouse ee TIS dqs 3 Sisae Suse es eae Sue Soe Clear 7 8 9 4 gt 6 1 2 3 Cancel 0 Enter Key definitions AK1 AK2 AK3 AK4 AK5 AK6 AK7 AK8 AK9 AK10 POPSCN 999 AK11 AK12 AK13 AK14 AK15 Touch po Chapter 10 Print System Summary
202. erface Terminal IC600KD510 513 530 533 e MINI TBL Mini GE Fanuc Operator Interface Terminal monochrome only IC600KD515 TMINITBL Touch mini OIT monochrome only IC600KD516 e VT100 TBL VT100 compatible or superset terminal e MIBM TBL Monochrome IBM compatible personal computer running TERMF e CIBM TBL Color IBM compatible personal computer running TERMF TCOITTBL color OptiTOUCH screen terminal from Nematron e TMOITTBL monochrome OptiTOUCH screen terminal from Nematron LUDCO TBL Lucas Deeco ST 2200 Note Neither the ADS Menu Program the ADS Builder or the PID module may be run on the Mini OIT Only the execution of a system built using another type of terminal can be run on the Mini OIT When building a system you must be careful to create screens which are sized to fit within a 15 line by 80 character display when using a Mini OIT The valid settings for item 5 printer module are e ASCI TBL Generic ASCII character printer TTY TBL Generic ASCII Teletype character printer no form feed support e EPSON TBL Epson printer PCNEC TBL NEC printer e LA100 TBL DEC LA100 printer or compatible Specification of the TBL extension is optional the ADS menu program will automatically fill in the TBL extension for any of the entries if it is not specified The user selections of the above items system name terminal module and printer module are automatically saved to the file MENU
203. ess the Z_ key once to position the cursor on the rightmost field formatting characters before pressing the lt Start dynamic object gt key The status area is updated to indicate that a dynamic object is being defined The value of R100 is 99999 DRILL 50 Row 3 Col Text Dynamic def ining Chapter 7 Dynamic Objects 7 3 At this point press the Z_ key four times to cover the entire data field that you have specified by the group of five 9 s Note that the selected area is shown in reverse video The value of R100 is EBEE DRILL 50 Row 3 Col amp Text Dynamic def ining Pressing the lt End dynamic object gt key completes the selection of the area which the dynamic object is to cover Also at this point a data entry window is opened on the screen so that you can actually define the dynamic object Also note that the screen region for the dynamic object is shown in blinking reverse video The value of R100 is EEEE Create Dynamic Object Name Data Source Additional Calc Display Format Display Value 7 4 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Name Every dynamic object must be assigned a name unique from that of any other dynamic object defined on the current screen or report only The name can be from 1 to 12 characters long any alphanumeric character may be used in the name as well as the underscore _ character Note When the resu
204. etion was completed If you press the lt Quit gt key indicating that the translation table entry deletion should be canceled you will be returned to the menu page no message will be displayed to indicate that the deletion was canceled If you specify a translation table entry which does not currently exist you will be returned to the menu page with the message Invalid translation entry specified displayed on the status line 3 44 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 View Current Entries The ADS Builder provides a way for you to view all the existing translation table entries in a system one by one in alphabetical order To initiate the viewing of a system s translation table entries you must first select the View current entries menu option either by cursoring to the View current entries option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the V key As an example of Viewing Current Entries notice that two translation table entries are currently defined in the system BIAS and ONE_LHALE When the Enter key is pressed the form for the first translation table entry BIAS in the list is displayed along with a prompt on the status line giving you the choice of either viewing the next translation table entry in the list or quitting the view function ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT CON2 Default Scan Rate Printer COM1 Default Alarm
205. etting will be ignored when the system is executed When a report is executed all data sources animating dynamic objects on the report form are gathered once from the PLC If a data source is used to animate a dynamic object on a screen the defined scan rate is put into effect GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 15 3 16 Additional Calculation Often data retrieved from the PLC is not in the proper form for use by any part of the ADS system and may need to be converted to a usable format For example a counts value might need to be converted to engineering units prior to being used by the ADS system The Additional Calculation field provides a method for doing this In this field you can optionally specify one of four different types of calculations e lookup table entry e translation table entry e engineering units conversion table entry custom translation Only the custom translation calculation will be discussed in detail here for a discussion of lookup table entries translation table entries and engineering unit conversion table entries see Lookup Table Translation Table and Engineering Units Conversion Table later in this chapter An existing lookup table translation table or engineering units conversion table entry may be referenced Multiple calculations can be specified by separating each reference by a space output input data type matches must be maintained The lt object list gt key can be u
206. evice is at tached Possible values are 1 to 7 where 1 indicates not attached to any control program This number is always 0 for Series 90 30 Priv Lev Current privilege level of requesting device for accessing memory in the PLC CPU valid entries are 0 through 4 PLC_STATUS 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PLC State N Prg OEM Run IO Prg IO PLC IO PLC Con Ovr U chg prot SW SW Att flt flt chg chg Swp Swp PLC State Current State as opposed to switch settings or commanded state Possible values are 0 RUN_ENABLED 1 RUN_DISABLED 2 STOP_IO_DISABLED 3 CPU_STOP_FAULTED 4 CPU_LHALTED 5 CPU_SUSPENDED 6 STOP_IO_ENABLED NU Not used reserved for future expansion Prg chg Program changed flag 1 Program change 0 No program change 90 70 rel 2 X and later OEM prot OFM protected flag 1 OEM protection in effect 0 No OEM protection Run SW Front panel RUN STOP switch setting 1 RUN 0 STOP IO SW Front panel ENABLE DISABLE switch setting 1 Outputs Disabled 0 Outputs En abled Prg Att ProgrammerAttachment flag Shows whether or not there is a programmer attachment in the system 1 Programmer attachment found 0 No programmer attachment found IO flt I OFault Entry present flag 1 Fault entry in I O fault table 0 I O fault table is empty PLC flt PLC Fault Entry present flag 1 Fault entry in PLC fault table 0 PLC fault table is empty IO chg I OFault Entry changed flag 1 I O
207. ew unit conversion Modify a unit conversion Print unit conversions Press lt RETURN gt to list more entries else lt QUIT gt Pressing the Enter key at this point will display the remaining entries ADS BUILDER Current System Name Terminal COIT C0M2 Printer C0M1 Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Eng unit conversions EUC_25 EUC_26 EUC_2 EUC_28 DRILL Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination 1 00 s 1 00 s STDPRN Delete a unit conversion View current entries hl List unit conversions New unit conversion Modify a unit conversion Print unit conversions Press lt RETURN gt to list more entries else lt QUIT gt Pressing the lt Quit gt key exits the list operation The engineering units conversion table entry names currently displayed on the screen will remain displayed 3 56 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Print Unit Conversions The Print unit conversions option allows the details of the defined engineering units conversion table entries to be printed on an attached printer When running the ADC version of the ADS Builder access to the Print options is only available if both the ADS Print Module and the Spooler are installed To initiate a print of the defined engineering units conversion table entries select the Print unit conversions option either by cursoring to the op
208. ey or by pressing the D key The ADS Builder will prompt you for the name of the translation table entry to be deleted As indicated above only existing translation table entries which are not referenced by any other object in the system should be deleted For example assume that you want to delete the translation table entry ONE_HALF Type the desired translation table entry name ONE_HALF into the prompt field When the Enter key is pressed the form for the specified translation table entry is displayed on the screen along with a prompt on the status line asking you to either confirm the delete or Quit the operation ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COMZ Default Scan Rate Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Transl Delete a translation entry Name ONE_HALF ONE_HALF The variables used to perform the translation are described by the following function Output Value Ax Input Value B C A 0 500000 B 9 C 100 Specify Data Types Y N N Input Data Type NIL Output Data Type NIL Press lt RETURN gt to delete this translation table entry else lt QUIT gt If you press the Enter key at this point the translation table entry will be deleted from the system Upon deletion of the translation table entry you are returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed on the status line indicating that the del
209. f the key assignments table may be canceled with all modifications disregarded This is done by pressing the lt Quit gt key You will be returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed on the status line indicating that the key assignments were not updated CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Touch Screen Assignments Note This option will only appear if the terminal field on the Modify System Parameters data entry form is set to TMINI TCOIT or TMOIT When a terminal that supports touch points is being used as the target terminal for an ADS system it is necessary to setup touch point information for screens defined in ADS Touch points are defined so that they allow any keyboard characters to be returned from a touch point For instance a touch point may be defined to return a 1 or ENTER keystroke this allows screens to be defined which act as keypads Touch points also may return a function key keystroke Terminals which support touch points divide the screen into a grid of rectangles each rectangle acts as a touch point A Touch Mini OIT for example divides the screen into a grid of 4 rows and 10 columns providing 40 touch points To define the information returned by touch points select the Touch Screen Assignments option either by cursoring to that option on the menu and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the T key You will be prompted to en
210. fficient ways to use the PC based Builder Before using the ADC based Builder you should refer to the section under the heading Managing the Builder s Memory later in this chapter That discussion will also refer to the file README 401 which can be found in the PCOP ADS PCM directory of the hard disk on which you installed the ADS software Throughout this chapter comments specific to the IBM PC version will be added When either version of the Builder is first entered a copyright screen is displayed While this CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Referemce Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 screen is displayed in order to proceed with the Builder you must press the Enter key After the Enter key is pressed the following main menu screen will be displayed for the ADC version ADS BUILDER Current System Name RAM PUNCH Terminal CIBM COMZ Default Scan Rate Printer NULL Default Alarm Scan Rate Memory 128112 127904 Startup Screen ADS Print Destination PC PUNCH PRN 1 00 s 1 00 s Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts onf iguration operations Screen operations Alarm operations Report operations Load Save operations Print system summary Exit ecocoocoocoeoceo Generating new system To access the IBM PC based Builder issue the followin
211. fied as being the location within the loop control block To use the setpoint controller first select the required faceplate as the current faceplate then press F8 A small window is placed over part of the selected current faceplate and the soft keys are updated LOOP MONITOR 1 LOOP TANK_1 100 SETPOINT CONTROLLER 75 001 PSI 80 00 0 00 36 62 75 00 109 87 CURRENT a 3 2 a o Setpoint control mode selected While in setpoint control mode a value entered into the controller field is written to the PLCs loop control block as the new setpoint value To set a new value press the F5 key enter the required value into the setpoint controller s field and then press Return This causes the new value to be written to the PLC A message is displayed telling you that the setpoint has been modified A new setpoint value will appear in the setpoint field and the bar chart will change to reflect the new value Values may be continually entered Press the lt Quit gt key to get out of EDIT mode To exit the setpoint controller press lt Quit gt This will cause the window to be removed from the screen and the loop placed back into its normal mode of operation Loop Tuning Screen 16 18 The Loop Tuning Screen lets you view the behavior of a selected loop over a defined period of time that you specify thereby allowing the loop to be fine tuned In addition the key gain values can be adjusted for the l
212. field Note that the formula defined here is the same as defined for GFK 0641 Chapter 8 Alarm Operations 8 23 8 24 translation table entries In general if a given translation is to be used only once it should be defined in the alarm source as a custom translation If it is to be used multiple times it is better to define the actual translation only once as a translation table entry and then reference the entry as the additional calculation The format for defining a custom translation is A B C where the parentheses and commas are required parts of the format The range of data acceptable for each parameter is given in the table below Table 8 3 Data Range for a Custom Translation Minimum Maximum Parameter Value Value A 100000000 1000000000 B 100000000 1000000000 Cc 100000000 1000000000 1 Only 7 digits of precision 2 Maximum of 6 digits to right of decimal point For this example of specifying an additional calculation assume that you do not need to scale the data being retrieved from the PLC Since the desired setting is the default for the field pressing the Enter key completes the entry At this point the first Range field is selected next ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name OQVER_TEMP Source Data Type SIGNED WORD PLC Location AIS Scan Rate s or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Range D ction Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Actio
213. finition To delete irrevocably a loop definition press the F8 key A prompt will be displayed requesting the name or number of the loop to be deleted A loop selection menu that contains all of the currently existing loop names is also displayed See Modify a Loop Definition above for information on selecting a valid loop If a valid loop is specified the loop information will be displayed in a data entry window and you will be prompted to confirm the deletion of the loop If the loop deletion is confirmed the loop will be irreversibly deleted from the current list of loops The list of defined loops will be updated to reflect the change Save Loop Definitions to File Pressing the F9 key allows you to save the current set of loop definitions to a file PID PID will be displayed as the default name on the screen The loop definitions may be saved to a file of any name but the PID module only looks for certain files as it starts up If PID is called stand alone the file PID PID is loaded automatically For PID calls from an ADS system an attempt is made to load the lt system_name gt PID file If that fails the file PID PID will be loaded Loop Configuration Screen 16 10 The Loop Configuration screen allows you to set fundamental values that determine how a loop will operate Loop configuration parameters can only be changed if the Loop Definition has the User Configurable flag set to Y Regardless of the value of this
214. firm that you really do want to clear the system ADS BUILDER Current System Name PC MEMRY Terminal VT100 COMZ Default Scan Rate Printer NULL Default Alarm Scan Rate Memory 88416 Bytes Startup Screen ADS Print Destination PC DRILL PRN Screens 10 Alarm pages Reports Configuration operations Alarm sources Screen operations Data sources Alarm operations Display formats Report operations Translations entries Lookup table entries Print system summary Command scripts Exit fre you sure you want to CLEAR the system N i 9 10 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 9 By default the ADS Builder initializes this response to N to not clear the system If at this point you decide that the system should not be cleared press the Enter key to cancel the system clear operation If you decide that the system should be cleared press the Y key then the Enter key to initiate the system clear Note Be aware that once a system is cleared from the ADS Builder s working memory all changes made to the system since it was loaded will be lost and cannot be recovered As noted above clearing a system from the ADS Builder s working memory does not affect any system located on either the RAM or PC disk If you want to actually delete a system from either RAM or PC you must use the PCM programming software PCOP the Delete Files option on the
215. for the loop are obtained from the PLC and the loop tuning screen updated with the values Note that the time base for the trend chart is displayed in increments of 10 times the scan rate By default this means that the time base displays 0 10 20 50 This indicates that the trend chart is displaying the last 50 seconds worth of data from the loop To select a new time base for the trend press F7 Note The loop tuning does not need to be stopped for this operation When F7 is pressed you are prompted for a new scan rate value to be entered The allowed range of scan rates is 0 50 seconds to 60 seconds in 0 25 second increments Once the new scan rate has been entered press Return to save the scan rate or lt Quit gt to retain the existing rate A new scan rate will cause the time base for the trend chart to be updated to reflect the new rate For example if a scan rate of 20 Chapter 16 PID TemplatesModule 16 19 16 20 seconds is selected the time base will change to show 0 200 400 1000 This indicates that the trend chart now displays up to 1000 seconds worth of loop data Starting Loop Trending To begin gathering and displaying loop tuning data press the F8 key The screen image is updated in several ways data is now displayed the STOPPED message is changed to RUNNING the soft key for F8 is changed from START to STOP LOOP TUNING LOOP TANK_1 PROCESS Pressurizer Rate PY gt 25
216. g command at the DOS prompt ADSBUILD lt system_name gt lt system_path gt where lt system_name gt is a valid ADS system name 1 5 alphanumeric and underscore characters lt system_path gt is the optional complete path specification for where the ADS system may be found If the lt system_path gt specification is not provided the system will be loaded in a PCM compatible folder of the same name as the system beneath the ADS_PC directory the folder will automatically be created if it does not exist Note It is recommended that each system be kept in a separate PCM folder This will be done automatically by the system if you do not specify the lt system_path gt parameter Refer to Chapter 8 in the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual GFK 0499 for more details Note See Chapters 8 and 11 in the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual GFK 0499 for information on using the Operator Interface Products Menu to access the PC Based Builder GFK 0641 Chapter 2 Introduction to Using the ADS Builder 2 3 For the IBM PC based version the following main menu screen will be displayed ADS BUILDER Current System Name PUNCH Terminal CPC cCCONZ gt Default Scan Rate 1 88 s Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 88 s Dir ADS_PC PUNCH PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Dis
217. g of alarm source names is updated to reflect the addition of the new alarm source which for this example is OVER_TEMP_2 ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Alarm Sources ADS Print Destination STDPRN OVER_TEMP OVER_TEMP_2 Neu alarm source Modify an alarm source Delete an alarm source View current sources List sources Print sources Alarm source copied View Current Sources The ADS system allows you to view all the existing alarm sources in a system one at a time in alphabetical order To initiate the viewing of a system s alarm sources first select the View current sources menu option either by cursoring to that option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the V key In this example sequence two alarm sources are currently defined in the system OVER_TEMP and OVER_TEMP_2 When the Enter key is pressed the form for the first alarm source in the list OVER_TEMP is displayed along with a prompt on the status line giving you the choice of viewing the next alarm source in the list or of quitting the view function GFK 0641 Chapter 8 Alarm Operations 8 37 ADS BUILDER View an alarm source Name OQVER_TEMP Source Data Type SIGNED WORD PLC Location AIS Scan Rate or HH MM 55 CC Additional Calc Range 150 175 Action P
218. g the lt Help gt key while in the screen report editor will display a help screen which describes the key assignments for the appropriate terminal table Exiting the Screen Report Editor You can exit the screen report editor by pressing either the lt Save gt key or the lt Quit gt key Pressing either of these keys results in all changes being saved in the current system there is no way to cancel changes made to a screen other than exiting the Builder without saving the changes whereby ALL changes to the system since that last load save operation will be lost 6 26 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 6 Miscellaneous Hints Following are some miscellaneous hints and suggestions for accomplishing some tasks which are either not immediately obvious or are not directly supported by the ADS Builder Making a Colored Space on the Color OIT There are times when you may want to create a colored block of text for display on the GE Fanuc color OIT Normal text characters may be displayed in the chosen color by selecting the appropriate foreground color but the space character space bar is displayed in the background color not the foreground color as might be desired In order to produce a colored space first select the alternate character set and then press the right parenthesis key wherever a colored space is required This will result in the desired display of a blank charact
219. gineering units used If a valid loop is not located at the specified memory address or the engineering units are invalid erratic data will be displayed On the left hand side of the screen is a list of currently defined loops sorted alphabetically by name To create a loop definition press F6 A loop definition data entry window is then displayed LOOP SETUP Def ined Loops Create Loop Definition Loop Name B FLC Loop Nunber Process Name Group Name Loop Block Location PU SP Engineering Units Units Lower Bound PLC Lower Units Upper Bound PLC Upper CV Engineering Units Units Lower Bound PLC Lower Units Upper Bound PLC Upper User Configurable Y Manual Mode Y 1 CONFIG EMONITORSTUNE CREATE MODIFY DELETE SAVE FROEXIT To move between fields in the data entry window press the Return key to move to next field or use the and keys to move to the next and previous fields respectively The first field contains the name of the loop This is a name that you select and can be up to 12 characters long The loop name must be unique among the currently defined loops listed on the left side of the screen If the entered name is not unique an error will be reported The loop name should convey some information about the loop allowing it to be easily identified The second field contains the loop number The loop number must also be unique Ifa duplicate number is entered an error will be
220. gnificant bit to the most significant bit The total number of bits specified must be less than or equal to the number of bits implied by the source data type Some examples are given below which should help clarify the grammar GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 13 Assume that you wish to access a WORD of data which is located across the upper byte of R1 low byte of WORD and the lower byte of R2 high byte of WORD This could be accomplished by specifying a source location of R1 8 15 R2 0 7 Assume that there are a set of 16 boolean flags in PLC word memory location AI6 and you want to access the sixth flag beginning with the least significant bit bit b5 For this example assume that you have already specified a source data type of STATE The source location would be specified as AI6 5 Assume that you are only interested in the lower order twelve bits of PLC word memory location AQ2 it is possible that the upper four bits are not zero Also assume that you have already specified a source data type of WORD The source location would be specified as AQ2 0 12 Assume that you wish to compose a word value where bit b0 is from M1 bit b1 from 15 bit b2 is from bit b3 of R123 bits b3 b5 are from bits b13 through b15 of R123 and bit b6 is from T7 In this case you have already specified a source data type of WORD The source location would be specified as M1 15 R123 3 13 15 T7 Assume that you wish to
221. hanges a system save or system archive operation must be executed GFK 0641 Chapter 9 Load Save Operations 9 5 2 Section 2 Save System to RAM Disk 9 6 The system currently loaded in the ADS Builder may be stored to the ADCs RAM disk hard disk for the PC Based Builder whether or not it was originally loaded from that disk To initiate the saving of the system currently loaded in the ADS Builder to RAM you must first select the Save System to RAM menu option either by cursoring to that option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the S key ADS BUILDER Current System Name PC MEMRY Terminal VT100 Printer Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Lookup table entries Command scripts COM2 NULL Memory 133712 Bytes 10 Default Scan Rate 25 S Default Alarm Scan Rate 25 S Startup Screen ADS Print Destination PC DRILL PRN Load system Archive system to PC Clear system Print destination CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 9 When the Enter key is pressed the ADS Builder immediately begins saving the currently loaded system to the RAM disk The first file saved is the system parameters configuration file A message is displayed on the prompt message line indicating that the system is currently saving the system configuration in file
222. haracter set where each character occupies four screen rows and four screen columns The COIT MOIT TCOIT and TMOIT terminal tables do NOT directly support the Quad Size character set However a system which contains screens simulating those characters may be found on your computer s hard disk in the ADS_PC DEMO PCM folder and is called QUAD Note Some of the procedures described here are explained in detail later in this document The QUAD system contains several screens in which you will find the simulated Quad Size characters Each character is surrounded by a rectangle special symbols are labeled as to what they represent The text inside the rectangle may be cut and then pasted on other screens DO NOT forget to paste the character back on its screen after you cut it To use the QUAD system you should follow the steps outlined below Note that to use it you must start with it 1 Create a new folder using the MS DOS MD command ADS_PC system gt PCM where lt system gt is a valid system name you wish to use 2 Execute the MS DOS command COPY ADS_PC DEMO PCM QUAD ADS_PC lt system gt PCM to copy the QUAD system into your new folder 3 Execute the PC Builder specifying QUAD as the system name and ADS_PC lt system gt PCM as the path 4 Change the name of the system from QUAD to lt system gt in the Modify system parameters form under Configuration operations
223. haracter set GOLD F4 GOLD KP4 Alt F4 Normal Alternate Set Character Set 2 Character Set 3 Double wide GOLD W GOLD W Alt W Double size GOLD D GOLD D Alt D Draw toggle non rectangular objects or lines GOLD F5 GOLD KP5 Alt F5 Draw area rectangular and straight lines F5 KP5 F5 Delete line F14 PF4 End Undelete line GOLD F14 GOLD PF4 GOLD End Select toggle F3 KP3 F3 Cut area F6 KP6 F6 Paste area GOLD F6 GOLD KP6 Alt F6 Startdynamic predefinedobject GOLD F7 GOLD KP7 Alt F7 End dynamic object F7 KP7 F7 End predefined objects GOLD F2 GOLD KP2 Alt F2 Delete dynamic object GOLD F8 GOLD KP8 Alt F8 Modify dynamic object F8 KP8 F8 Copy dynamic object F9 KP9 F9 Paste dynamic object GOLD F9 GOLD KP9 Alt F9 Touch screen grid F13 PF3 Delete Touch screen assignments GOLD F13 GOLD PF3 GOLD Delete t Num Lock must be set to OFF for 83 key keyboard F11 and F12 keys on the enhanced AT and PS 2style keyboards cannot be used use SHIFT F1 and SHIFT F2 The MPC CPC EIBM and VIBM terminal tables are used for the PC based Builder only 1 Keys marked as Alt x refer to the appropriate alternate key Alt key held down while simultaneously pressing the appropriate key 2 Keys marked as x refer to the appropriate control key Ctrl key held down while simultaneously pressing the appropriate key 3 Keys marked as GOLD xxx refer to the two key sequence of the GOLD key followed by the appropriate key GFK 0641 Chapter 2 Introduction to Using the ADS
224. he ADS Builder sends the information to the Print Destination specified using the Print Destination option see Load Save Operations Chapter 9 3 22 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Data source information is formatted as shown in the following examples Data Source Q1_ OVER Data Type STATE Location 01 0 Scan Rate Additional Calc 100 0 0 Data Source T_SEC Data Type STATE Location S5 Scan Rate 00 00 00 25 Additional Calc Data Source STAT_BITS Data Type WORD Location PLC_STATUS 12 15 Scan Rate Additional Calc Error Messages for PLC Data Sources GFK 0641 Error messages and their causes for PLC Data Sources are listed below alphabetically Bit specifications not allowed on location Bit specification is not allowed for the specified source location Conversion error invalid time format entered The scan rate must be specified either as or HH MM SS CC Data source could not be deleted A data source currently referenced on a screen or report may not be deleted ENTRY ERROR Data source name not unique Two data sources cannot have the same name ENTRY ERROR Invalid Additional calculation specified The referenced additional calculation does not exist ENTRY ERROR No data source name A new name must be specified Error parsing bit specification A bit offset has been specified that exceeds the number of bits provided for by the source
225. he result will retain its decimal precision To indicate that Data Types are to be specified enter Y in the Specify Data Types field If N is entered into the field the next two fields Input and Output Data Type are skipped Input Data Type If the Specify Data Type flag has been set to Y the Input Data Type is used to indicate the data type of values passed to the translation table entry Valid data types are Table 3 15 Input Data Types Supported for Translation Tables Data Type Size Bits Value Range State 1 OFE ON Byte 8 0 to 255 Word 16 0 to 65535 Signed Word 16 32768 to 32767 Longword 32 0t0 4294967295 Signed Longword 32 2147483648 to 2147483647 Floating Point 32 999999999 9 to 9999999999 99 Only 7 digits of precision If the Specify Data Type flag has been set to N the Input Data Type field will be set to NIL Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 41 3 42 Output Data Type If the Specify Data Type flag has been set to Y the Output Data Type is used to indicate the data type that the input value is to be converted to prior to the translation equation being applied This data type becomes the output data type of the translation table entry As an example of data type conversion assume that you want to store floating point values as word values in the PLC This might be done by multiplying the floating point value by 100 prior to storage in the PLC and then dividing the value by 100 after s
226. he value scaled to the range 0 to 100 A custom translation which would accomplish this is 25 200 0 The needed translation is typed into the Additional Calculation field ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Data Sources ADS Print Destination STDPRN rs lew data source a Create a data source Name PARTS_COUNT Source Data Type Source Location Scan Rate 00 00 01 50 or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc 25 200 0 When you press the Enter key at this point it completes not only the entry of the Additional Calculation field but also completes the entry of the New data source An informative message is displayed on the status line indicating the completion of the data source creation Note that the New data source which has just been completed PARTS_COUNT is now listed in the status area of the screen left hand side as an available data source ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0MZ Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Data Sources ADS Print Destination STDPRN PARTS_COUNT Modify a data source Delete a data source View current sources rsion List sources Print sources rs ew data source e Data source added to system Cha
227. hich cause some event to occur within the system are summarized in the following groups of tables A command script see Command Script later in this chapter may also be referenced The lt object list gt key may be used to obtain a list of existing command scripts or to create a new one See Section 7 Command Scripts later in this chapter for details on individual commands Table 3 6 Get PLC Data Action Description PLCGETB loc Get a STATE value from location loc PLCGETBY loc Get a BYTE value from location loc PLCGETW loc Get an UNSIGNED WORD value from location loc PLCGETI loc Get a SIGNED WORD value from location loc PLCGETL lod Get an UNSIGNED LONGWORD value from location loc PLCGETS lod Get a SIGNED LONGWORD value from location loc PLCGETF lod Get a FLOATING POINT value from location loc 1 The syntax for specifying the loc reference is the same as for specifying a PLC data source location refer to PLC Data Sources for details except that the references must be consecutive within the same PLC memory type For example PLCGETW R1 and PLCGETW R1 1 9 are valid but PLCGETW R1 1 R2 5 9 and PLCGETW R1 0 14 Q1 are not Table 3 7 Set PLC Data Action Description PLCSETB v2 p3 c4 mn5 mx gt Set location 1 to STATE value v or prompt if no v PLCSETBY 1 v2 p3 c4 mn gt mx gt Set location 1 to UNSIGNED BYTE value v or prompt if no v PLCSETW IL v2 p3 c4 mn gt mx gt Set location 1
228. hin the PLC data source or alarm source creation menu or from within the Screen painter when creating a dynamic object In order to access the Lookup table submenu first cursor to the Lookup table selection on the menu When the Enter key is pressed the submenu for this option is accessed Another menu window is opened on the screen giving the additional options of New lookup table entry Modify a lookup table entry Delete a lookup table entry View current entries e List lookups e Print lookups Each of these options is described in the pages which follow ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Lookup Table ADS Print Destination STDPRN Modify a lookup table entry Delete a lookup table entry View current entries List lookups Print lookups ew lookup table entry GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 59 Notice that the status information formerly displayed along the left hand side of the screen has been replaced with a heading Lookup Table As lookup table entries are created a list of those entries will be maintained in this area New Lookup Table Entry When the New lookup table entry option is selected a data entry window opens with five fields which may be set as required Name Input data type Output data type Input range and O
229. ia Leech gowiasad peek ea als pee Raa Yee eee sold aaa 3 69 Print Lookups soere titenp Se wale cer tHe Gene Bo ewes eo Eee haw Es 4 3 70 Error Messages for Lookup Table 2 2 2 0 cece eee 3 71 Section 7 Command Scripts 0 ccc cee cee e ee eens 3 72 New Script eck ceitged Me dele horiee ne aE nE ate hee Ue held hewn 3 73 Moditya Script s reio eega enean alte j AA ea EEE R G 3 82 Delete a Serpii 00 250 leeks ies Cae eh ks Sashes 3 83 View Current Scripts s ane E EAA A tee oo boats ed EENS 3 84 List Command Scripts soseri rei e eee eee 3 86 Print Command Scripts e eenia POREDE TE KOENE TE 3 87 Error Messages for Command Scripts 6c cece eee eee 3 88 GFK 0641C CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual viii March 1994 Contents Chapter 4 Screen Operations a s ase wanes wid wees tae bs ee Reece 4 1 New SCHeOn ciate ay debi tee es E anaes Ba nae E Manna ote Wena ace aia gs 4 2 Modify Ser s ere oie creole dy ae a Silt phot hee Eee eked wees 4 7 Sereemm Paint Ses BA ANY itl MEA Boe AE Sols MeL AO a tal oR os Sa 4 7 Delete Screens x0i scistsieinnctsesd i gas na n s wate E yaoi a KESAS 4 8 Copy Screen e iria A E EEE E eke E E E EE E E S 4 9 List Ser ns ordu sae elk emit Wade eke adam a cantly ii Eni a 4 10 Key Assignments aeos oeeie ar a A EEE E 4 11 Touch Screen Assignments 0 66 60 4 13 Print Screen Details sossar rsi cake eae ka eee nas wah eae seals aa 4 14 Error Messages for
230. ic objects on the same screen or report may not have the same name Failed to match input data type for XXXX The data type defined in the specified data source does not match the input data type of additional calculation or display format XXXX String data type is not valid for graphs A lookup table entry referenced either in the data source or in the additional calculation field specified an output data type of STRING the STRING data type may not be used with bar charts or trend graphs Trend graphs must be at least 2 rows high A trend graph may not consist of only a single row Chapter 7 Dynamic Objects 7 17 Chapter 8 Alarm Operations Section 1 Introduction to Using Alarms This chapter describes the Alarm operations submenu When the alarm operations submenu is selected the following screen is displayed Another menu window is opened on the screen giving the additional options of New alarm page Modify an alarm page Delete an alarm page View alarm pages List pages Print page details Alarm sources Each option is described in this section In most cases only the initial screen will be shown for each submenu since the general format for each one is similar Each of the options from each submenu will be described in the text Any unique screens will also be shown GFK 0641 8 1 8 2 BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT CCONM2 3 Default Scan Rate Printer C0M1 Default
231. ich the alarm is sent The field is optional if used the text may consist of from 1 to 40 printable ASCII characters Continuing with our example assume that the text string Boiler temperature is dangerously high is to be displayed when the alarm condition is detected Type the text string into the Text field GFK 0641 Chapter 8 Alarm Operations 8 29 8 30 ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name OVER_TEMP Source Data Type SIGNED WORD PLC Location AIS Scan Rate or HH MM 55 CC Additional Calc Range 150 175 Action pshalm 34 WSeamsboiler temperature is dangerously hight Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp N Latched N Notify N Auto ack N Output text to following alarm pages To complete the text entry press the Enter key Note that the second Range field is selected next You may define additional alarm triggers or press the Enter key to skip over the remaining alarm trigger fields Log to Printer The Log to Printer field is used to indicate whether the text defined in the Text field above along with the alarm s timestamp if requested should be displayed on the printer The default setting is to NOT log the alarm to the printer Pressing the Enter key with the fourth Text field selected in turn selects the Log to Printer field ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name OQVER_TEMP Source Data Type SIGNED WORD P
232. identify the various screens Instead the screen number see below serves that function As a result the ADS system does NOT enforce uniqueness between screen names A name may be from one to eight alphanumeric and underscore _ characters and is NOT case sensitive Assume that you want to create a screen with the name REGS Type the desired name in this example REGS into the Screen Name field as shown on the following screen Terminal Printer Dir Screens 4 2 ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL COIT COM2 COM1 NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Default Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s 1 00 s STDPRN a 1 Create Screen Screen Name Screen Number Start Row 1 Start Column 1 Image N Foreground WHITE Background BLACK CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 Rows Columns 80 Norm Rev Trans 23 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 To complete the Screen Name entry press the Enter key Note that in addition to completing this entry the Screen Number field is selected next ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Screens ADS Print Destination STDPRN Create Screen Screen Name Screen Number Start Row Start Column Image Foreground
233. ield is selected next with an area below it highlighted by reverse video which is where you will enter the appropriate action to be taken for the specified range Actions Which Control the Appearance of an Object As stated above actions are paired with a given range with a maximum of 10 range action pairs being supported Also a command script may be referenced Actions indicate what is to happen to the object against which the display format is applied Multiple actions may be specified separated by a semicolon or a space Two basic categories of actions are supported actions which control the appearance of an object e g move an object change an object s color etc and actions which cause some event to occur in the system e g display a new screen on the terminal change a value in the PLC etc Multiple actions may all come from within the same category or may come from both categories The first category of actions actions which control the appearance of an object is summarized in the following table CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Table 3 5 Actions Which Control Appearance of an Object Action Description INVISIBLE Make the object invisible NORMAL Display the object with normal default video attributes BOLD Display the object with the bold video attribute REVERSE Display the object with the reverse video attribute BLINK Display the ob
234. iew current formats List formats Print formats ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Display Formats ADS Print Destination STDPRN Modify a display format E Delete a display format View current formats on List formats Print formats ew display format Note that the status information formerly displayed along the left hand side of the screen has been replaced with a heading Display Formats As display formats are created a list of those formats will be maintained in this area New Display Format When the New display format option is selected a data entry window is opened containing four fields which may be set Name Data Type Range and Action 3 24 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Name Every display format must be given a name This name must be unique with regards to display format names but does not need to be unique from all other names in the ADS system for example a PLC data source might be named VALUE and a display format might also be named VALUE A name may be from one to twelve alphanumeric and underscore _ characters and is NOT case sensitive As an example of assigning a name to a display format assume that you want to create a display format with the name NEG_POS Type the name which you
235. ill be the upper left corner of the box 12345678 12345678 12345678 DRILL 50 Row Col Text Static 6 20 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 6 Next press the lt Select gt key to initiate the selection of a region Press the key nine times and the key four times to select the desired region Note that this region is two rows and two columns larger than the text around which the box is to be drawn 12345678 12345678 12345678 DRILL 50 Row Col Text Static After the region has been selected press the lt Draw area gt key to complete the operation 12345678 12345678 12345678 DRILL 50 Row Col Text Static The video attributes and foreground color may be selected for lines in the same manner as for any other characters Chapter 6 Screen Painter and Report Painter 6 21 6 Section 10 Cut and Paste Cutting a Region A previously selected region may be cut from the screen by pressing the lt Cut area gt key The cut region is saved in a buffer for pasting later if required Pasting refers to the process of inserting a previously cut region anywhere on a screen at a later time As an example of cutting a region and saving in a buffer assume that you want to cut the area shown below The region to be cut is in reverse video and has already been selected 12345665 123456 5 12345643 DRILL 50 Row 3 Col Text Static
236. ing Screen 16 14 The Loop Monitoring Screen provides a mechanism for viewing the behavior of selected loops in real time as well as controlling the loop if allowed in the loop setup Regardless of the loop setup you can always select and monitor loops The Loop Monitoring Screen is accessed from all other screens by pressing the F3 key The Loop Monitoring Screen consists of four loop faceplates which display the current PV and SP values as bar charts that are scaled from 0 to 100 of value In addition each faceplate displays the current values of PV SP and CV scaled in their respective engineering units In addition options are available which allow you if the loop setup permits it to set the loop into manual mode in which the CV value can be controlled directly and to adjust the setpoint value LOOP MONITOR 2 3 CURRENT CONFIG TUNE SELECT ACURRENTIMIANUAL SSETPNT d MEXIT Selecting the Current Faceplate At any one time one of the loop faceplates is identified as the CURRENT faceplate The current faceplate is the faceplate that is the target of the loop monitor screen s operations Note that loop monitoring continues regardless of whether or not a faceplate is selected as being current the bar charts and values continue to be updated on the screen To select the current faceplate press F6 and enter a number from 1 to 4 at the prompt The selected faceplate will then be identified as the current facepla
237. ing function Output Value Ax Input Value B C A B o c 100 Specify Data Types Y N N Input Data Type NIL Output Data Type NIL You can now proceed to change any of the fields except the Name field Pressing the Enter key with the last field selected or pressing the lt Save gt key from any field will complete the modification You are returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed on the status line indicating that the modification was completed If you want to cancel the modification disregarding any changes that have been made press the lt Quit gt key If this is done an informative message is displayed on the status line indicating that no changes were made to the translation table entry If you should specify a translation table entry which does not currently exist you will be returned to the menu page with the message Invalid translation entry specified displayed on the status line GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 43 Delete a Translation A translation table entry may be irrecoverably removed from a system by deleting it Note You should exercise caution to not delete a translation table entry referenced by a dynamic object on any screen or report in the system To initiate a translation table entry deletion you must first select the Delete a translation menu option either by cursoring to the Delete a translation option and then pressing the Enter k
238. ing the alarm source may be changed except its name Changing the name of an alarm source requires you to first delete it and then recreate it with the new name To initiate an alarm source modification first select the Modify an alarm source menu option either by cursoring to that option on the menu and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the M key The ADS Builder will prompt the user for the name of the alarm source to be modified Only existing alarm sources may be modified the New alarm source menu option must be used in order to create a new alarm source In the following example assume that you want to modify the alarm source OVER_TEMP Type the alarm source name into the prompt field ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Alarm Sources ADS Print Destination STDPRN OVER_TEMP ns New alarm source Delete an alarm source Copy an alarm source View current sources List sources Print sources Enter the name of the alarm source to edit TD When the Enter key is pressed the form for the specified alarm source is displayed with the Source Data Type field initially selected You can now proceed to change any of the fields except the Name field Pressing the Enter key with the tenth Output Text to Alarm Page s field selected or pressing the lt Save gt
239. inter device The HELP command is used to access a help file produced in conjunction with the operator interface system The TTDUMP command is used to output an ASCII version of the current terminal display to the attached printer device The REFRSH command is used to completely repaint the terminal display This command is needed only when there has been a problem with the terminal such as loss of power to the terminal terminal only not the PLC disconnected cable etc The PORT command is used to output a text string to a specified port on the ADC module Both printable and non printable characters can be specified Printable characters are enclosed in quotes non printable characters are specified one at a time by putting their decimal ASCII see Appendix B for a list of ASCII codes code value in brackets you would also use brackets to specify a double quote character A total of 19 characters can be specified For example PORTW 1 ABC 13 13 10 0 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 This command can be used for such things as sending an initialization sequence to an attached printer The EXIT command is used to terminate the execution of the ADS operator interface system In addition other command scripts may be entered as a valid command This causes the command script to execute the named script In this way a potentially unlimited number of commands may
240. ion lt bit offset gt is the upper limit of a range of bits lt bit offset gt indicates a further bit position and lt PLC memory reference gt indicates that multiple locations can be defined Source locations are evaluated left to right building up the required data from the least significant bit to the most significant bit The total number of bits specified must be less than or equal to the number of bits implied by the source data type Some examples are given below which should help clarify the grammar Assume that you wish to access a WORD of data which is located across the upper byte of R1 low byte of WORD and the lower byte of R2 high byte of WORD This could be accomplished by specifying a source location of R1 8 15 R2 0 7 GFK 0641 Chapter 8 Alarm Operations 8 21 Assume that there are a set of 16 boolean flags in PLC word memory location AI6 and you want to access the sixth flag beginning with the least significant bit bit b5 For this example assume that you have already specified a source data type of STATE The source location would be specified as AI6 5 Assume that you are only interested in the lower order twelve bits of PLC word memory location AQ2 it is possible that the upper four bits are not zero Also assume that you have already specified a source data type of WORD The source location would be specified as AQ2 0 12 Assume that you wish to compose a word value where bit b0 is from M1
241. ion is selected a data entry window is opened containing eight fields which you can fill in These fields are Name the two input value fields Input value high and Input value low the two output value fields Output value high and Output value low Specify Data Types Input Data Type and Output Data Type A discussion of each field follows ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Eng u Create an E U C entry Nane M Input value low 0 Output value low Input value high O Output value high Specify Data Types Y N N Input Data Type NIL Output Data Type NIL Name Every engineering units conversion table entry must be given a name This name must be unique with regards to engineering units conversion table translation table and lookup table entry names but does not need to be unique from all other names in the ADS system For example a PLC data source might be named PRESSURE and an engineering units conversion table entry might also be named PRESSURE A name may be from one to twelve alphanumeric and underscore characters and is NOT case sensitive For example assume that you want to create an engineering units conversion table entry with the name PERCENT Type the name PERCENT into the Name field To complete the entry press the Enter key Note that after you press the Enter key to co
242. ionality CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Installing the PID module without the Loop Setup Screen will save approximately 25K bytes of internal memory on the ADC module This may prove to be useful for systems which have been completely developed and are in critical memory situations For more information on installing the PID module see Sections 4 an 5 in Chapter 7 ADS Setup Utility in the ADS User s Manual GFK 0499 Note This installation option is only available in the Execute Only ADS environment If you try to access the Setup Screen when the PID module is installed without the Setup Screen the following screen will be displayed LOOP SETUP SETUP FUNCTIONALITY IS UNAVAILABLE CONFIG EMON I TORE TUNE EXIT If the PID module has been installed with the PID module and you try to access the Setup Screen the following screen will be displayed and the functionality described below will be available LOOP SETUP Def ined Loops M CONFIG EMONITORETUNE 5 ACREATE MODIFY SDELETE gSAUE M XIT GFK 0641 Chapter 16 PID TemplatesModule 16 5 16 6 The PID Setup Screen provides four basic functions Create a loop definition e Modify a loop definition Delete a loop Definition Save loop definitions to file Create a Loop Definition Note Prior to creating a loop definition you need to know the address of the PID Loop in PLC memory and the required en
243. is example only R1 is referenced since the data type WORD requires sixteen bits of storage and each R reference is sixteen bits in size To complete the entry press the Enter key Note that the next field Scan Rate is selected next Not all source locations can be specified as simply as in the example above At times you may only be interested in part of the data stored in a PLC memory location In other cases you may need to construct a source location for non consecutive bits of storage in the PLC Instill other cases you may only be interested in a subset of a group of bits of storage in a PLC To support those situations the following more complicated grammar is supported lt bit reference lt reference subset gt lt PLC memory reference subset gt lt Source location gt lt PLC memory reference gt 0 lt PLC memory reference gt lt bit offset gt lt bit offset gt lt bit reference gt 0 lt bit reference gt lt PLC memory gt lt reference gt lt modifier gt reference where lt PLC memory gt lt reference gt and lt modifier gt are as defined above lt bit offset gt is a starting bit position within this location lt bit offset gt is the upper limit of a range of bits lt bit offset gt indicates a further bit position and lt PLC memory reference gt indicates that multiple locations can be defined Source locations are evaluated left to right building up the required data from the least si
244. isplay format which does not currently exist the user will be returned to the menu page with the message Invalid display format specified displayed on the status line Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 33 View Current Formats 3 34 The ADS system allows you to view all the existing display formats in a system one by one in alphabetical order To initiate viewing a system s display formats first select the View current format menu option either by cursoring to the desired option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the IbV key ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT CO0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Display Formats ADS Print Destination STDPRN LED Modify a display format I Delete a display format on List formats NEG_POS Neu display format Print formats In this example sequence two display formats named LED and NEG_POS are currently defined in the system When the Enter key is pressed the form for the first display format is displayed LED along with a prompt on the status line giving the user the choice of viewing the next display format in the list or of quitting the view function ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate View a display format Name LED Data Type STATE Range Action OFF REVERSE ON NORMAL P
245. isplay formats Translations entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Default Scan Rate 25 8 Default Alarm Scan Rate 25 S Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Conf iguration operations Screen operations Alarm operations Report operations Load Save operations Print system summary Terminal Exit CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Chapter GFK 0641 13 Options PID The Options PID menu option gives you the ability to configure your PID module information without needing to use the PID option module s built in setup screen In addition you may indicate which loops are to be initially selected when the PID module is first executed on the ADC module Note that you must select and install the PID option module onto the ADC module in order to use it ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI Printer Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts lt STDIO CNULL gt Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM PNOrPUMWOrRW Default Scan Rate 08s Default Alarm Scan Rate 58s Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Configuration operations Screen operations Alarm operations Report operations Load Save operations Print system summary Terninal Exit 13 1 To select the O
246. isplayed on the screen will remain displayed 3 46 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Print Translations The Print translation option allows the details of the defined translation tables to be printed on an attached printer When running the ADC version of the ADS Builder access to the Print options is only available if the ADS Print Module and Spooler are installed To initiate a print of the defined translation table entries select the Print translations option by either cursoring to the option and pressing the Enter key or by pressing the P key Terminal Printer Dir ADS BUILDER COIT NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Translations TRANS_01 TRANS_02 TRANS_03 TRANS_04 TRANS_05 TRANS_06 TRANS_07 TRANS_08 TRANS_09 TRANS_10 TRANS_11 TRANS_12 Current System Name COM2 COM1 TRANS_13 TRANS_14 TRANS_15 TRANS_16 TRANS_17 TRANS_18 TRANS_19 TRANS_20 TRANS_21 TRANS_22 TRANS_23 TRANS_24 DRILL Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination 1 00 s 1 00 s STDPRN Delete a translation View current entries rsion List translations Print translations New translation Modify a translation Print translation tables from J to A prompt is displayed at the bottom of the screen Print translation tables from HHHHHHHEEEEE CO Hab ET TT ETH Depending upon the response entered into th
247. itten to the PLC 16 12 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Configuring the Loop Input Pressing the F8 key places the input section of the Loop Configuration into the edit mode While in the edit mode updates of the input section from the PLC are suspended The input section consists of five values e Interval as a raw value units of 01 seconds e Error or see note 1 Deadband in engineering units for PV SP see note 2 Deadband in engineering units for PV SP Derivative ERROR or PV see note 3 1 Anerror value of indicates that the error term of the loop is calculated by SP PV A value of indicates that the sign of the error is negated by using the calculation PV SP 2 The deadband values are entered in engineering units which are then automatically converted back into PLC values prior to being written to the PLC 3 A derivative value of ERROR indicates that the derivative is based on the error term of the loop A value of PV indicates that it is based on the process variable value 4 The Error and Derivative values can be toggled by pressing the SPACEBAR or the key Note A key is not available on the front panel of the GE Fanuc OIT terminals nor the Nematron OptiTOUCH terminals The or the SPACEBAR key will function as a toggle between the and keys GFK 0641 Chapter 16 PID TemplatesModule 16 13 Loop Monitor
248. ject with the blink video attribute UNDERSCORE Display the object with the underscore video attribute BLACK Display the object with the black color attribute RED Display the object with the red color attribute GREEN Display the object with the green color attribute YELLOW Display the object with the yellow color attribute BLUE Display the object with the blue color attribute MAGENTA Display the object with the magenta color attribute CYAN Display the object with the cyan color attribute WHITE Display the object with the white color attribute MOVEA c Move an object to an absolute row column r c screen position MOVER c Move an object a relative number of row column rc screen positions Not all of the actions listed in the above table are available for every terminal type For example the color attributes are supported only for supported color terminals Also you should ensure that multiple actions from this group are selected logically in a way that will make sense For example indicating an action of BLUE GREEN makes no sense as the terminal is not capable of showing a combination of these attributes The ADS system does NOT attempt to flag such usage as illegal it is up to the user to choose the correct attributes The beginning point for both the relative and absolute movement of an object MOVER and MOVEA commands respectively is at the lower left hand corner of the object Movement may be in either a positive or negative direction
249. k_name gt L lt address gt 3 The parameters listed in this table are as follows PLC Memory Size Ref Over Diags Slice Ref Write Refers to the identifier used in the lt location_type gt field of the location reference syntax Data size in bits Is there an override bit associated with the location type Override bits are specified by using O in the lt modifier gt field of the location reference syntax Is there a diagnostic bit associated with the location type Diagnostic bits are specified by using F in the lt modifier gt field of the location reference syntax Indicates whether it is possible to specify individual bits or groups of bits from the location Indicates whether it is necessary to provide an address for the location type Indicates whether a value can be written to the location 8 18 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 PLC_ACCESS and PLC_STATUS are special locations that allow you to look at individual bits pertaining to program access and system status These bits are described below PLC_ACCESS 0 7 8 15 CP Num Priv Lev CPNum Indicates the number of the Control Program to which the requesting device is at tached Possible values are 1 to 7 where 1 indicates not attached to any control program This number is always 0 for Series 90 30 Priv Lev Current privilege level of requesting device for accessing memory in the PLC CPU
250. key AK15 F15 KPENTER F15 or KP Num Lock must be set to OFF for 83 key keyboard F11 and F12 keys on enhanced AT and PS 2style keyboards cannot be used user SHIFT F1 and SHIFT F2 1 For those keyboards which only support function keys F1 through F10 F11 through F15 may be generated by pressing SHIFT F1 through SHIFT F5 2 Keysmarked as x refer to a combination of the control key and a letter Ctrl key held down while simultaneously pressing the appropriate key 3 Keysmarked as KPx refer to the appropriate numeric key on the numeric keypad normally found on the right hand side of the keyboard 4 F11 F12 and F13 are not available for use with the PC based Builder 14 1 Section 1 Section 2 Initial Startup When the ADS Executor is initially started the named system to be executed is searched for first on the RAM device if not found there it is then searched for on the PC device unless you have explicitly specified either RAM or PC Once the system is found the various files making up the system are then individually loaded into the ADS Executor s working memory Each file is verified as it is loaded to ensure that it has not somehow been corrupted Once all the files have been loaded into the ADS Executor the initial screen as described in Chapter 1 ADS Main Menu is displayed Only data sources connected to the dynamic objects if any on the initial screen are scanned at their defined rates all alarm sources are sc
251. key from any field completes the modification You are returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed on the status line indicating that the modification was completed If you want to cancel the modification disregarding any changes which have been made press the lt Quit gt key An informative message is displayed on the status line indicating that no changes were made to the alarm source If you specify an alarm source which does not currently exist you will be returned to the menu page with the message Invalid alarm source specified displayed on the status line CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Delete an Alarm Source Analarm source may be irrecoverably removed from a system by deleting it To initiate an alarm source deletion first select the Delete an alarm source menu option either by cursoring to that option on the menu and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the D key The ADS Builder will prompt you for the name of the alarm source to be deleted In this example assume that you want to delete alarm source named OVER_TEMP Type the alarm source name into the prompt field When the Enter key is pressed the current form for the designated alarm source is displayed on the screen along with a prompt on the status line asking you to confirm the delete ADS BUILDER Delete an alarm source Name OQVER_TEMP Source Data Type SIGNED WOR
252. large enough to display the heading otherwise the ADS Builder will flag it as an error Assume that you want the text Alarms for Plant Area 4 to be displayed as the alarm page heading Type the text for the heading into the Heading field ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Alarm Pages ADS Print Destination STDPRN ns TT Create an alarm page Name AREA_4 Number 34 Starting Row 1 Rous Starting Colum 1 Columns Foreground WHITE Background Heading JEWS age eet ae aes Press the Enter key at this point to complete the creation of the alarm page You are then returned to the menu page along with an informative message displayed indicating that the creation of the alarm page is complete The alarm page you have just created is also listed in the status area on the left hand side of the screen ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Alarm Pages ADS Print Destination STDPRN AREA_4 34 Modify an alarm page Delete an alarm page View alarm pages List pages Print page details Alarm sources New alarm page added Chapter 8 Alarm Operations 8 7 Modify an Alarm Page 8 8 An existing alarm page may
253. lay a single screen in their place The screen to be displayed may be specified as part of the command and is identified by a screen number 1 999 Altematively indicating a screen number of 0 will cause the operator to be prompted on the operator message prompt line to enter the number of the screen to display The PSHSCN command overlays the specified screen number on top of those screens already displayed Again specifying a screen number of 0 will cause the operator to be Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 75 prompted for a screen number If the indicated screen is already on the display but is not the topmost screen it will be moved to the top of the display As an option a row column location may be specified for the pushed screen overriding the positioning coordinates specified as part of the screen definition Similar to the PSHSCN command the POPSCN command is used to remove a screen or screens from the display without affecting those screens displayed underneath Specifying a screen number of 1 999 indicates that that screen and all others displayed on top of it should be removed from the display A screen number of 0 indicates that only the topmost screen on the display is to be removed Similar to the POPSCN command the REMSCN command is used to remove a single screen from the display Screens on top of and underneath the removed screen are unaffected Again a screen number of 0 indicates that only the topmos
254. ld take care when overlaying screens where double size or double wide text is used The topmost screen is the one whose line definitions control the physical display If it contains double size or double wide text and part of the lines containing that text on the physical display is provided by a screen underneath it that screen s text will automatically be displayed as double size or double wide Conversely if single size text is overlaid on double size or double wide it will revert to single size To change a line into double width press the lt Double Wide gt key The contents of the line are automatically set to double width characters with any necessary truncation characters overflowing to next line also being performed automatically To change a line into double high wide press the lt Double High Wide gt key The contents of the current line and the previous line are automatically set to double high wide characters with any necessary truncation also being performed automatically Note that the second line that is the line that contains the base of the double high characters cannot be retrieved following the operation its contents are lost GFK 0641 Chapter 6 Screen Painter and Report Painter 6 9 o Simulating Quad Size Characters The GE Fanuc Operator Interface terminal both monochrome and color and the Nematron Touch Operator Interface terminal both monochrome and color support what is termed a Quad Size c
255. le capital letters only Date Format Characters Example Output DD MMM YY 27 JAN 91 DD MM YY 27 01 91 MM DD YY 01 27 91 DD MMM 27 JAN MM DD 01 27 Time MM SS 30 01 HH MM SS 12 30 01 HH MM 12 30 The easiest method for creating a dynamic object is to first edit the characters making up the dynamic object onto the screen or report and then actually create the object to encompass them The following screens are an example of this process Assume that you want to dynamically display the value of R100 on the terminal screen when the system being created is actually run using the ADS Executor Also assume that the value of R100 is expected to only range between 2000 and 60 The value of R100 is _ DRILL 50 Row 3 Col amp Text Static CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 Since you want to display a numeric value the numeric field formatting character 9 must be used Since the displayed value is to range between 2000 and 60 you must allow five screen columns to contain the value four digits plus one sign position Therefore a string of 5 numeric formatting characters are edited onto the screen The value of R100 is 99999_ DRILL 50 Row 3 Col amp Text Static To actually define a dynamic object first place the cursor on one of the corners of the area to be made dynamic and then press the lt Start dynamic object gt key In this example you would pr
256. le 3 2 Series 90 PLC References Supported by ADS System PLC Memory DATE TIME PLC_ID PLC_STATUS PLC_ACCESS PLC_SWEEP RACK mm SLOT_mn BUS_mno M_mnopp R Al AQ vazo SA SB SC G GA GB GC GD GE AP 2 L 3 Z MEMORY MAX_BLOCK Size Description Reference Over Diags Slice Ref Write PLC Date 32 N N N N N PLC Time 32 N N N N N PLCID n a N N N N N PLC Status 16 N N N N N Control Program FivilegeLevel 16 N N Y N N Last Sweep Time 16 N N N N N Fault in Rack mm 1 N N N N N Fault in Rack m Slot n 1 N N N N N Fault in Rack m Slot n Bus o 1 N N N N N Fault in Rack m Slot n Bus o Module pp 1 N N N N N Registers 16 N N Y Y Y Analoginputs 16 N Y Y Y Y Analogoutputs 16 N Y Y Y Y Discreteinputs 1 Y Y N Y Y Discreteoutputs 1 Y Y N Y Y Internal coils 1 Y N N Y Y Temporary coils 1 N N N Y Y Specialcontacts 1 N N N Y N Specialcontacts A 1 Y N N Y Y Special contacts B 1 Y N N Y Y Special contacts C 1 Y N N Y Y Globaldata 1 Y N N Y Y GlobaldataA 1 Y N N Y Y Global data B 1 Y N N Y Y Global data C 1 Y N N Y Y Global data D 1 Y N N Y Y Global data E 1 Y N N Y Y Main program block data 16 N N Y Y Y Sub program block data 16 N N Y Y Y ADSinternal data 16 N N Y Y Y ADSinternal free memory 32 N N N N N ADSinternal free memory largest block 32 N N N N N The PLC_ID is a 1 to 7 character string which contains the identifier name of the PLC CPU It is a
257. lete the modification You are returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed on the status line indicating that the modification was completed If you want to cancel the modification disregarding any changes that have been made press the lt Quit gt key If this is done an informative message is displayed on the status line indicating that no changes were made to the engineering units conversion table entry If you should specify an engineering units conversion table entry which does not currently exist you will be returned to the menu page with the message Invalid conversion entry specified displayed on the status line GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 53 Delete a Unit Conversion 3 54 Anengineering units conversion table entry may be irrecoverably removed from a system by deleting it Note You should be careful to not delete an engineering units conversion table entry referenced by a dynamic object on any screen or report in the system To initiate an engineering units conversion table entry deletion you must first select the Delete a unit conversion menu option either by cursoring to the option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the D key The ADS Builder will prompt you for the name of the entry to be deleted As indicated above only existing engineering units conversion table entries which are not referenced by any other object in the system should be deleted For ex
258. listing of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS key functions Related Publications GFK 0641 GFK 0499 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual Explains how to install the ADC module in a Series 90 30 or 90 70 PLC and download the ADS software onto the module Also included is information about the demonstration systems which let you view the ADS system capabilities and a development tutorial which walks you through development of an example operator interface system GFK 0255 Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software User s Manual Provides information required for configuration programming and operation of the Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Module PCM GFK 0262 Series 90 70 Programmable Controller Installation Manual Provides the information required for system planning and installation Describes the hardware components of a system and system configuration and provides installation and field wiring information for planning purposes and actual system installation GFK 0401 Workmaster II PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation Describes installation and operation of the Workmaster II computer specifically when used as the programming device for a Series 90 Programmable Logic Controller GFK 0263 Logicmaster 90 Programming Software User s Manual Explains how to use the Logicmaster 90 software to configure the Series 90 70 Programmable Logic Controller and create application progr
259. ll gather data from the PLC defined in the Source Location field By default this field is set to indicating that the data should be gathered at the system default scan rate see Modify System Parameters Default Scan Rate earlier in this section This setting should be changed only if you wish to guarantee a given scan rate regardless of the default setting The format for defining a specific scan rate is HH MM SS CC where HH refers to hours MM to minutes SS to seconds and CC to hundredths of a second Any time between 00 00 00 01 and 99 59 59 99 inclusive may be entered The ADS system s basic time element is 0 25 second because of this the ADS system will round all times up to the nearest 0 25 second This means that the fastest rate which can be specified is 00 00 00 25 and the slowest 100 00 00 00 When specifying a time the entire specification must be given not just the significant portion For instance to specify a scan rate of 3 seconds you must enter 00 00 03 00 not just 3 or 3 00 As an example of entering a new scan rate assume that your system is to scan the contents of PLC memory location R1 every 1 5 seconds Type the value 00 00 01 50 into the Scan Rate field Pressing the Enter key completes the entry When the Enter key is pressed the next field Additional Calculation is selected Note If a particular data source is being used only to animate a dynamic object on a report form the scan rate s
260. located in the Loop Setup file e the loop specified in the PID startup file or e the last modified loop The current loop can be selected by pressing F5 Select You will then be prompted for the name or number of the loop to be configured and a loop selection menu that contains all of the currently existing loop names is also displayed Upon entry of a valid name or number the selected loop information will be displayed See Modify a Loop Definition above for information on selecting a valid loop Modifying Loop Configurations When a portion of the loop configuration is selected for modification the first field is presented in reverse video with the value left justified To move to the next field press the Return or key To move to the previous field use the key Fields are arranged in a circular fashion such that pressing the key when you are on the last field will cause a move to the first field in the section To save values press the Return key while positioned on the last field To abandon changes to the current section press the lt Quit gt key If values are saved they are written to the loop configuration block in the PLC If Quit was used the original values in the PLC are returned at the next 1 second scan Configuring the Loop Gain Pressing the F6 key places the gain section of the Loop Configuration into edit mode While in edit mode updates of the gain section from the PLC are suspended Th
261. lookup table entry names ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Lookup Table ADS Print Destination STDPRN LOOKUP_25 Modify a lookup table entry Delete a lookup table entry View current entries List lookups LOOKUP_26 New lookup table entry Print lookups Press lt RETURN gt to list more entries else lt QUIT gt Pressing the lt Quit gt key exits the list operation The lookup table entry names currently displayed on the screen will be left displayed GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 69 Print Lookups The Print lookups option allows the details of the defined lookup tables to be printed on an attached printer When running the ADC version of the ADS Builder access to the Print options is only available if the ADS Print Module and Spooler are installed To initiate a print of the defined lookup tables select the Print lookups option by either cursoring to the option and pressing the Enter key or by pressing the P key Terminal Printer Dir ADS BUILDER COIT NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Lookup Table LOOKUP_01 LOOKUP_02 LOOKUP_03 LOOKUP_04 LOOKUP_05 LOOKUP_06 LOOKUP_0 LOOKUP_08 LOOKUP_09 LOOKUP_10 LOOKUP_11 LOOKUP_12 Current System Name COM2 COM1 LOOKUP_13 LOOKUP_14 LOOKUP_15 LOOKUP_16 LOOKUP_1 LOOKUP_
262. lowing alarm pages Name Every alarm source must be given a name This name must be unique with regards to alarm source names but does not need to be unique from all other names in the ADS system for example the system itself might be named DRILL and an alarm source might also be named DRILL A name may be from one to twelve alphanumeric and underscore _ characters and is NOT case sensitive As an example of naming an alarm source assume that you want to create an alarm source with the name OVER_TEMP Type the the name OVER_TEMP into the Name field To complete the entry press the Enter key The Source Data Type field is selected next GFK 0641 Chapter 8 Alarm Operations 8 15 Source Data Type Every data source must be tagged as to what type of data it represents The data types supported by the ADS system are specified in the table below Table 8 1 Source Data Types Supported for Alarm Sources Data Type Size Bits Value Range State 1 OFE ON Byte 8 0 to 255 Word 16 0 to 65535 Signed Word 16 32768 to 32767 Longword 32 0t0 4294967295 Signed Longword 32 2147483648 to 2147483647 Floating Point 32 999999999 99 to 9999999999 99 Only 7 digits of precision When you cursor onto the Source Data Type field a window is opened on the screen showing the available choices The default source data type selected by the system is WORD ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source OVER_TEMP or
263. lting ADS system is executed dynamic objects are processed in the ascending alphabetic order of their names This is important to remember when moving dynamic objects across other dynamic objects or when executing the SCN_EDIT command Data Source Every dynamic object must be assigned a PLC data source from which it will receive its data If no additional calculation is specified see below the Source data type of the PLC data source is used to validate any field formatting characters which are used only X formatting characters for State data type only 9 for all other data types plus period for floating point except special time and date formats The name of a PLC data source which has been previously defined may be referenced or you may specify the name of a new PLC data source If anew PLC data source is specified a data entry form for its definition is displayed on the screen You can also use the lt object list gt key to obtain a list of existing PLC data sources or as an alternative method for creating a new one In the following example assume that you have specified R100_VAL for the PLC data source which has not yet been defined The appropriate data entry form is displayed on the screen The value of R100 is EEEE Create Dynamic Ob ject Name R100_DISPLAY Data Source R100_VAL Additional Calc Create a data source Nane Source Data Type WORD Source Location Scan Rate or HH MM SS CC Additional
264. m Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Alarm page detail information is formatted as shown in the following examples ALARM PAGE LISTING Alarm Page 100 CRITICAL Start Row Start Column Foreground Heading Alarm Page 101 CAUTION Start Row Start Column Foreground Heading Error Messages for Alarm Pages 10 End Row 30 End Column RED Background 17 79 WHITE Critical Alarms Urgent Priority 5 End Row 20 End Column BLUE Background Cautionary Alarms Error messages and their causes for Alarm pages are listed below ENTRY ERROR alarm page number is not unique Two alarm pages may not have the same number ENTRY ERROR alarm page number may not be zero Analarm page number must be specified ENTRY ERROR Name not specified A name must be specified ENTRY ERROR page heading too big for page size 14 69 YELLOW The specified page heading will not fit within the number of columns defined for the alarm pages ENTRY ERROR Row or column sizes are invalid for this terminal The row column specification for the alarm page would place all or part of the alarm page off the physical display ENTRY ERROR specified rows value is invalid Analarm page must consist of at least 3 rows GFK 0641 Chapter 8 Alarm Operations Alarm Sources 8 14 When the alarm sources submenu is selected the following screen is displayed Another menu window is opened on
265. m of the value Any dynamic objects with animation that include movement may disappear from the screen if the movement calculation places the object off of the terminal display The ADS software remembers what has previously been written to the terminal screen and only updates sections of the screen which periodically change If the terminal is power cycled you will see only sporadic writes to the screen Pressing either the lt Refresh screen gt key or a function key to which the REFRSH command is attached will restore the display The ADC module may also be soft reset but all alarm entries on all alarm pages will be lost Also the initial screen Menu program opening screen or the system s initial screen depending on which environment is installed on the ADC will be displayed on the terminal CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Section 3 Operator Prompts and Messages During execution of a system the bottom line of the terminal display is used for operator prompts alarm messages and system messages The operator prompts require some type of action by the operator such as confirming a previous keystroke or entering some required data in a field The messages can require an action by the operator or may simply be informative Section 4 Alarm Handling During System Execution During system execution there are two classes of alarms to be considered e alarms not associated with alarm pages
266. manage the initialization of the PID startup file Refer to Chapter 13 Options PID in this manual for more information During execution of the PID module whenever a loop is selected on either of the three screens or deleted on the setup screen certain information describing the currently selected loops for each screen will be saved to a PID STR file Each time the PID module is entered either a system_name STR or the PID STR file will be read to determine which loops the configuration monitor and tuning screens should use at their startup The PID module will look first for the system_name STR file if it does not exist then the module will use the PID STR file The STR file may contain startup information for none some or all screens The configuration screen will always be the first one shown when entering the module from the ADS menu when entering the module from an existing system the appropriate screen based on the function call will startup using the system_name STR or PID STR file If there are loop names in the STR file that do not exist in the PID PID or system _name PID file these loops will be ignored If there is no STR file or there is no startup information for a particular screen that screen will begin without any currently selected loop You can read and edit the STR files An example is shown below Configuration PRESSURE Monitor 1 MAIN_LOOP Monitor 2 TEMP_MONITOR Monitor 3 DRIVE
267. ment tutorial Revisions to This Manual GFK 0641 Appropriate changes have been made to this manual to reflect the features of Release 4 01 of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Additionally corrections have been made where necessary Following is a list of the revisions to this manual as compared to the previous version GFK 0641 Page 1 3 added LUDCO TBL to list of valid settings for terminal module Page 1 4 added TTY TBL to list of valid settings for printer module Page 2 2 changed README 251 to README 401 in second paragraph under Entering the ADS Builder Program Page 2 3 added note at bottom of page Page 2 5 Revised column 4 of Table 2 1 Page 2 6 changed README 251 to README 401 in fourth paragraph Page 3 3 added LUDCO to list of terminals Page 3 29 added third sentence to CAUTION Page 6 7 added LUDCO after VT100 in column 1 e Page 6 10 changed content of items i 5 in the list e Page 6 11 added items 5 and 6 to list and added new paragraph after the list Page 9 1 added Refresh System in RAM and Execute System in RAM to first sentence in third paragraph Chapter 9 added Section 7 Refresh System in RAM and Section 8 Execute System in RAM iti Preface Page 12 1 in item 1 of the list deleted end of sentence beginning with as COM1 and added appropriately Deleted item 2 from list Page 12 2 last
268. meric Display System Referemce Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Object Lists Throughout the Builder you will be able to take advantage of what is called the object list functionality In general whenever you are defining an object or filling out a form where you need to reference another possibly existing object you can obtain a list of the relevant existing objects and choose the desired one from the list As an example in the screen below a dynamic object CART_DISPLAY is being created A data source a type of primitive object must be referenced or created to be used to animate the dynamic object Pressing the lt object list gt key with a blank entry for the Data Source field would result in a window being opened on the screen listing all of the existing data sources Create Dynamic Ob ject Name CART_DISPLAY Data Source Additional Calc Display Format Depending Display Value uration s be shown w Plc Data Sources MEM AI1_VALUE Data Srce R ALARM_4R_MON Data Srce AIL 99999 99 ALWAYS_MOVE Data Srce AQg1 99999 99 AQ1_FAULT Data Srce AQ1_VALUE Data Srce BAR Data Srce BAR_107 Data Srce BAR_TREND Data Srce BLOWER_1 Data Srce BUS_021 Data Srce CART Data Srce CART_LOAD Data Srce CONSTANT_SWP Data Srce CONTROL_PROG Data Srce GFK 0641 Chapter 2 Introduction to Using the ADS Builder 2 7 2 8 Alternatively if you knew that the data source you wished to reference b
269. mmand scripts Print command scripts Each of these options is described on the pages which follow Note that the status information formerly displayed along the left hand side of the screen has been replaced with a heading Command Scripts As command scripts are created a list of those scripts will be maintained in this area 3 72 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 New Script When the New script option is selected a data entry window is opened containing two fields which may be set as required Name and Command ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate Create a command script Enter ONE valid command per line Name Every command script must be given a name This name must be unique with regards to command script names but does not need to be unique from all other names in the ADS system for example the system itself might be named DRILL and a command script might also be named DRILL A name may be from one to twelve alphanumeric and underscore _ characters and is NOT case sensitive As an example of naming a command script assume that you want to create a command script with the name INITIALIZE To do this type the desired name into the Name field To complete the entry press the Enter key The first Command field is selected next GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 73 3 74 Commands Up to ten commands
270. modified Only existing reports may be modified the New Report menu option must be used in order to create a new report Assume that you want to modify report 43 PROD_REP Type 43 the report number into the prompt field When the Enter key is pressed the form for the report is displayed with the Report Name field initially selected You may now change any field except the Report Number field After you have completed the modifications to the report pressing the lt Save gt key will exit the screen report editor the report s contents will be saved in the ADS Builder s working memory You are then returned to the menu page Report Paint The actual contents of a report may be changed through the Report paint menu selection To initiate a report paint operation select the Report paint menu option either by cursoring to that option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the R key The ADS Builder will prompt you for the number of the report to be painted Only existing reports may be painted the New report menu option must be used in order to create a new report As an example of a report paint operation assume that you wish to paint report 43 PROD_REP Type the report number into the prompt field When you press the Enter key the ADS Builder enters the screen report editor You may make any needed modifications to the report ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan R
271. module on the ADC will look for one of only two possible setup file names It will look first for the file lt system_name gt PID and if not found it will then look for PID PID You are encouraged to use the file PID PID whenever possible as it is not system name dependent LOOP SETUP Defined Loops STEAM_TANK_1 12 gt Enter Filename SP g GFK 0641 Chapter 13 Options PID 13 5 Edit Startup File Upon executing the Edit Startup menu option you are placed in the PID screen initializationeditor You are presented with three major groups of selections one for each of the three runtime screens of the PID option module MONITOR screen CONFIGURATION screen and TUNING screen as well as the designation as to whether or not a touch keypad should be displayed for touch screen terminals You should refer to Chapter 16 PID Templates Module for a discussion of the three runtime screens Also in that same chapter you should refer to PID Startup File for a further discussion of the startup file PID SCREEN INTIALIZATION MONITOR SCREEN FACEPLATE 1 aft i ih 5 a 4 CONFIGURATION TOUCH KEYPAD DISABLED i OUTPUT INPUT CTRL_RM_TEMPi Zone 5 Temp Dd STEAM_TANK_1i Pressurize_1i c12 STEAM_TANK_Zi Pressurize_Zi 23 lt lt TAB to Move UP DOWN to Select ENTER to accept F1 SAUE to exit gt gt A loop may be selected by scrolling through the loop definition list via the T and 4 cursor key
272. mple if the user specifies a display format data type of SIGNED WORD that format could only be associated with a PLC data source whose source data type was SIGNED WORD To complete the selection press the Enter key The next field Range is also selected at this time An area of the screen directly below the word Range is highlighted in reverse video This is the area where you will enter the desired range Ranges along with their associated actions form the heart of the display format At run time the input value is checked against the specified ranges sequencing from top to bottom with the first range found to include the value being selected The action associated with the selected range is then carried out Up to 10 range action pairs may be specified The format for specifying a range is lt I1 gt lt I2 gt where I1 must be defined and 2 I1 As previously stated a given range must be consistent with the display format s assigned data type This means for instance that only ON and OFF may be used as range designators for display formats with an assigned data type of STATE and that only numbers in the range 32768 to 32767 may be used with an assigned data type of SIGNED WORD Assume that you wish to specify an action for the range 32768 to 1 all single precision negative numbers Simply type the desired range into the range field To complete the entry press the Enter key Note that the associated Action f
273. mplete the name entry that the Input value high field is selected next Engineering Units Conversion Equation The Input value high and Input value low fields define the upper and lower bound respectively which the input value is expected to be within At runtime should the input value be outside these limits the value will be altered to the appropriate low or high boundary Likewise the Output value high and Output value low fields define the upper and lower bound respectively within which the output value will range 3 50 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 The actual equation applied to provide the engineering units conversion is as follows _ Xh O O Xi i Ly 01 where Xo Output value Xi Input value l Input value low I Input value high O4 Output value low Ou Output value high As an example of creating an engineering units conversion table entry assume that you want to scale an input value in the range 32768 32767 to the range 0 100 You would type in 32767 for the input value high field 32768 for the input value low field 100 for the output value high field and 0 for the output value low field pressing the Enter key to complete each entry The following example screen shows all the equation values entered in their respective fields ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate Printer
274. n Text Log N Timestamp N Latched N Notify N Auto ack N Output text to following alarm pages Range Ranges along with their associated actions and text form the heart of the alarm source When the PLC system is running the alarm source is checked against the specified ranges sequencing from top to bottom with the first range found to include the value triggering an alarm If the value is not within any specified range normal condition no alarm will be triggered The action if any associated with the selected range is then carried out and the text if any will be sent to the specified alarm page s if any Up to CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 fourange action text sets may be specified These four sets correspond to the normal alarm settings of LOW LOW LOW HIGH and HIGH HIGH The format for specifying a range is lt I gt lt I2 gt where I1 must be defined and I2 T1 Asstated above a range must agree with the alarm source s assigned source data type This means for instance that only ON and OFF may be used as range designators for alarm sources with an assigned source data type of STATE and that only numbers in the range 32768 to 32767 may be used with an assigned data type of SIGNED WORD In the following example an alarm is to be triggered whenever the alarm source is within the range of 150 175 To specify that range type it int
275. n and by specifying the total number of rows and columns covered by the alarm page The alarm page must be defined so that it falls within the viewing area of the terminal s screen since there is no provision for panning across a larger virtual alarm page By default the ADS builder sets these values to exactly match the size of the screen you are using minus one row reserved for a prompt Atatus line You may alter any of these values by typing the new values into the appropriate fields If you want to take advantage of windowing multiple alarm pages onto the terminal device care must be taken when selecting the page coordinates and size The alarm page will always be displayed at the given coordinates with the defined size regardless of what else is displayed on the screen You normally would want to have a portion of covered pages remain visible on the screen so that you can readily see that more information is present and accessible assuming that an alarm page POPALM command is made available Values for the Starting Row and Starting Column fields must be selected so that the upper left hand corner of the alarm page falls within the viewing area of the screen however you are not required to have the entire page fall within the confines of the physical device although for most applications this is what you would want You must define the Rows field to be a minimum of 3 which allows for a border and a single visible alarm entry Generally
276. n o d c DYN_EDIT n 0 Vv SCN_EDIT n v WAIT_DATA n o LOGTTM x LOGMES x REPORT n HELP n TTDUMP REFRESH _ PORTW p t EXIT A 5 Screen Operations New Modify Screen Screen Name XXXXXXXX 8 characters max Screen Number Ll bo 999 Start Row 1 to 23 Rows 23 to T Start Column 1 to 80 Columns 80 to 1 Image New CE Foreground Black Red Green Yellow Blue Magenta Cyan White Background Black Red Green Yellow Blue Magenta Cyan White A 6 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Key Assignments Unique for each screen AK1 through AK15 F1 through F15 Command Script and or PLCGETB loc SCREEN n PLCGETBY loc PSHSCN n r C PLCGETW loc POPSCN n PLCGETI loc REMSCN n PLCGETL loc ALARM n PLCGETS loc PSHALM n PLCGETF loc POPALM n PLCSETB loc val REMALM n PLCSETBY loc val CLRALM PLCSETW loc val ACTION_OFF PLCSETI loc val ACTION_ON PLCSETL loc val ACK_ALARM _ PLCSETS loc val ACK_ALARM lt page number gt PLCSETF loc val ACK_ALARM lt alarm source gt GFK 0641 Appendix A CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Display System Builder Guide PLC_FAULT f b IO_FAULT f b SETUP_LOOP f b CONF IGURE_LOOP f b MONITOR_LOOP f b TUNE_LOOP f b ATTACH n o d c DYN_EDIT n 0 v SCN_EDIT n v WAIT_DATA n 0 LOGTTM x LOGMES x REPORT n HELP n
277. nced PLC data source display format translation table entry engineering units conversion table entry or lookup table entry will NOT be affected by the deletion of the dynamic object The value of R100 is 99999 DRILL 50 Row 3 Col amp Text Static R100_DISPLAY GFK 0641 Chapter 7 Dynamic Objects 7 11 When the lt Delete dynamic object gt key is pressed the dynamic object s data entry form is displayed on the screen along with a prompt asking you to confirm the delete Pressing the Enter key causes the dynamic object to be deleted pressing the lt Quit gt key cancels the deletion The value of R100 is EBEE Delete Dynamic Ob ject Name R100_DISPLAY Data Source R100_VAL Additional Calc Display Format NEG_POS Display Value Y Y N Hex Notation N Left Justify N Zero Fill N Available for Edit N Press lt RETURN gt to delete this dynamic object else lt QUIT gt 7 12 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Copying and Pasting a Dynamic Object A dynamic object may be copied to a buffer and then pasted any number of times on both the current screen or report and other screens or reports This is useful as a time saving mechanism to quickly place multiple instances of visually identical dynamic objects changing the source of animation and any other attributes of the dynamic object during the paste process To begin the copy dynamic object operation fir
278. ne ADC 9 16 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 9 Should the Builder be unable to communicate with the ADC module you will be informed of this fact and will be prompted to correct the situation and to attempt the operation again ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI lt CSTDIO gt Default Scan Rate Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Load system Save system to disk Modify current directory Refresh system in RAM Clear system Print destination PNOrPUWUMWOrW Function not available when ADC is Offline Attach or reset ADC If the Builder is able to communicate with the ADC module the Terminal screen will be displayed and the ADC module will automatically be soft reset Refer to Chapter 12 in this manual for a dis cussion of the Terminal screen Error Messages for Load Save Operations Error messages and their causes for load save operations are listed below All changes to the current system will be lost continue Y N N The requested operation will irrevocably lose all changes to the system since it was last saved You are prompted to confirm that the operation should continue Could
279. ned floating point numbers in the range of 9999999 99 to 9999999 99 The PLC Lower and Upper Bounds represent the minimum and maximum values to be used in the PLC These values are signed integer values in the ranges 32768 to 32767 this being the permitted range of values in the PLCs PID Loops Chapter 16 PID TemplatesModule 16 7 16 8 Note While it is not necessary it is highly desirable that the range of both units and PLC values move uniformly from negative to positive values particularly for CV values That is if negative values are used as the PLCs values the unit values should also contain negative values The last two fields control the actions that you may perform on the loop at run time The User Configurable flag determines whether you are permitted to alter loop configuration values using the configuration screen Either Y or N must be entered in this field Note that the default value allows you to configure the loop The Manual Mode flag controls whether or not you are permitted to set the loop into manual mode and control the values of CV and SP directly Either Y or N must be entered Note that the default value allows you to control the loop manually The Y and N values of the User Configurable and Manual Mode flags can be toggled between the two valid choices by pressing the SPACEBAR or the key When all of the required information has been entered press lt Save
280. nformation which you must type in to specify a source location is lt Source location gt lt PLC memory gt lt reference gt where lt PLC memory gt is as listed in the table above and lt reference gt is a numeric value specifying a particular reference offset within the PLC memory For example to indicate a source location for PLC memory reference R1 you would specify R1 The previous field Source Data Type determines how many consecutive references are implied by the source location selection For example if a source location of I1 were specified along with a source data type of WORD the data source would include PLC memory locations I1 to I16 The reason for this is that the WORD data type requires sixteen bits of storage and that each I reference is a single bit in size Assume that you wish to tie the alarm source to PLC memory reference AI5 To do this type AI5 into the PLC Location field Note that only AI5 is referenced since the source data type SIGNED WORD requires sixteen bits of storage and each AI reference is sixteen bits in size ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name OVER_TEMP Source Data Type SIGNED WORD PLC Location 6 Scan Rate s or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp N Latched N Notify N Auto ack Output text to following alarm pages CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric
281. not communicating with the ADC module Typically this is due to the ADC module not being configured properly with the Logicmaster 90 configuration software GFK 0641 Chapter 14 Running an ADS System Starting the ADS Execution 14 11 Chapter Fault Tables Module The ADS Fault Tables module provides an interface to the CPUs PLC fault table and I O fault table in a manner consistent with that provided by the Logicmaster 90 programming and configuration software packages The ADS Fault Tables module is an optional software module that you can install on the ADC board Once loaded on the board the Fault Tables module can be accessed as a stand alone system i e without using an ADS system or as a set of predefined screens which can be invoked by commands within an ADS system Overview of the Fault Tables Module For information on how to install the Fault Tables module refer to Sections 4 and 5 in Chapter 7 ADS Setup Utility in the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS User s Manual Running the Fault Tables Module in Stand Alone Mode The Fault Tables module can be executed in stand alone mode only when the ADS Software Development Environment has been installed on the ADC module The Fault Tables module must have been included into the development environment via the ADS Setup Utility When the Fault Tables module is correctly installed on the ADC board the ADS Menu Program will indicate that the module is Loaded On the ADS menu screen
282. nput Data Types Supported for EUC Tables 2 eee ee 3 52 Table 3 18 Output Data Types Supported for EUC Tables 0 eee eens 3 52 Table 3 19 Input Data Types Supported for Lookup Tables 060 6 3 61 Table 3 20 Output Data Types Supported for Lookup Tables 0 cece cece eee eee 3 62 Table3 21 Get PLE Datta 22ers yddai ti E eee ede ER OEE eb ee nee ia 3 74 Table 3 22 Set PEC Data sorsat roas bagei eae TE Boats EE E E EE EE E E A 3 74 Table 3 23 Screen Commands sisser i aar eta E EEE EE O E E wan eg AAE 3 75 Table 3 24 Alarm Page Commands 066 c ccc nee 3 76 Table 3 25 Alarm Source Related Commands 6 00 ccc c cece cence eee 3 77 Table 3 26 Option Module Access Commands 000 c cece eee eee eee eee 3 78 Table 3 27 Dynamic Object Related Commands n snus 006s 3 79 Table 3 28 Miscellaneous Commands 6 6000 c ccc e eee 3 80 Table 6 1 Key Functions for System Building 6 6 66 6 2 Table 6 2 Cursor Keys Supported by Screen Report Editor 0 eee eee 6 3 Table 8 1 Source Data Types Supported for Alarm Sources 0 6 6 o cee eee eee 8 16 Table 8 2 Series 90 PLC References Supported by ADS System 6 6 66 8 18 Table 8 3 Data Range for a Custom Translation 0 00 00 ccc ce eee eee ee 8 24 dable 8 4 GetiPL Data tii Sadi Eek Soe NES NN ie Oe ca desc aaah ee tee ate 8 26 Table 8 5 S t PLG Data iri r dedi eee theta BGA aed e
283. ns contents its function key assignments and its touch point assignments if target terminal supports a touch screen During the copy process you may alter the screen definitional information screen name screen size color etc A unique screen number must be assigned to the copied screen To initiate a screen copy select the Copy screen menu option either by cursoring to the Copy screen option on the menu and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the C key The ADS Builder will prompt you for the number of the screen from which the copy will be made For example assume that you want to create a new screen which is a copy of existing screen 50 REGS Type the screen number into the prompt field When you press the Enter key a data entry window is opened which is identical to the one used for creating a new screen Assume that you want the new screen to be numbered 299 and that it is to have the name A otherwise the screen definition data is to be exactly the same as for screen 50 At this point enter the screen name and number information into the creation form ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Screens ADS Print Destination STDPRN REGS C 50 Create Screen Screen Name Screen Number Start Row Rous 23 Start Column Colums 80 Image Norm Rev Tr
284. nter key the form for the specified data source is displayed with the Source Data Type field initially selected You can now proceed to change any of the fields except the Name field Pressing the Enter key with the Additional Calculation field selected or pressing the lt Save gt key from any field will complete the modification You are then returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed in the status line indicating that the modification was completed To cancel the modification disregarding any changes which have been made press the lt Quit gt key An informative message is displayed on the status line indicating that no changes were made to the data source If a data source is specified which does not currently exist you will be returned to the menu page with the message Invalid data source specified CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 Delete a Data Source A data source may be removed from a system by deleting it Note A data source removed from a system cannot be recovered You should exercise caution to not delete a data source referenced by a dynamic object on any screen or report To initiate a data source deletion first select the Delete a data source menu option either by cursoring to the desired option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the D key The ADS system will prompt you for the name of the data source to be dele
285. ntinuing with our example assume that you want to assign 43 as the report number Type the number 43 into the Report Number field To complete the entry press the Enter key Note that the Rows field is selected next GFK 0641 Chapter 5 ReportOperations 5 3 Start Row Rows Start Column and Columns You can control the size of a report by specifying the number of rows and columns covered by the report You must select the values which reflect the physical printer on which the report will be printed If the report is defined to be wider than the width supported by your terminal panning across the report is supported unlike screens Only the Rows and Columns fields may be altered by the user A value from 1 to 99 inclusive may be chosen for the number of rows and a value from 1 to 200 inclusive for the number of columns The Start Row and Start Column fields may not be altered but are displayed to indicate that the report always begins at the row 1 column 1 position Assume that you wish to define a report consisting of 60 rows and 132 columns The number of rows is defined first by typing the number 60 into the Rows field Pressing the Enter key completes the entry and selects the Columns field Type the number of columns 132 for this example into the Column field ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 S Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 S Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup
286. nu option either by cursoring to that option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the C key The ADS Builder will prompt you for the name of the alarm source to be copied In this example assume that you want to create a new alarm source which is a copy of existing alarm source OVER_TEMP Type the name of the existing alarm source into the prompt field Upon pressing the Enter key a data entry window is opened which is identical to the one used for creating a new data source The form is initialized with the information from the existing alarm source OVER_TEMP s form except that the name field is blank and selected for entry ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name Source Data Type SIGNED WORD PLC Location AIS Scan Rate or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Range 150 175 Action PSHALM 34 Text Boiler temperature is dangerously hight Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp Y Latched Y Notify N Auto ack N Output text to following alarm pages 734 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 After assigning a name to the new alarm source and making any modifications required to its definition press the lt Save gt key to complete the copy You are then returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed on the status line indicating that the copy operation is complete Also the listin
287. o 255 Word 16 0 to 65535 Signed Word 16 32768 to 32767 Longword 32 0 to 4294967295 Signed Longword 32 2147483648 to 2147483647 Floating Point 32 999999999 9 to 9999999999 99 Only 7 digits of precision Selecting a Source Data Type When you cursor onto the Source data type field another window is opened on the screen showing the available choices for data type By default the system selects WORD for the source data type ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Data Sources ADS Print Destination STDPRN rs Rew data source W Create a data source PARTS_COUNT or HH MM SS CC Use the and keys to select the data type choice which matches the type of data in the PLC represented by the data source To complete the selection press the Enter key after you have cursored to the desired data type source After the Enter key is pressed the next field Source Location is selected next reverse video block now on this field CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Source Location The Source Location field is used to attach a data source to a specific location reference or multiple locations in the PLC Memory locations in the PLC that are supported by the ADS system are specified in the table below Tab
288. o UP or RIGHT trend graphs may go RIGHT or LEFT The minimum and maximum values specify the range of values that are applied to the object If the input value is greater than the maximum value or less than the minimum value it is automatically truncated to the appropriate boundary The background color specifies the color in which the background region of the object is displayed This allows a bar chart for example to be overlaid on a colored region which represents a tank If the background color of the bar chart is set to be the same as the colored region only the bar chart will be visible at run time The foreground color specifies the color in which the filled area for a bar chart or trend line for a trend graph is displayed Note that the foreground color cannot be the same as the background color The foreground color can be modified at run time by a display format When all the required data has been entered save the new object as with any dynamic object The area of the screen defined to be the dynamic object is now displayed with a border and a title indicating what type of object has been defined To modify or delete a predefined dynamic object use the same procedures as for user defined dynamic objects CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 Error Messages for Dynamic Objects Error messages and their causes for Dynamic Objects are listed below Cannot paste dou
289. o match input data type for XXXX The input data type for the referenced additional calculation does not match the data type specified as the source data type Too many bits for data type The PLC location specified requires more storage space bits than provided for by the specified source data type Note See Chapter 3 Section 7 Command Scripts for a list of error messages pertaining to particular commands 8 42 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Chapter Load Save Operations 9 There are two versions of the Load Save operations submenu The version displayed depends on whether you are using the ADC based or the PC based Builder version of software When the Load Save operations submenu is selected the following screen is displayed Another menu window is opened on the screen giving the additional options of e Load system Save system to RAM e Archive system to PC Clear system e Print destination The PC based Builder differs from the ADC based Builder in that it does not support the Save System to RAM option and it has additional options Modify Current Directory Refresh system in RAM and Execute system in RAM Also the third entry listed above Archive system to PC is labeled Save to Disk on the PC based Builder s Load Save operations submenu Each of the options listed above is described in the following pages ADS BUILDER Curr
290. o perform the translation are described by the following function Output Value Ax Input Value B C A 6 500000 B o C Specify Data Types Y N N Input Data Type NIL Output Data Type NIL Pressing the Enter key at this point completes the entry of the post scaling factor 3 40 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 The next screen displayed has a Specify Data Types field which must be completed ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Trans 1 Create a translation entry Name ONE_HALF The variables used to perform the translation are described by the following function Output Value Ax Input Value B C A 6 500000 B 0 C 100 Specify Data Types Y N J Input Data Type NIL Output Data Type NIL Specify Data Types The Specify Data Types flag indicates whether or not data type conversion is to occur PRIOR to the translation being performed For example if a translation equation with A B and C terms of 0 01 0 0 is defined that is divide the input value by 100 with no pre or post offset and applied to an input value of type WORD the result will be truncated to a WORD value for example a result of 1 24 will become 1 If on the other hand the input data type is first converted to FLOAT t
291. o the Range field ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name OQVER_TEMP Source Data Type SIGNED WORD PLC Location AIS Scan Rate or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Range IRH KE Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp N Latched N Notify N Auto ack Output text to following alarm pages Chapter 8 Alarm Operations 8 25 8 26 To complete the entry press the Enter key The associated Action field is selected next ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name OQOVER_TEMP Source Data Type SIGNED WORD PLC Location AIS Scan Rate or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Range 150 175 Act ion Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp N Latched N Notify N Auto ack N Output text to following alarm pages Action The Action field defines what is to take place whenever its associated range triggers an alarm This field is optional if specified one or more commands from the following table may be specified and or one or more command scripts may be specified multiple commands should be separated by a space character or a semicolon The lt object list gt key can be used to obtain a list of existing command scripts or to create a new one The following tables define the valid commands for use as an alarm action See Command Scripts in Chapter 3 Section 7 for details on
292. o which port on the ADC the terminal is to be connected when the system is actually executed By default this field is set to COM2 which stands for serial communications port 2 COM1 may be selected if the terminal is to be connected to serial communications port 1 A third choice STDIO allows the terminal to be connected to whichever port is specified for the target terminal in the ADS Setup Utility without actually specifying it as part of the system definition When you cursor onto the Terminal Device field a window is opened on the screen showing what choices are available ADS BUILDER Current System Name PUNCH Terminal CPC COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer NULL Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Modify System Params System Name DRILL Terminal COIT Terminal Device Printer Device NULL Default Scan rate 1 00 Default Alarm Scan rate 1 00 Startup screen Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts eocooooocoeooo For the COIT terminal COM2 is the correct choice press the Enter key The next field Printer Device is then selected CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Printer Device Printer output is directed to the device specified by the
293. ociated with the alarm source refer to Output Text to Alarm Page s below If no alarm pages are GFK 0641 Chapter 8 Alarm Operations 8 31 8 32 associated with the alarm source there is no way for an operator to acknowledge the alarm condition Therefore if there is no alarm page associated with the alarm source the alarm condition is considered to have been automatically acknowledged when it occurs This makes the latched and unlatched conditions equivalent when alarm pages are not used The default N is selected in the Latched field If you want to latch this alarm source Type Y into the Latched field ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name OQOVER_TEMP Source Data Type SIGNED WORD PLC Location AIS Scan Rate or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Range 150 175 Action pshalm 34 Text Boiler temperature is dangerously hight Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp Y Latched J Notify N Auto ack N Output text to following alarm pages Pressing the Enter key completes the entry and selects the Notify field Notify The Notify field is used to indicate whether the text defined in the Text field as described above should be displayed on the terminal s status line The default setting is to NOT display the alarm on the terminal s status line It is important to note that many messages are written to the terminal s status line during normal operation Whil
294. of engineering units can be entered PV SP units and CV units Both are optional and both operate in the same manner Where PV SP units are specified all values relating to the Setpoint and Process variables including values such as DEADBAND are scaled using this set of units If the CV units are NOT specified all CV related values including for instance CLAMP are scaled using the PV SP units If CV units are specified all CV related values will be scaled using these units regardless of whether or not PV SP units have been specified Engineering units consist of four values e unit lower and upper bound ul and uu PLC lower and upper bound pl and pu For a given value in the PLC C the resultant value in the specified engineering units E is derived using the following formula E uu ul pu pl i C pl ul Note that the PLC lower and upper bounds act as value limiters such that if Cw pu then E uu if Cv pl then E ul The Engineering Units field is a text description of the units that are displayed after any values that have been scaled to the specified units For instance if the values are being scaled to represent degrees centigrade an appropriate unit description may be DEGC Some form of description must be entered if engineering units are to be used The Units Lower and Upper Bounds represent the minimum and maximum values to be represented in the desired engineering units These values are sig
295. of the command requiring no further input from the operator Alternatively if no value is specified as part of the command a prompt will be displayed on the operator message prompt line requesting that the operator provide a value prior to executing the set CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 Examples of valid Set PLC Data commands are PLCSETB Q1 Prompt operator for STATE value to write to Q1 PLCSETL R1 457 Write LONGWORD value 457 to R1 PLCSETS R100 Enter Setpoint 50 10000 Prompt operator using custom prompt Enter Setpoint for SIGNED WORD value to write to R100 the user s response should be constrained to the range 50 10 000 Note When specifying an additional calculation as part of a PLCSET command note that the user supplied value will be reverse scaled through the additional calculation The data type specified as part of the PLCSET command must match the type of value to be entered by the operator The additional calculation is specified normally as if the value is flowing from the PLC through the additional calculation For example assume that R1 in the PLC contains a scaled fixed point value nnnn which actually represents a value with two digits to the right of the decimal point nn nn A translation entry would be defined specifying an input data type of WORD an output data type of FLOATING POINT and an A scalar term of 0
296. of the fields except the Name field Pressing the lt Save gt key from any field or the Enter key with the tenth output value field selected completes the modification You are then returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed on the status line indicating the modification was completed If you want to cancel the modification disregarding any changes which have been made press the lt Quit gt An informative message is displayed on the status line indicating that no changes were made to the lookup table entry If a lookup table entry is specified which does not currently exist you will be returned to the menu page with the message Invalid lookup table entry specified displayed on the status line Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 65 Delete a Lookup Table Entry A lookup table entry may be irrecoverably removed from a system by deleting it Note You should be careful to not delete a lookup table entry referenced by a dynamic object on any screen in the system To initiate a lookup table entry deletion first select the Delete a lookup table entry menu option either by cursoring to that option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the D key The ADS Builder will prompt you for the name of the lookup table entry to be deleted As noted above only existing lookup table entries which are not referenced anywhere in the system may be deleted In this example assume that you want to delete the lo
297. okup table entry MESSAGE Type the desired entry name MESSAGE into the prompt field ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Lookup Table ADS Print Destination STDPRN MESSAGE New lookup table entry Modify a lookup table entry View current entries List lookups Print lookups Enter the name of the lookup table entry to delete ESSAGE 3 66 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 When the Enter key is pressed the form for the specified lookup table entry is displayed along with a prompt on the status line asking you to confirm the delete or lt Quit gt ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal col Delete a lookup table entry Printer Name MESSAGE Dir NAD Input Data Type WORD Lookup Table Output Data Type STRING MESSAGE INPUT RANGE OUTPUT VALUE 0 1000 TANK 7 IS FILLING 1001 TANK 7 IS FULL 1002 65535 PROBLEM WITH TANK 7 Press lt RETURN gt to delete this lookup table entry else lt QUIT gt If the lt Quit gt key is pressed indicating that the lookup table entry deletion should be canceled you will be returned to the menu page no message will be displayed to indicate that the deletion was canceled If a lookup table entry is specified which does not currently exist you will be returned
298. only in the PLC If the table is cleared successfully all the displayed entries will be removed from the screen Should the clear fail an error message will be displayed at the bottom of the screen failure may occur due to the CPU being password protected etc Note Fault tables in the Series 90 30 CPU may not be cleared when the Logicmaster 90 software is running on a computer attached to the CPUs programming part The lt Print gt function is assigned to the F2 key It is used to print an ASCII representation of the current display to an attached printer Use of this function requires that the Print Spooler be installed on the ADC module The lt Print gt function key will not be available when the Fault Tables module is run from the Menu program in development mode The lt Refrsh gt function key assigned to F3 is used to repaint the display Access to the fault table screen not currently displayed is provided via the F4 key It will always be labeled with the fault table screen you would access if the key were pressed The lt Full gt F5 key function key provides additional encoded information concerning the currently highlighted fault entry Consult your Logicmaster 90 or 90 30 90 20 Reference Manual for details on how to decode this information The lt Down gt lt Up gt lt Pg Down gt and lt Pg Up gt function keys F6 F7 F8 and F9 respectively are used to scroll through the fault table entries
299. oop i e the Proportional Integral and Differential terms to let you view the effects of changes to these values Note that the loop setup must specify that the loop is user configurable for this feature to be used The Loop Tuning Screen is accessed from all other screens by pressing the F4 key The Loop Tuning Screen consists of a trend graph displaying the values of the PV SP and CV parts of the loop over time The time base is displayed at the base of the chart The values of PV SP and CV are also displayed A separate area of the screen displays the current value of the P I and D terms of the loop CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 LOOP TUNING LOOP PROCESS 30 Seconds CONFIG MONITOR ESELECT MODIFY GRATE START TGEXIT Selecting the Loop to be Tuned Pressing the F5 key allows you to enter the name or number of the loop to be tuned Once a valid loop has been selected the screen image is updated to display name of the selected loop process description of the loop e engineering units and minimum maximum values See Modify a Loop Definition above for information on selecting a valid loop Note that the loop tuning is displayed as being STOPPED This indicates that no data is being gathered for the loop Setting the Scan Rate for Tuning By default the scan rate for loop tuning is 1 second That is once per second new values
300. op a screen that does not exist or is not currently displayed Could not clear fault table A clear fault table command was rejected by the CPU either because of a privilege level violation or for Series 90 30 only the Logicmaster 90 30 software is actively communicating with the CPU ENTRY ERROR value outside range for dynamic object XXXX While editing dynamic object XXXX a value was entered outside the defined min max range for that object the edit remains active Error loading system XXXX Some error typically identified by a previously displayed error message occurred while attempting to load system XXXX Error verifying screen fileXXXX n While loading screen file number n for system XXXX an error was detected Typically this error is caused by deleting some component of the system e g a display format which is referenced by a dynamic object on the screen The same error message will be seen if the screen file is found to be corrupted Fault option module is not installed One of the fault modules access commands was executed without the fault module being installed on the ADC module Initializing physical display failed 10 When the ADS execute only environment was installed onto the ADC module the specified terminal table did not exist on the ADC module Include the required terminal table via the ADS Setup Utility and then reinstall the execute only environment on the ADS module
301. oreground and background colors cannot be the same value When you cursor to the foreground or background color fields a window is opened on the screen showing what choices are available ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Alarm Pages ADS Print Destination STDPRN ns ew atarn page Create an alarm page AREA_4 34 1 Rows 23 1 Columns 80 Background BLACK Heading Pressing the Enter key from the background color field completes the entry of the alarm page size positioning and color fields The Heading field is selected next ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Alarm Pages ADS Print Destination STDPRN ns EE Create an alarm page Name AREA_4 Number 34 Starting Row 1 Rows 23 Starting Colum 1 Colums 80 Foreground WHITE Background BLACK Heading CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 The option is provided to have a heading displayed at the top of the alarm page whenever the page itself is displayed on the terminal device The heading consists of from 0 to 40 printable ASCII characters You must ensure that the alarm page is
302. ou to specify the screen alarm page to be selected 2 Ifn 0 only the most recently pushed screen alarm page will be removed from the terminaldisplay Table 8 7 Alarm Page Commands Action Description ALARM n 8 Removeall alarm pages and overlay n PSHALM n Overlay alarm page n POPALM n Remove last alarm page overlaid or all down to and including n REMALM n Remove last alarm page overlaid or only n CLRALM Remove all currently displayed alarm pages 1If n 0 a prompt will appear on the terminal s display line asking you to specify the screen alarm page to be selected 2 If n 0 only the most recently pushed screen alarm page will be removed from the terminaldisplay 3 If n 0 all alarm pages will be removed from the screen and no new alarm page will be displayed Chapter 8 Alarm Operations 8 27 Table 8 8 Alarm Source Related Commands Action ACTION_OFF ACTION_ON ACK_ALARM ACK_ALARM lt page number gt ACK_ALARM lt alarm source gt Description Disableactions associated with alarms Enable actions associated with alarms Acknowledgesallalarms in system Acknowledgesallalarms on a page Acknowledgesa particular alarm Table 8 9 Option Module Access Commands Action PLC_FAULT f b IO_FAULT b SETUP_LOOP b CONFIGURE_LOOP b MONITOR_LOOP b TUNE_LOOP b Description Display the PLC Fault table screen with optionally sp
303. out data source id2 from MEn to lt id2 gt gt print out all data sources up to id2 from lt idl gt to UK gt print out all data sources from ill from xr to gt print out all data sources from to Ke gt print out all data sources from Tar to Mar gt print out all data sources Pressing the lt Quit gt key aborts the print operation After selection of the required range of display formats to be printed the ADS Builder sends the information to the Print Destination specified using the Print Destination option see Load Save Operations Chapter 9 Display format information is formatted as shown in the following example DISPLAY FORMAT LISTING Display Format COLOR_CHANGE Data Type WORD Range Action 0 10 GREEN 11 20 YELLOW 21 30 RED Error Messages for Display Formats Error messages and their causes for Display Formats are listed below ENTRY ERROR Display format name not unique Two display formats may not have the same name ENTRY ERROR No Display format name A name must be specified Entry Error n Invalid item XXXX The action command XXXX specified for line number n is unknown Entry Error Range Action values line n WA Range specification for line number n is invalid or of the wrong form for the specified data type Note See Section 7 Command Scripts for a list of error messages pertaining to particular comman
304. pe of compound DYN_EDIT command It invokes the actual edit of each dynamic object made available for edit on the screen one at a time in the alphabetic order of the dynamic objects names The WAIT_DATA command is used to cause a pause before the next command in sequence is executed Its primary use is with the DYN_EDIT and SCN_EDIT commands For example assume that when function key F1 is pressed on screen 1 that you want to push screen 53 onto the display and immediately begin editing dynamic object SETPOINT which is on screen 53 in our example If the command sequence PSHSCN 53 DYN_EDIT 53 SETPOINT REVERSE is used the edit of dynamic object SETPOINT will begin before valid data has been scanned for it the value you see will be undefined Placing a WAIT_DATA command immediately prior to the DYN_EDIT command will give you the desired result PSHSCN 53 WAIT DATA 53 SETPOINT DYN_EDIT 53 SETPOINT REVERSE Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 79 3 80 Note that this situation occurs only when the screen push occurs immediately before the edit in the command sequence Invoking an edit of a screen that is already displayed will not require use of the WAIT_DATA command Example of valid Dynamic Object Related Commands are ATTACH 347 SETPOINT MACHINE 1 Use PLC data source MACHINE_1 to animate dynamic object SETPOINT on screen 347 retaining any scaling already in effect ATTACH 347 SETPOINT MACHINE_1 DEG_C
305. phanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Contents Chapter 1 ADS Main Menu s t956 awnenie sag ttade au eeaGe iagi eaaa 1 1 Filling inthe ADS Main Menu 0 6 06 c cece ee 1 1 Executor Debug Mod s siener iei neman eens 1 5 Exiting the ADS Main Menu 6 ence eee ee 1 5 Chapter 2 Introduction to Using the ADS Builder 0005 2 1 Components of an ADS System 1 eee eens 2 1 Entering the ADS Builder Program 0 0 66 6 2 2 Choosing Items From a Menu 66 cccc cee eens 2 4 Managing the Builder s Memory 0 6 cc cece eee eee 2 6 Errors Loading Screens and Reports 0006 c runn eee eee 2 6 Object Lasts i atts Sek eee A a I oes a a ah TA Bs 2 7 Chapter 3 ConfigurationOperations cee cee cee cece e eee 3 1 Section 1 Modify System Parameters 0 eee sees 3 2 system Name e nirs iA i a hod ot ee ad oe acl 3 2 Terminal ees Vouk en EnA Galt Aes ek eee CANN es oe ee Ca Ns 3 2 Terminal Device sirri rae E E tthe eee 3 4 Printer Dvice inrer aee bh ao tars d sulle tala decane de alatitiiece t 3 5 Detatilt Sean Rate 059 csi feo ated ented doa Rad araced eee mage E 3 5 Default Alarm Scan Rate 0 0 cee cece 3 6 Startup Screed rene koni gre we A AS Vinton Bhat Wee hE pled owe 3 6 Error Messages for Modify System Parameters 4 3 7 Section 2 PLC Data Sources ccc cece eens eee eecees 3 8 New
306. play System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 Pressing the Enter key at this point will display the next command script in the list INITIALIZE ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate View a command script Name INITIALIZE PLCSETU R101 0 E PLCSETU R500 0 LOGMES Initialize complete Enter ONE valid command per line Press lt RETURN gt to view next command script else lt QUIT gt Pressing the Enter key again will return you to the menu page since INITIALIZE is the last command script in the list Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 85 List Command Scripts 3 86 A list of command script names is maintained in alphabetical order on the left side of the screen You can page through the total list of command script names To initiate listing of a system s command script names first select the List command scripts menu option either by cursoring to that option and pressing the Enter key or by pressing the L key In this example thirty command scripts are currently defined in the system When the Enter key is pressed the first group of command script names is displayed listed alphabetically along with a prompt on the status line giving you the choice of listing the next group of command script names or quitting the list function ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1
307. play formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Configuration operations Screen operations Alarm operations Report operations Load Save operations Print system summary Options PID Terminal Exit oeeoqodooqcooes Generating new system Choosing Items From a Menu 2 4 The ADS Builder is organized as a simple pick and choose menu system When a menu is displayed you can either use the and keys to select the desired option and then press the Enter key or you can press the key corresponding to the first character of the first word of the desired menu option In some cases the selection of a menu option will result in another menu of additional options being displayed This menu will appear as a separate box or window which will overlay the current menu When this happens it indicates that you have progressed down a level in the menu tree In other cases the selection of a menu option will result in the display of a data entry form which you will need to fill out On data entry forms you proceed from field to field by either pressing the or Enter key to select the next field or by pressing the key to select the previous field Pressing the Enter key when the last field of a form is selected will complete the form Note that the Enter key may be labeled Return on some keyboards for keyboards with a second Enter key located in the numeric keypad
308. ple The current value of R100 is 348 AREA 1 ALARMS 23 13 56 24 Jun 91 Line 2 on AUTO SHUTDOWN 23 13 40 24 Jun 91 UNKNOWN FAULT detected in Line 3 23 13 31 24 Jun 91 FIRE ALARM activated in Room 12 AREA 2 ALARMS 23 13 50 24 Jun 91 Maintenance SHUTDOWN on PRESS 7 23 13 40 24 Jun 91 UNKNOWN FAULT detected in Line 3 GFK 0641 Chapter 14 Running an ADS System Starting the ADS Execution 14 5 14 6 Alarm Acknowledgement Analarm may be acknowledged by the operator whether or not it is latched Operator acknowledgement of alarms can occur only on the topmost displayed alarm page on the terminal display and then only on the topmost entry displayed on that page see Command Driven Alarm Acknowledgement below for an alternative way to acknowledge alarms To enter the alarm acknowledgement mode press the key The topmost entry on the alarm page is displayed in reverse video to indicate that it may be confirmed by the operator The current value of R100 is 348 AREA 1 ALARMS 23 13 56 24 Jun 91 Line 2 on AUTO SHUTDOWN 23 13 40 24 Jun 91 UNKNOWN FAULT detected in Line 3 23 13 31 24 Jun 91 FIRE ALARM activated in Room 12 AREA 2 ALARMS 23 13 50 24 Jun 91 Maintenance SHUTDOWN on PRESS 7 23 13 40 24 Jun 91 UNKNOWN FAULT detected in Line 3 Only the topmost entry on the topmost alarm page may be confirmed The and keys are used to scroll alarm entries up and down on the alarm page so th
309. port details from EEEEEEEEEEEH CO PERRET EET HEH HEHH Depending upon the response entered into the from and to field several different listings can be generated The listing options are as shown below from lt idl gt from lt idl gt from from from lt idl gt from r from from to to to to to to to to lt id2 gt nn lt id2 gt lt id2 gt Wa nn Wa Wk print out reports idl to id2 print out report idl print out report id2 print out all reports up to id2 print out all reports from ill print out all reports print out all reports print out all reports Pressing the lt Quit gt key cancels the print operation After selection of the required range of reports to be printed the ADS Builder sends the information to the Print Destination specified using the Print Destination option see the Load Save menu discussion in Chapter 9 GFK 0641 Chapter 5 ReportOperations 5 7 Report detail information is formatted as shown in the following examples REPORT DETAILS LISTING Report Number 1 ENDOFDAY Rows 5 Columns 80 Dynamic Object DATE DISPLAY Start Row 1 End Row 1 Start Column 61 End Column 69 Data Source TODAYS DATE Additional Calc Data Format Display Value Yes Dynamic Object TIME DISPLAY Start Row 1 End Row 1 Start Column 72 End Column 79 Data Source TIME_OF_DAY Additional Calc Data Fo
310. pter 5 Report Operations Chapter 6 Screen Painter and Report Painter Chapter 7 Dynamic Objects Chapter 8 Alarm Operations Chapter 9 Load Save Operations Using ADS Builder on ADC Module Chapter 10 Print System Summary Chapter 11 Exiting the ADS Builder describes how to exit the ADS Builder after building or modifying a system Chapter 12 Terminal ADS Offline PC Based Builder Only Chapter 13 Options PID describes how you can configure a PID module through the Options PID menu without the need to use the PID option module s built in setup screen CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Preface Chapter 14 Running an ADS System Starting the ADS Execution describes how a system is executed once it has been built with the ADS Builder using the ADS Executor software It explains what you can expect when viewing data on the screen and how alarms are handled during system execution Chapter 15 Fault Tables Module describes the optional PLC and I O Fault Tables software module which you can access from the ADS main menu Chapter 16 PID Templates Module describes the optional PID Templates software module which you can access from the ADS main menu Appendix A CIMPLICITY 90 ADS System Builder Guide provides a quick reference to the ADS system setup parameters and parameter requirements for building an Operator Interface System A Key Functions pullout card provides a convenient
311. pter3 Configuration Operations 3 17 Modify a Data Source 3 18 An existing data source may be modified in much the same manner in which it was originally created All information concerning the data source may be changed except its name Changing the name of a data source requires you to first delete it and then recreate it with the desired new name To initiate a data source modification first select the Modify a data source menu option either by cursoring to the desired option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the M key ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Data Sources ADS Print Destination STDPRN PARTS_COUNT Delete a data source View current sources rsion List sources Print sources New data source odify a data source Enter the name of the data source to edit XR The ADS system will prompt you for the name of the data source to be modified by displaying a message at the lower left of the screen Enter the name of the data source to edit Only existing data sources may be modified the New data source menu option must be used in order to create a new data source As an example assume that you wish to modify the data source that you have previously named PARTS_COUNT Type the data source name into the prompt field After pressing the E
312. ptions PID menu item either cursor to it and press the Enter key or press the O key The Builder s PID menu screen will be displayed A list of currently defined loops is displayed on the left hand side of the screen A menu of available setup functions Create Loop Modify Loop Delete Loop Load File Save File Edit Startup and Exit is displayed in the lower right hand side of the screen LOOP SETUP Defined Loops Create Loop Modify Loop Delete Loop Load File Save File Create Loop Selecting the Create Loop menu option results in the loop creation data entry form being displayed Refer to Create a Loop Definition in Chapter 16 PID Templates Module for details on the data entry form LOOP SETUP Defined Loops Create Loop Definition Loop Name QR PLC Loop Number Process Name Group Name Loop Block Location PU SP Engineering Units Units Lower Bound PLC Lover Units Upper Bound PLC Upper CU Engineering Units Units Lower Bound PLC Lower Units Upper Bound PLC Upper User Configurable Y Manual Mode Y 13 2 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Modify Loop Selecting the Modify Loop menu option results in a prompt for the loop to modify Refer to Modify a Loop Definition in Chapter 16 PID Templates Module for details on modifying a loop definition LOOP SETUP Defined Loops STEAM_TANK_1 12 gt STEAM_TANK_i
313. r key In either case pressing the Enter key completes the entry The Latched field is selected next Latched Alarms may be defined to trigger whenever there is a transition into a given alarm state range or only whenever there is such a transition AND the alarm is not currently logged and unacknowledged In the former case the alarm is said to be unlatched in the latter case it is said to be latched If the Latched field is set to N an alarm will trigger every time there is a transition into an alarm state as defined by a given range If the field is set to Y an alarm will trigger only when both of the following conditions are met e A range in this alarm source is transitionally satisfied e Anunacknowledged occurrence of this alarm does not already exist Assigning an alarm source the attribute of latched is particularly useful when the source has a tendency to wander in and out of an alarm condition at a high frequency An alarm source of this type if not latched can cause a great number of occurrences to be logged in the system which differ only by a short amount of time Associated alarm pages and printer output can become saturated with information about what is actually a single condition However if it is important to log EVERY occurrence of a particular alarm then the alarm source should not be latched By default all alarm sources are unlatched Latching an alarm source only has an effect if there are alarm pages ass
314. r of basic steps Setup loop definitions Configure individual loops e Monitor and tune loops Loops must be setup prior to using them In the setup phase you have to indicate certain basic information about the loop such as its address in PLC memory etc Once loops are setup they can be configured if this has been permitted in the setup phase Configuration allows you at run time to alter the fundamental operating parameters for a loop which determines its mode of operation To assist in loop configuration the PID module provides monitoring and tuning screens In the monitoring screen you can examine the instantaneous relationship between the loop setpoint and process variables as well as drive the loop in a manual mode if this has been permitted in the setup phase This information is displayed using the pid faceplate In the tuning screen you can examine the relationship between the loop setpoint process variable and control variable over time You can also select the sampling rate being used This information is displayed as a three line trend CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 PID Startup File GFK 0641 The PID startup file is a file that retains the screen configurations of the last execution of the PID module This allows the PID module to begin in the same state that it was last executed Note It is recommended that you use the PC Based Builder to
315. r screen with optionally specified fore ground and background colors f and b TUNE_LOOP b Display the PID Loop Tuning screen with optionally specified fore ground and background colors fand b Note Foreground and background colors are specified as BLACK RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE MAGENTA CYAN or WHITE The PLC_FAULT and IO_FAULT commands are used to access the PLC fault table and the I O fault table screens respectively in the fault table option module An optional foreground background color specification may be provided as part of the command The SETUP_LOOP CONFIGURE_LOOP MONITOR_LOOP and TUNE_LOOP commands are used to access the setup configuration monitor and tuning screens respectively in the PID option module An optional foreground background color specification may be provided as part of the command Examples of valid Option Module Access Commands are PLC_FAULT Push the PLC fault table screen onto the display MONITOR_LOOP WHITE BLUE Push the PID loop monitoring screen onto the display using WHITE as the foreground color and BLUE as the background color 3 78 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 Table 3 27 Dynamic Object Related Commands Action Description ATTACH n 0 d c Attach dynamic object o on screen n to optionally PLC data source d using optionally new calculation c DYN_EDIT n 0 v Enter edit mo
316. ree values constitute the gain section e Proportional Gain Integral Gain e Differential Gain Chapter 16 PID TemplatesModule 16 11 All values are displayed raw from the PLC i e without scaling and have different meanings within the PLC For instance the Proportional Gain figure represents an interval expressed in units of 01 seconds LOOP CONFIGURATION LOOP TANK_1 ALGORITHM TYPE ISA ALGORITHM PROCESS Pressurizer GROUP Building 4 GAIN Proportional Integral 1000 Differential 100 OUTPUT Bias 0 Interval 01s 100 Clamp 120 00 DEG C Error 4 7 CSP PU Clamp 0 00 DEG C Deadband 0 00 PSI Slew C S 0 Deadband 0 00 PSI Invert Y N N Derivative ERROR Serur A EMONITORSTUNE SELECT GAIN OUTPUT SINPUT d MEXT Configuring the Loop Output Pressing the F7 key places the output section of the Loop Configuration into edit mode While in edit mode updates of the output section from the PLC are suspended The output section consists of five values Bias as a raw value Clamp upper in engineering units for CV Clamp lower in engineering units for CV Slew as a raw value counts per second Invert Output Y or N The Invert Output value can be toggled between Y and N by pressing the SPACEBAR or by pressing the key Note that the clamp outputs are entered in engineering units which are then automatically converted back into PLC values prior to being wr
317. reen change a value in a PLC memory prompt the operator for some action etc A command script can be attached to a function key when multiple actions are desired as the result of a single key being pressed A single command script may be used multiple times Reports are very similar to screens except that no function keys are provided and dynamic object animation is restricted to value display Reports are used to output formatted information to a printer An alarm source controls the access of data from the PLC s memory for the purpose of detecting a transition of the data into one of up to four predefined alarm ranges When a particular alarm source transitions into an alarm state a number of options may be specified The occurrence of the alarm may be logged to a printer including a timestamp of when it occurred One or more actions e g display a new screen issue a report etc may be triggered a command script may be used for defining multiple actions Alarms may also be logged to one or more alarm pages Alarm pages provide a mechanism which allows you to view and optionally acknowledge alarms Entering the ADS Builder Program Two versions of the ADS Builder program are available the ADC version and an IBM PC version You are strongly encouraged to use the PC based Builder whenever possible as you will typically find it easier to use overall Refer to chapter 8 in the ADS User s Manual GFK 0499 for details on the most e
318. report paint Report painter REPORT command 6 30 REVERSE attribute Running ADS system starting ADS execu tion error messages 14 10 Running an ADS system f14 1 Running fault tables module in stand alone mode 15 1 S SCN_EDIT command B 30 Screen assignments touch Screen Operations background color 4 6 copy screen 4 9 delete screen 4 8 error messages foreground color 4 5 key assignments 4 11 list screen menu modify screen 4 7 New screen print screen details screen paint touch screen assignments Screen painter Index Screen painter keyboard 6 2 SCREEN command 3 29 3 75 8 27 Screen startup B 6 Screen viewing data on 14 2 Screen ReportEditing character set selecting 6 7 controlling screen attributes cursor control deleting undeleting lines double high double high wide charac ters selecting drawing lines 6 19 error messages foreground color selecting keys 6 3 region cutting a region pasting a region selecting a text entering 6 11 typical screen Screen report editor help screen 6 26 Selecting a region 6 14 SETUP_LOOP command Sources PLC data Space color Stand_alone mode fault tables module 15 1 acy System ParametersStartup Screen 3 6 Startup initial Static text 6 11 System execution alarm handling 14 3 System summary print fo 1 System archiving T
319. ress lt RETURN gt to view next display format else lt QUIT gt Pressing the Enter key at this point will display the next display format in the list NEG_POS Pressing the Enter key again will return you to the menu page since NEG_POS is the last display format in the list CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 List Formats On the left hand side of the screen a list of display format names is maintained in alphabetical order The ADS system allows you to page through the total list of display format names To initiate the listing of a system s display format names first select the List formats menu option either by cursoring to the desired option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the L key In this example sequence thirty five display formats are currently defined in the system When the Enter key is pressed the first in alphabetical order group of display format names is displayed along with a prompt on the status line giving the choice of listing the next group of display format names or of quitting the list function ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Display Formats ADS Print Destination STDPRN FORMAT_01 FORMAT_13 FORMAT_02 FORMAT_14 FORMAT_03 FORMAT_15 FORMAT_04 FORMAT_16 FORMAT_05 FORMAT_17
320. rformed Error Messages for Translation Tables Error messages and their causes for Translation Tables are listed below ENTRY ERROR A value cannot be zero A scaler value A term of 0 is not permitted ENTRY ERROR No Translation entry name A name must be specified ENTRY ERROR Translation name is not unique ENTRY ERROR Translation name used in EUC table ENTRY ERROR Translation name used in lookup table A translation table entry name must be unique from any other translation table engineering units conversion table and lookup table entry name 3 48 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Section 5 Engineering Units Conversion Table Engineering units conversion table entries may be defined to perform value conversion to engineering units with optional data type conversion on the input value Where a data type conversion is not specified the input data type remains unchanged following the engineering units conversion Truncation of the converted value will be performed if necessary to maintain the data type There is no predefined limit on the number of engineering unit conversion table entries which may be defined for a given system you are constrained only by the amount of memory available on the ADC module Your engineering unit conversion table entries can either be defined here before referencing them with a PLC data source alarm source or with a dynamic object se
321. ring system execution are processed by a print spooler This is done so that printing may be performed in parallel with data monitoring and alarming The print spooler can only handle five outstanding requests at any one time If a sixth request is attempted with five outstanding requests the ADS Executor will reject the request If an alarm source evaluates an alarm condition and its log to printer flag is set to Y see Chapter 8 the defined text for the alarm condition and the time the alarm occurred if enabled will be sent to the printer As alarms have priority over reports an alarm log may occur while a report is being printed Section 6 Exit Executor You can exit a system in one of two ways 1 First and most frequently used a function key can be pressed to which the EXIT command has been assigned refer to the discussion on Key Assignments and Command Scripts in Chapter 3 for details 2 The second way to Exit a system is to press the lt Exit system execution gt key from any screen GFK 0641 Chapter 14 Running an ADS System Starting the ADS Execution 14 9 Error Messages for Running an ADS System Starting the ADS Execution 14 10 Error messages and their causes for running an ADS system and starting the ADS execution are listed below Cannot pop the top screen If only a single screen is currently displayed on the terminal display it may not be popped This error will also occur if you attempt to p
322. rm page on the display is to be removed The CLRALM command is provided to allow you to remove all alarm pages from the display Examples of valid Alarm Page Commands are ALARM 7 Replace currently displayed alarm page s with alarm page 7 PSHALM 14 Push alarm page 14 onto the current display POPALM 10 Pop the topmost alarm page from the display POPALM 4 Pop all alarm pages down to and including alarm page 4 from the display REMALM 52 Remove alarm page 52 from the display CLRALM Remove all alarm pages from the display Table 3 25 Alarm Source Related Commands Action Description ACTION_OFF Disableactions associated with alarms ACTION_ON Enable actions associated with alarms ACK_ALARM Acknowledgesallalarms in system ACK_ALARM lt page number gt Acknowledgesallalarms ona page ACK_ ALARM lt alam source gt Acknowledgesaparticularalarm The ACTION_OFF and ACTION_ON commands are used to control the execution of alarm source actions Among other things alarm source actions can push screens and alarm pages onto the display When viewing certain screens such as the PLC or I O fault table screens in the fault option module you may want to inhibit actions which will alter the terminal display the ACTION_OFF command provides this capability The alarm sources are still scanned printed logged to alarm pages etc only their associated actions are inhibited The ACTION_ON command re ena
323. rm pages the LATCHED flag is ignored Alarms Associated with Alarm Pages The rules followed by alarms associated with alarm pages are the same as those for alarms not associated with alarm pages plus the alarm TEXT will be logged in its GFK 0641 Chapter 14 Running an ADS System Starting the ADS Execution 14 3 14 4 associated alarm page or pages if one any have been associated with it If the TIMESTAMP flag is set the TEXT will be preceded on the same line by a time and date stamp Analarm page is constructed as a stack When a new alarm is logged to an alarm page it becomes the topmost entry on the page existing alarm entries are pushed down on the page There is no preassigned limit on the number of alarm entries that can be logged in a particular alarm page Each occurrence of an alarm requires that a small amount of available memory be allocated to store the information concerning the alarm When all available memory has been used the system will continue to execute but no new entries will be added to any alarm page all other actions associated with the alarm source will still be carried out however Analarm source which does not have the LATCHED flag set is added to its associated alarm page or pages each time there is a transition into one of the four alarm ranges defined for the alarm source Once an alarm transition has occurred other alarm ranges in the same alarm source cannot cause further alarms until there has been
324. rmat Display Value Yes Dynamic Object WIDGETS_MADE Start Row 4 End Row 4 Start Column 26 End Column 30 Data Source TTL_WIDGETS Additional Calc Data Format Display Value Yes Left_justify Dynamic Object WIDGETS_SCRP Start Row 4 End Row 4 Start Column 65 End Column 69 Data Source BAD_WIDGETS Additional Calc Data Format Display Value Yes Left_justify 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 EEE veoh ante Tiss dou staves talaga iba t 4 be dete ade Mie tenis So ciat a Sc E A EEE tir ee a cach N E E S er etser S E END OF DAY PRODUCTION REPORT TOTAL WIDGETS MADE 99999 Error Messages for Report Operations TOTAL WIDGETS SCRAPPED 99999 Error messages and their causes for Report Operations are listed below ENTRY ERROR Name not specified A name must be specified ENTRY ERROR report number is not unique Two reports may not have the same number ENTRY ERROR report number may not be zero A report number must be specified CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Chapter Screen Painter and Report Painter 6 The screen report editor is used when creating or printing a screen or report This chapter describes the various editing commands you will use for manipulating static text The following chapter Dynamic Objects explains how to animate data on screens and reports A typical screen report editing display is shown below SSSSS NNN Row Jij Col MMMM TTTTTTT
325. rs PLC data sources Display formats Translation table Engineering unit conversion Lookup table Command scripts 3 1 Section 1 Modify System Parameters When the Modify system parameters option is selected a data entry window is opened containing seven fields which may be set by the user System Name Terminal Terminal Device Printer Device Default Scan rate Default Alarm Scan rate and Startup screen ADS BUILDER Current System Name PUNCH Terminal CPC COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer NULL Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Modify System Params System Nane Terminal CPC Terminal Device COM2 Printer Device NULL Default Scan rate 1 00 Default Alarm Scan rate 1 00 Startup screen 0 Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts ecooocoeooooo System Name Terminal 3 2 When a new system is created it is assigned the default name specified on the ADS Menu program screen A system name can be from one to five alphanumeric and underscore _ characters in length the name is NOT case sensitive The system name is used in the generation of the names of the files making up the system a unique name relevant to your application should be used for a new system If a non unique system name
326. s GFK 0641 Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Configuration operations Screen operations Alarm operations Report operations Load Save operations Print system summary Terminal Exit Is a full listing required Y N JE Responding N to this prompt results in only a header page outlining the major statistics concerning the database A reply of Y results in not only a header page but also the entire contents of your database The listing will be directed to the Print Destination specified by way of the Load Save Operations menu see Chapter 9 A sample full listing appears on the next several pages 10 1 10 2 SYSTEM SUMMARY LISTING System Name TUTOR ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Terminal TMINI on COM2 Printer on NULL Default Data Scan 1 00 sec Default Alarm Scan 1 00 sec Startup Screen Screens Alarm Pages Reports Alarm Sources Data Sources Display Formats Translation Tables Lookup Tables Command Scripts SCREEN DETAILS LISTING Screen Number REG_ONE Start Row Start Column Image Background Dynamic Object R1_DISPLAY Start Row Start Column Data Source Additional Calc Data Format Display Value Avail for Edit End Row End Column Foreground End Row End Column R1_VALUE Yes Left_justify No CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Ref
327. s PID SCREEN INTIALIZATION MONITOR SCREEN FACEPLATE 1 aie 7 7 7 a 4 CONFIGURATION TOUCH KEYPAD DISABLED H OUTPUT INPUT CTRL_RM_TEMP Zone 5 Temp 3 STEAM_TANK_1 i Pressurize_1i EES STEAM_TANK_Z Pressurize_Zi 23 lt lt TAB to Move UP DOWN to Select ENTER to accept F18 SAUE to exit gt gt 13 6 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Pressing the Enter key selects the highlighted loop definition and enters it into the current initialization field The next field is automatically selected The Tab key may be used to skip a field without selecting any definition for it PID SCREEN INTIALIZATION MONITOR SCREEN p i L 7 7 7 a 4 STEAM_TANK_1 CONFIGURATION TOUCH KEYPAD DISABLED e i OUTPUT INPUT CTRL_RM_TEMP Zone 5 Temp cp STEAM_TANK_1 Pressurize_1 d2 STEAM_TANK_Z Pressurize_Zi 23 lt lt TAB to Move UP DOWN to Select ENTER to accept F18 SAUE to exit gt gt The Alt F10 key may be used to SAVE the current selections to the PID startup file PID STR and return you to the menu screen Pressing the Esc or F10 key will return you to the menu screen without saving any changes you might have made Exit Options PID Screen The Exit menu option returns you to the Builder main menu screen GFK 0641 Chapter 13 Options PID 13 7 Chapter Running an ADS System 1 4 Starting the ADS Execution GFK 0
328. s 348 AREA 1 ALARMS 23 13 56 24 Jun 91 Line 2 on AUTO SHUTDOWN 23 13 31 24 Jun 91 FIRE ALARM activated in Room 12 23 13 22 24 Jun 91 Valve 2 manually closed AREA 2 ALARMS 23 13 50 24 Jun 91 Maintenance SHUTDOWN on PRESS 7 Chapter 14 Running an ADS System Starting the ADS Execution 14 7 As mentioned above you can only confirm alarms on the topmost displayed alarm page The stack of alarm pages on the screen can be cycled by pressing the key multiple times This allows the operator to confirm alarms on covered alarm pages Continuing with our example sequence press the key while still in confirmation mode to access the AREA 1 ALARMS alarm page current value of R100 is 348 AREA 1 ALARMS 24 Jun 91 Line 2 on AUTO SHUTDOWN 23 13 31 24 Jun 91 FIRE ALARM activated in Room 12 23 13 22 24 Jun 91 Valve 2 manually closed 23 13 13 24 Jun 31 Value 1 OVER TEMPERATURE 23 13 01 24 Jun 91 Valve 2 manually closed When you want to exit the confirmation mode press the Z key Command Driven Alarm Acknowledgement The ACK_ALARM command see table 3 23 under Command Scripts provides an alternative method for acknowledging alarms It can be used whether or not any alarm pages are displayed and its three variants allow you in a single step to either a acknowledge all alarms in the entire system b acknowledge all alarms logged on a particular alarm page or c acknowledge all alarms generated by a particular
329. s default alarm scan rate 8 6 default scan rate error messages printer device startup screen B 6 system name terminal 3 2 terminal device terminals valid Module fault tables Module PID templates 16 1 MOTT 1 4 MONITOR_LOOP command 29 3 78 Monochrome computer GFK 0641 GFK 0641 MOVEA rc command MOVER r c command MPC terminal table 3 3 N New Alarm Page foreground and background colors 8 6 starting row rows starting column col ama New Alarm Source action additional calculation auto acknowledge latched log to printer name 8 15 a notify B 32 output text to alarm page s PLC location range 8 24 scan LE source data type text 8 29 timestamp 8 31 New Data Source additional calculation 3 16 name PLC references valid scan rate source data type source location New Display Format action data type New Lookup Table Entry input data type input range name output data type output value New Report report name report number Index start row rows start column columns New Screen background 4 6 foreground 4 5 image screen name screen number start row rows start column columns New Script command name New Translation name translation equation 3 39 NORMAL attribute NULL B 5 O Object lists 2 7 Off line PC based builder 12 1
330. s chapter Note that not all screens will be shown for each option since the general format for each one is similar Each of the options from each submenu will be described in the text Any unique screens or screens showing a particular operation for the first time will also be shown ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT CON2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Screens ADS Print Destination STDPRN ew screen Modify screen Screen paint Delete screen Copy screen Key assignments List screens Print screen details GFK 0641 4 1 New Screen When the New screen option is selected a data entry window is opened containing nine fields Screen Name Screen Number Start Row Rows Start Column Columns Image Foreground and Background ADS BUILDER Current System Name Terminal COIT C0M2 DRILL Default Scan Rate Printer Dir Screens Screen Name Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination C0M1 NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM 1 00 s 1 00 s STDPRN Create Screen Screen Name Screen Number Start Row 1 Start Column 1 Image N Foreground WHITE Background BLACK Rows Columns 80 Norm Rev Trans 23 The screen name is used to assign a descriptive tag to a screen Unlike other components of a system the screen name is NOT used to uniquely
331. s must be rectangular in shape irregular shaped objects are not supported by the ADS system Dynamic objects consist of two major parts 1 the characters edited onto the screen and 2 the PLC data source and display format which animate the object Whenever the cursor is positioned anywhere on a dynamic object the status area is updated to show the name of the dynamic object in reverse video Creating a Dynamic Object GFK 0641 The first step in creating a dynamic object is to decide what is to be displayed and where it is to be placed on the screen The most frequent application of dynamic objects is to display numerical and text data on the screen Data formatting characters are used to indicate how big a field to reserve for the display of a value or string The character 9 is used to indicate the display of a numeric digit In the case of floating point numbers the character period is used to indicate where the decimal point is to be displayed The character X capital X only is used to indicate the display of an ASCII character The sequence of three X characters is also used to indicate the display of a STATE value which is either ON or OFF Some special formatting characters are also available for date and time representation Note that these character sequences are ONLY available when the TIME and DATE PLC locations are used in the referenced data source 7 2 For time display the following formatting characters are availab
332. sed to obtain a list of existing additional calculations or to create a new one A custom translation allows you to apply the formula A Input Value B C where A is the scaling factor B is the pre scaling offset C is the post scaling offset to the data retrieved from the PLC with the data interpreted according to the Source Data Type field Note that the formula defined here is the same as defined for translation table entries In general if a given translation is to be used only once it should be defined in the PLC data source as a custom translation If it is to be used multiple times it is better to define the actual translation only once as a translation table entry and then reference the entry as the additional calculation The format for defining a custom translation is A B C where the parentheses and commas are required parts of the format The range of data acceptable for each parameter is given in the table below Table 3 3 Data Range for a Custom Translation Minimum Maximum Parameter Value Value A 100000000 1000000000 B 100000000 1000000000 C 100000000 1000000000 1 Only 7 digits of precision 2 Maximum of 6 digits to right of decimal point CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 In the example below assume that the value retrieved from R1 is in the range of 200 to 200 but that the ADS system needs to work on t
333. select Video clear GOLD F1 GOLD KP1 Color Black red green Yellow Blue Magenta Cyan White Character set GOLD F4 GOLD KP4 Normal Alternate Set Character Set 2 Character Set 3 Double wide GOLD W GOLD W Double size GOLD D GOLD D Draw toggle non rectangular objects or lines GOLD F5 GOLD KP5 Draw area rectangular and straight lines F5 KP5 Delete line F14 PF4 Undelete line GOLD F14 GOLD PF4 Select toggle F3 KP3 Cut area F6 KP6 Paste area GOLD F6 GOLD KP6 Startdynamic predefinedobject GOLD F7 GOLD KP7 End dynamic object F7 KP7 End predefined objects GOLD F2 GOLD KP2 Delete dynamic object GOLD F8 GOLD KP8 Modify dynamic object F8 KP8 Copy dynamic object F9 KP9 Paste dynamic object GOLD F9 GOLD KP9 Touch screen grid F13 PF3 Touch screen assignments GOLD F13 GOLD PF3 MPC CPC EIBM VIBMt Insert Home Esc or F10 Alt F10 Alt S AW AX GOLD lt GOLD gt GOLD GOLD J F1 Alt F1 F4 Alt F4 Alt W Alt D Alt F5 F5 End GOLD END F3 F6 Alt F6 Alt F7 F7 Alt F2 Alt F8 F8 F9 Alt F9 Delete GOLD Delete t Num Lock must be set to OFF for 83 key keyboard F11 and F12 keys on the enhanced AT and PS 2style keyboards cannot be used use SHIFT F1 and SHIFT F2 The MPC CPC EIBM and VIBM terminal tables are used for the PC based Builder only 1 Keys marked as Alt x refer to the appropriate alternate key Alt key held down while simultaneously pressing the appropriate key 2 Keys marked as x refer to
334. st place the cursor somewhere on the existing dynamic object to be copied The value of R100 is 99999 DRILL 50 Row 3 Col amp Text Static iR100_DISPLAY Pressing the lt Copy dynamic object gt key executes the copy dynamic operation An informative message is displayed at the bottom of the screen to signal the completion of the operation The value of R100 is 99999 Dynamic OBJECT copied to intermediate buffer GFK 0641 Chapter 7 Dynamic Objects 7 13 To begin the paste dynamic object operation first place the cursor at the upper left hand corner position where the copied object is to be pasted The value of R100 is 99999 The value of R101 is _ DRILL 50 Col amp Text Static Pressing the lt Paste dynamic object gt key executes the paste dynamic object operation The dynamic object is placed on the screen at the desired position and is shown in blinking reverse video A data entry form is opened up at the bottom of the screen so that you can identify the dynamic object The data entry form is initially filled out with the data of the copied dynamic object except for its name which must be unique You must assign a unique name to the dynamic object and may alter any field as described above for creating or modifying a dynamic object The value of R100 is 99999 The value of R101 is gEpEE Copy Dynamic Ob ject Name Data Source R100_VAL Additional Calc Display Format NEG_POS Display Value
335. st read ConSwp Constant sweep mode setting 1 Constant sweep mode enabled for current control program 0 Constant sweep mode not enabled Ovr Swp Oyersweep flag if constant sweep mode enabled Shows whether the constant Sweep value was exceeded on the last sweep 1 Constant sweep value was exceeded 0 Normal sweep The Z MEMORY and MAX_BLOCK locations are internal to ADS i e they are not present in the PLC There are 1024 references in Z memory Z1 through Z1024 These are typically used for special interlocks in your system The demonstration systems provided with the product have a number of examples that show how Z memory can be used MEMORY returns the number of free unallocated bytes of memory left on the ADC module while the Executor is running Itis useful while you are developing your system to monitor the maximum runtime memory usage You should specify a source data type of LONGWORD Any dynamic object referencing a data source whose PLC location is MEMORY should allow for up to a 6 digit number You may need to monitor GFK 0641 Chapter 8 AlarmOperations 8 19 8 20 memory usage on multiple screens since memory shrinks and expands as screens are pushed and popped Also alarm logging continually shrinks memory until alarms are acknowledged MAX_BLOCK functions identically to MEMORY except that it returns the size in bytes of the largest contiguous block of free unallocated memory The typical i
336. st the currently selected folder for the PC based Builder whether or not it was originally loaded from that disk To initiate the saving of the system currently loaded in the ADS Builder to PC first select the Archive System to PC menu option either by cursoring to this option on the menu and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the A key When the Enter key is pressed the ADS Builder immediately begins saving the currently loaded system to the PC disk As noted previously you must have selected the appropriate folder for the system archive and be running TERMF on the host computer prior to beginning the archive operation The first file saved is the system parameters configuration file A message is displayed on the prompt message line indicating that the system is currently saving the system configuration in file lt system gt CFG The second file saved is the alarm definitions file A message is displayed on the prompt message line indicating that the system is currently saving the alarm definitions in file lt system gt ALM From this point the ADS Builder will save each of the screen files and then the report files A message will be displayed on the prompt message line indicating which file is currently being saved If a screen or report file has not been loaded into the ADS Builder s working memory prior to invoking the save operation it will be loaded first and then written out to ensure that all files making up the
337. stem name with RAM if the system is located on the RAM drive or by prefacing the system name with PC if the system is located on the PC disk see statement above concerning the PC disk GFK 0641 Chapter 9 Load Save Operations 9 3 9 4 The following example screens show the sequence of loading a system When the Enter key is pressed the specified system named MEMRY is located on the PC disk A message is displayed on the prompt message line indicating that the system configuration file MEMRY CFG is being loaded into the ADS Builder ADS BUILDER Current System Name RAM DRILL Terminal CIBM COM1 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer CON2 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Memory 127488 Bytes Startup Screen ADS Print Destination PC DRILL PRN Screens 26 Alarm pages 28 Reports 1 Configuration operations Alarm sources 2 Screen operations Data sources 36 Alarm operations Display formats 36 Report operations Translations entries 28 Lookup table entries 26 Print system summary Command scripts 30 Exit Loading system configuration parameters from MEMRY CFG Next a message is displayed on the prompt message line indicating that the alarm definition file MEMRY ALM is being loaded into the ADS Builder ADS BUILDER Current System Name RAM DRILL Terminal CIBM COM1 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer CON2 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Memory 127488 Bytes Startup Screen ADS Print
338. sting the next group or of quitting the list function ADS BUILDER Terminal COIT Printer Dir Trans lations TRANS_01 TRANS_02 TRANS_03 TRANS_04 TRANS_O5 TRANS_06 TRANS_0 TRANS_08 TRANS_03 TRANS_10 TRANS_11 TRANS_12 Current System Name COM2 COM1 NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM TRANS_13 TRANS_14 TRANS_15 TRANS_16 TRANS_17 TRANS_18 TRANS_19 TRANS_20 TRANS_21 TRANS_22 TRANS_23 TRANS_24 DRILL Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination 1 00 s 1 00 s STDPRN Delete a translation View current entries rsion List translations Neu translation Modify a translation Print translations Press lt RETURN gt to list more entries else lt QUIT gt Pressing the Enter key at this point will display the remaining translation table entries ADS BUILDER Terminal COIT Printer Dir Translations TRANS_25 TRANS_26 TRANS_2 TRANS_28 Current System Name COM2 COM1 NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM DRILL Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination 1 00 s 1 00 s STDPRN Delete a translation View current entries rsion List translations Neu translation Modify a translation Print translations Press lt RETURN gt to list more entries else lt QUIT gt Pressing the lt Quit gt key exits the list operation The translation table entry names currently d
339. t number gt sSCN screen definition is created where lt number gt is the screen number that you assigned when the screen was created A screen file contains the static text and attributes for the screen definitions for the dynamic objects appearing on the screen and the function key assignments for the screen also touch screen assignments for touch terminals For every report that you create a file lt system gt lt number gt REP report definition is created where lt number gt is the report number that you assigned when the report was created A report file contains the static text for the screen as well as definitions for the dynamic objects appearing on the report CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 9 Section 1 Load System An existing system may be loaded into the ADS Builder from either the ADCs RAM disk or from the PC disk currently selected folder on an attached computer running TERMP To initiate the loading of a new system into the ADS Builder first select the Load System menu option either by cursoring to that option on the menu and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the L key When Load system option is selected the ADS Builder will prompt you for the name of the system to be loaded In this example assume that you want to load the system named MEMRY into the ADS Builder Simply type the desired system name into the prompt field ADS BU
340. t screen on the display is to be removed Examples of valid Screen Commands are SCREEN 7 Replace currently displayed screen s with Screen 7 PSHSCN 4 Push Screen 4 onto the currently displayed screen s PSHSCN 12 10 6 Push Screen 12 onto the currently displayed screen s positioning it at row 10 column 6 of the physical terminal screen POPSCN 0 Pop the topmost screen from the display POPSCN 16 Pop all screens down to and including 16 from the display REMSCN 8 Remove screen 8 from the display Table 3 24 Alarm Page Commands Action Description ALARM r Removeall alarm pages and overlay n PSHALM n Overlayalarm page n POPALM r2 Remove lastalarm page overlaid or all down to and including n REMALM r Remove lastalarm page overlaid or only n CLRALM Removeall currently displayedalarm pages lifn 0a prompt will appear on the terminal s display line asking you to specify the screen alarm page to be selected 2 If n 0 only the most recently pushed screen alarm page will be removed from the terminaldisplay 3 If n 0 all alarm pages will be removed from the screen and no new alarm page will be displayed Five commands are provided to allow you to manipulate the alarm pages on your terminal display when your system is executed The ALARM command is used to remove all the alarm pages currently displayed on the terminal screens are unaffected and overlay a single alarm page in their place
341. te Selecting a Loop to Monitor Once the desired faceplate has been identified as the current faceplate a loop can be selected for display on that faceplate To select the loop to be displayed press F5 A prompt will appear requesting the name or number of a loop to be monitored on the current faceplate A loop selection menu which contains all of the existing loop names is also displayed CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Upon entry of a valid loop name or number the current faceplate will be updated to show the name of the loop the engineering units for the PV and CV values the current PV SP and CV values scaled to their engineering units the current PV and SP values as bar charts scaled to represent a value between 0 and 100 of the designated engineering units See Modify a Loop Definition above for information on selecting a valid loop If a 0 zero is entered for a loop number the loop that is being displayed in the current faceplate will be erased and that faceplate will be left blank The loop faceplates are updated every one second with fresh data from the PLC Using Manual Mode for a Loop Manual mode can only be used if the loop setup allows manual mode operation That is the Manual Mode flag has been set to Y Placing a loop in manual mode lets you adjust the value of the CV directly without the value being affected by the loop itself For fur
342. te a data source View current sources rsion List sources Print sources Press lt RETURN gt to list more entries else lt QUIT gt In the example sequence shown above thirty five data sources are currently defined in the system Upon pressing the Enter key the first alphabetical order group of data source names is displayed along with a prompt on the status line giving the user the choice of listing the next group of data source names or of quitting the list function Pressing the Enter key at this point will display the remaining data source names Pressing the lt Quit gt key exits the list operation The data source names currently displayed on the screen will remain displayed GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 21 Print Sources The Print source option allows the details of the defined data sources to be printed on an attached printer When running the ADC version of the ADS Builder access to the Print options is only available if the ADS Print Module and Spooler are installed To initiate a print of the defined data sources select the Print sources option by either cursoring to the option and pressing the Enter key or by pressing the P key Terminal Printer Dir ADS BUILDER COIT Data Sources DATA_SRC_01 DATA_SRC_02 DATA_SRC_03 DATA_SRC_04 DATA_SRC_05 DATA_SRC_06 DATA_SRC_0 DATA_SRC_08 DATA_SRC_09 DATA_SRC_10 DATA_SRC_11 DATA_SRC_12 Current System Name COM2
343. ted As indicated above only existing data sources which are not referenced on any screen in the system may be deleted ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT COM2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Data Sources ADS Print Destination STDPRN PARTS_COUNT Delete a data source View current sources rsion List sources New data source Modify a data source Print sources Enter the name of the data source to delete Xx For example to delete the data source PARTS_COUNT type the data source name PARTS_COUNT into the prompt field When you press the Enter key the current form for the data source is displayed on the screen along with a prompt on the status line asking for confirmation of the delete When you press the Enter key at this point the data source will be deleted from the system Upon deletion of the data source you are returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed in the status line indicating that the deletion was completed If you press the lt Quit gt key indicating that the data source deletion should be aborted you will be returned to the menu page no message will be displayed to indicate that the deletion was aborted If a data source is specified which does not currently exist you will be returned to the menu page with the message Invalid data source specified displayed on
344. tem Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 Foreground Color Note The Foreground and Background see below fields are supported only for the color terminals Current supported color terminals are color OIT COIT color computer running TERMF CIBM and the Nematron color touch OIT For all other terminals these fields are ignored regardless of what they might be set to The Foreground field is used to select the default foreground color which will be used for the display of characters on the screen When you cursor onto the Foreground field a window is opened up on the screen showing what choices are available Eight colors are supported black red green yellow blue magenta cyan and white By default the ADS system selects WHITE as the foreground color You must select a foreground color which is different from the selected background color ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Screens ADS Print Destination STDPRN Create Screen en Name Number art Row 23 Colum Columns 80 Norm Rev Trans If you wish to accept the default selection of WHITE press the Enter key If you wish to select a different color move the cursor to that color then press the Enter key Also notice that the Background field is selected next reverse video block is no
345. ter a screen number Type the screen number into the prompt field and press the Enter key Touch points for screen 1 Modify screen Screen paint Delete screen Copy screen Key assignments List screens Print screen details Touch screen assignments The first field on the touch point grid is displayed in reverse video To move between touch points press the Enter key or key to move to the next touch point or key to move to the previous touch point The values entered into the touch point fields represent the numeric key value to be returned when you actually touch the touch point GFK 0641 Chapter 4 ScreenOperations 4 13 The values of the various keys on a Touch Mini OIT are defined in GFK 0361 the Mini Operator Interface Terminal User s Manual page 5 28 in GEK 90817 the Series Six OIT User s Manual Appendix A pages A 1 through A 4 and Appendix B of the ADS User s Manual The same touch point values are used by the Nematron touch OIT terminals When all of the required values have been entered press the lt Save gt key or Enter key when positioned on the final field If you should decide to abandon the changes press the lt Quit gt key Note Touch point assignments may also be made and viewed from within the Screen Painter Print Screen Details 4 14 The Print screen details option allows details of the defined screens to be printed on an attached printer When running the ADC version
346. the F8 key will have no effect 1 Because the CV value is displayed in engineering units the rate of change will depend on the degree of scaling being used Within the PLC the value of CV is incremented by 1 each loop solution time i e the value displayed as LOOP INTERVAL on the loop configuration screen To remove the manual mode window and place the loop back into automatic mode press the lt Quit gt key The manual mode window is then removed and the soft key options revert back to what they were before Using Setpoint Control for the Loop Setpoint control can only be used if the loop setup allows manual mode operation Manual Mode flag has been set to Y Setpoint control lets you enter setpoint values directly overriding the normal setpoint value in the PLC For further details on the effects of setpoint control refer to the applicable Logicmaster 90 Software Programming Reference Manual Note The Setpoint Controller causes the PLC to stop taking its setpoint value from the specified location for the loop Instead the value is taken from the setpoint location within the loop control block Chapter 16 PID TemplatesModule 16 17 When the setpoint controller is exited the PLC commences to take the setpoint value from the specified location again effectively causing any modification to the setpoint value made in the setpoint controller to be overwritten To prevent this if desired the setpoint location should be speci
347. the appropriate control key Ctrl key held down while simultaneously pressing the appropriate key 3 Keys marked as GOLD xxx refer to the two key sequence of the GOLD key followed by the appropriate key Appendix A CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Display System Builder Guide A 9 Create Dynamic Object Name Data Source Name Additional Calculation Display Format Display Value Hexadecimal Notation Left Justify Zero Fill Min Max Immediate Write Alarm Operations New Modify Alarm Page Report Name Number Starting Row Rows Starting Column Columns Foreground Background Heading XXXXXXXXXXXxX 12 Max PLC Data Source Leave blank or Lookup table entry Translation table entry Engineering Units Conversion table entry Custom translation A Input Value B C Leave blank or Display format Y or N Y or N Y or N Y or N N XXXXXXXX 8 characters max 1 tor 299 1 to 20 23 to 3 1 to 60 80 to 10 White Black XXX XXX 40 characters max A 10 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 Alarm Sources New Modify Alarm Sources Name Source Data Type PLC Location Scan Rate Additional Calc Range Action PLCGETB loc PLCGETBY loc PLCGETW loc PLCGETI loc PLCGETL loc PLCGETS loc PLCGETF loc PLCSETB loc val PLCSETBY loc val PLCSETW loc val PLCSETI loc val PLCSETL loc val
348. the dynamic object is to be used for data entry at run time When either the DYN_EDIT or SCN_EDIT command is used dynamic objects that have been defined as being available for edit can have values entered by the operator If the Available for Edit flag is set to Y three additional fields are displayed on the data entry form for the dynamic object Min Max Immediate Write N The Min and Max fields are used to specify the minimum and maximum values that may be entered by the operator at run time Both fields should always be specified since they both default to 0 otherwise If the Immediate Write flag is set it indicates that the operator entered value is immediately written to the PLC This field affects the operation of the SCN_EDIT command Normally the values would be written to the PLC after all dynamic objects on the screen have had new values entered Note that any additional calculations specified for the dynamic object will be applied in reverse in the case of data entry For example if the value from the PLC is multiplied by 10 prior to display the new value entered by the operator will be divided by 10 before it is written to the PLC location GFK 0641 Chapter 7 Dynamic Objects 7 9 Modifying a Dynamic Object The data entry form information for a dynamic object only may be modified once the dynamic object is initially created All information appearing on the data entry form may be changed except the name of the dynamic
349. the first listed alphabetically group of alarm source names is displayed along with a prompt on the status line giving you the choice of listing the next group of alarm source names or of quitting the list function ADS BUILDER Current System Name Terminal COIT COM2 Printer COM1 Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Alarm Sources ADS Print ALARM_SRC_01 ALARM_SRC_02 ALARM_SRC_13 ALARM_SRC_14 Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen DRILL 1 00 s 1 00 s Destination STDPRN ALARM_SRC_03 ALARM_SRC_04 ALARM_SRC_05 ALARM_SRC_06 ALARM_SRC_0 ALARM_SRC_08 ALARM_SRC_09 ALARM_SRC_10 ALARM_SRC_11 ALARM_SRC_12 ALARM_SRC_15 ALARM_SRC_16 ALARM_SRC_1 ALARM_SRC_18 ALARM_SRC_19 ALARM_SRC_20 ALARM_SRC_21 ALARM_SRC_22 ALARM_SRC_23 ALARM_SRC_24 Press lt RETURN gt to list more entries else lt QUIT gt New alarm source Modify an alarm source Delete an alarm source Copy an alarm source View current sources List sources Print sources Pressing the Enter key at this point will display the remaining thirteen alarm source names ADS BUILDER Current System Name Terminal COIT COM2 Printer COM1 Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Alarm Sources ADS Print ALARM_SRC_25 Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen DRILL 1 00 s 1 00 s Destination STDPRN ALARM_SRC_26 ALARM_SRC_2 Press lt RETURN gt to list more entries else
350. the following function Output Value Ax Input Value B C A 1 B 0 C 0 Specify Data Types Y N Y Input Data Type WORD Output Data Type WORD Name Every translation table entry must be given a name This name must be unique with regards to translation table engineering units conversion table and lookup table entry names but does not need to be unique from all other names in the ADS system For example a PLC data source might be named NEW_VALUE and a translation table entry might also be named NEW_VALUE A name may be from one to twelve alphanumeric and underscore characters and is NOT case sensitive For example assume that you want to create a translation table entry with the name ONE_HALE Type the name ONE_HALF into the Name field To complete the entry press the Enter key Note that after you press the Enter key to complete the name entry the next field which is equation field A is selected Translation Equation The translation equation defines the linear scaling to be applied to the input data value This equation is represented by the function New Value A Input Value B C where A is the scaling factor B is the pre scaling offset C is the post scaling offset A B and C are stored as floating point numbers Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 39 The following table defines the possible value range for each parameter Table 3 14 Data Range for a Translation Equation
351. the menu page since AREA_4 is the last alarm page in the list CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 List Pages On the left hand side of the screen is a list of alarm page names and numbers maintained in numerical alarm page number order You can page through the total list of alarm page names and numbers To initiate listing of a system s alarm page names and numbers first select the List pages menu option either by cursoring to that option and then system When the Enter key is pressed the first group of alarm page names and numbers are displayed along with a prompt on the status line giving you the choice of listing the next group of names and numbers or of quitting the list function ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir N ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Alarm Pages ADS Print Destination STDPRN ALMPG_01 1 ALMPG_13 ALMPG_02 2 ALMPG_14 ALMPG_03 3 ALMPG_15 ALMPG_04 4 ALMPG_16 New alarm page ALMPG_O5 5 ALMPG_17 Modify an alarm page E ALMPG_06 6 ALMPG_18 Delete an alarm page ALMPG_07 7 ALMPG_19 View alarm pages ALMPG_08 8 ALMPG_20 List pages ALMPG_09 9 ALMPG_21 Print page details ALMPG_10 10 ALMPG_22 Alarm sources ALMPG_11 11 ALMPG_23 ALMPG_12 12 ALMPG_24 Press lt RETURN gt to list more entries else lt QUIT gt Pressing the Enter key
352. the next entry in the list PERCENT Pressing the Enter key again will return you to the menu page since PERCENT is the last entry in the list GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 55 List Unit Conversion On the left hand side of the screen a list of engineering units conversion table entries is maintained in alphabetical order The ADS Builder lets you page through the total list of entry names To initiate the listing of a system s engineering units conversion table names first select the List unit conversions menu option either by cursoring to the option and then pressing either the Enter or L key In the example below twenty eight entries are currently defined in the system When the Enter key is pressed the first in alphabetical order group of entry names is displayed along with a prompt on the status line giving you the choice of listing the next group or of quitting the list function ADS BUILDER Current System Name Terminal COIT COM2 Printer COM1 Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Eng unit conversions EUC_01 EUC_02 EUC_03 EUC_04 EUC_05 EUC_06 EUC_0 7 EUC_08 EUC_09 EUC_10 EUC_11 EUC_12 EUC_13 EUC_14 EUC_15 EUC_16 EUC_1 EUC_18 EUC_19 EUC_20 EUC_21 EUC_22 EUC_23 EUC_24 DRILL Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination 1 00 s 1 00 s STDPRN Delete a unit conversion View current entries h List unit conversions N
353. the number of the alarm page to delete J As an example of deleting an alarm page assume that you want to delete alarm page 34 AREA_4 To select this alarm page number type it into the prompt field When you press the Enter key the form for the alarm page is displayed along with a prompt on the status line asking you to confirm the delete When you press the Enter key at this point the alarm page will be deleted from the system Upon deletion of the alarm page you are returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed on the status line indicating that the deletion was completed If you press the lt Quit gt key indicating that the alarm page delete should be canceled you are returned to the menu page no message will be displayed to indicate that the deletion was canceled If you specify an alarm page number which does not currently exist you will be returned to the menu page with the message Invalid alarm page specified displayed on the status line GFK 0641 Chapter 8 Alarm Operations 8 9 View Alarm Pages 8 10 The ADS system allows you to view all the existing alarm pages in a system one by one in numerical order To initiate the viewing of a system s alarm pages select the View alarm pages menu option either by cursoring to that option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the V key In the following example two alarm pages are currently defined in the system AREA_3 and AREA_4 When
354. the screen giving the additional options of New alarm source Modify an alarm source Delete an alarm source Copy an alarm source View current sources and List sources Print sources Each of these options is described in the sections which follow Not all screens for all options are shown since the general format for each option is similar ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Alarm Sources ADS Print Destination STDPRN ws lew alarm source Modify an alarm source Delete an alarm source Copy an alarm source View current sources List sources Print sources CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Section 3 New Alarm Source When the New alarm source option is selected a data entry window is opened containing fourteen fields Name Source Data Type PLC Location Scan Rate Additional Cal Range Action Text Log to printer Timestamp Latched Notify Auto Acknowledge and Output text to following alarm pages ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name Source Data Type WORD PLC Location Scan Rate s or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp N Latched N Notify N Auto ack N Output text to fol
355. ther details on the effects of manual mode on the loop refer to the Logicmaster 90 for 90 70 or Series 90 30 90 20 Programmable Controllers Reference Manual To place a loop in manual mode first select the required faceplate as the current faceplate then press F7 When the loop has been placed into manual mode a small window is placed over part of the faceplate LOOP MONITOR 1 2 3 LOOP TANK_1 100 100 75 MANUAL CU CONTROLLER 50 109 871 DEG C 25 120 00 UP 0 00 DOWN 0 75 00 109 87 CURRENT Mo A O l EDIT ORAM UPURAMP DNGNO Rampa MEXT Manual mode selected Two other changes will occur once the manual mode window has been placed the CV value if it has been changing will remain at its last value the soft keys at the bottom of the screen will change to reflect available functionality while in manual mode GFK 0641 Chapter 16 PID TemplatesModule 16 15 To edit the current CV value press the F5 key This will highlight the CV value and place the cursor in that field Enter the desired value and press Return This causes the new value to be written to the PLC A message is displayed informing you that the CV value has been modified Note The CV value may not be able to adjust immediately to the entered value Depending on how the loop has been configured it may be necessary for the loop to incrementally change at some defined maximum value until it reaches the desired value LOO
356. tion and pressing the Enter key or by pressing the P key ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir N ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Eng unit conversions ADS Print Destination STDPRN EUC_01 EUC_13 EUC_02 EUC_14 EUC_03 EUC_15 EUC_04 EUC_16 EUC_05 EUC_1 EUC_06 EUC_18 EUC_0 EUC_19 EUC_08 EUC_20 EUC_09 EUC_21 EUC_10 EUC_22 EUC_11 EUC_23 EUC_12 EUC_24 Print engineering tables from I to A prompt is displayed at the bottom of the screen New unit conversion Modify a unit conversion Delete a unit conversion View current entries h List unit conversions Print unit conversions Print unit conversions from kkkt to HHFHFHFHHHHE Depending upon the response entered into the from and to fields several different listings can be generated The listing options are shown below note that engineering units conversion table entries are handled in alphabetical order from lt eucl gt to lt euc2 gt gt print out EUC s between lt eucl gt to lt euc2 gt from lt eucl gt to gt print out EUC lt eucl gt from to lt euc2 gt gt print out EUC lt euc2 gt from to lt euc2 gt gt print out all EUC s up to lt euc2 gt from lt eucl gt toe ae gt print out all EUC s beginning with lt eucl gt from to 7
357. to disk see Chapter 9 Load Save Operations prior to accessing the Terminal menu option Select the Terminal menu option either by cursoring to that option on the menu and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the T key ADS BUILDER Current System Name MEMRY Terminal YT100 STDIO Default Scan Rate Printer NULL Default Alarm Scan Rate Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens 10 Alarm pages Reports Configuration operations Alarm sources Screen operations Data sources Alarm operations Display formats Report operations Translations entries Load Save operations Lookup table entries Print system summary Command scripts Terminal Exit GFK 0641 12 1 Initially upon entering the Terminal screen only a blank screen will be observed Press the Enter key If the ADC module has been hard reset you should see a gt character in the upper left hand corner of the screen If you do not hard reset the ADC module again To start your ADS system executing on the target terminal press the AIt E key hold down the Alt key while pressing the E key After a short delay you will see various startup information displayed on the target terminal s screen If your system is present only on your computer you should also see that your hard disk is being accessed indicating that the system is being loaded from the PC drive by the ADS Executor 12 2 CIMPL
358. ts data from the PLC the scan time is affected by several milliseconds As a default the system alarm scan rate is set up for every 1 0 second This value may be changed in increments of 0 25 seconds to any value within the range 0 25 to 9999 75 seconds Note It is possible particularly with the Series 90 30 ADC to select a scan rate too small for the amount of data specified to be gathered In such a case the ADS Executor will attempt to self regulate itself to slow down the requests to a rate it can keep up with It is possible however that in conjunction with keyboard input screen response may appear to temporarily freeze Slowing down scan rates can alleviate this situation Startup Screen The Startup Screen field designates which screen of the possibly multiple screens making up a system is to be displayed first when the Executor is run This number can be any legal screen number ranging from 1 to 999 By default this field is initialized to 0 which allows you to specify the required startup screen at run time A starting screen may not be specified until the screen actually exists If the Modify System Params data entry screen is exited without specifying a starting screen number which you must do if the starting screen has not been created yet the ADS Builder displays the warning message Warning no startup screen yet specified on the message line at the bottom of the screen Prior to running the system via th
359. tup Utility When the PID module is correctly installed on the ADC board the ADS Menu Program will indicate that the module is LOADED From the ADS Main Menu select an appropriate terminal type for the current display device e g COIT Select option 7 from the menu Run ADS PID A message PID Module Starting will be displayed followed by the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS copyright screen If a PID setup file is located see Save Loop Definitions to File below it will be restored at this time and a message will be displayed to indicate that this is the case If a PID startup file is located see PID Module Startup File below this information will also be loaded and an appropriate message will be displayed After the PID startup file information has been loaded the PID Configuration screen will be displayed with the information for the loop specified in the startup file for the configuration screen providing the loop name specified is a valid one If no PID startup file is located an appropriate message is displayed and the first loop located in the PID setup file is displayed on the PID Configuration Screen If no PID setup file is located an appropriate message is displayed to indicate this In this case the first screen displayed is the PID Loop Setup Screen Pressing the Exit function key will return you to the menu program GFK 0641 16 1 Accessing the PID Module From an ADS System The PID module can be accessed from
360. tware package For detailed information on operations required for building an Operator Interface System refer to the applicable chapter Chapters 3 through 10 ADS Menu Screen Items GFK 0641 ADS Builder ADS Executor lt Debug gt x default system name default terminal module default printer module ADS Fault ADS PID Loaded Loaded XXXXX 5 char max TMINI COI MOTI COIT MOIT MINI VT100 MIBM CIBM LUDCO ASCII DEY PCNEC LA100 Epson ot loaded ot loaded r item number 1 7 9 to exit A 1 Configuration Operations Modify System Parameters System Name Terminal Terminal Device Printer Device Default Scan Rate XXXXX 5 characters max TMINI TCOIT TMOIT COIT MOIT MINI VT100 MIBM CIBM LUDCO STD COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 PCs NULL 0 25 to 9999 75 seconds Default Alarm Scan Rate 0 25 to 9999 75 seconds Startup Screen 1 to 999 PLC Data Source New Modify Data Sources Name XXXXXXXXXXXxX 12 Characters max Source Data Type State 1 OFF ON Byte 8 0 to 255 Word 16 0 to 65535 Signed Word 16 32768 to 32767 Longword 32 0 to 4294967295 Signed Longword 32 2147483648 to 2147483647 Floating Point 32 999999999 99 to 9999999999 99 Source Location Q M T S SA SB SC G GA GB GC GD GE R AI AQ P L Z DATE TIME PLC ID PLC_STATUS PLC_ACCESS PLC_SWEEP RACK_mm SLOT_mn
361. u 1 5 Chapter Introduction to Using the ADS Builder 2 The ADS Builder software allows you to create and modify a custom operator interface system The ADC based ADS Builder can only be accessed through the ADS Menu program which is only available when the ADS Development environment is installed on the ADC module This chapter provides a description of the major components of an ADS system and how they tie together and interact to form a system The steps required to build an operator interface system are also described Components of an ADS System The following figure illustrates the major components and interconnections of an ADS system A system is composed of one or more screens Dynamicobjects may be defined on a screen these objects will be animated when the system is executed Dynamic object animation may be changing display attributes e g reverse video blue etc movement value display or a combination of one or more attributes DYNAMIC REPORT OBJECT LOG b A TO PRINTER ACTIONS a44536 TRANSLATION PLC DATA y LOOKUP ALARM DATA SOURCE ENGINEERING UNIT CONVERSION TABLE DYNAMIC OBJECT DISPLAY FORMAT ACTIONS Figure 2 1 ADS System Major Components and Interconnections The data used to determine a dynamic object s animation is supplied by a data source A data source controls the access of data from the PLC s memory including the type of GFK 0641 2 1 data e g signed word etc
362. ubsequent retrieval Taking into account truncation of values this would mean that a value such as 1 456 would be stored in the PLC as 145 that is 1 456 multiplied by 100 equals 145 6 and then truncated to a word value gives 145 When retrieved the value is then divided by 100 yielding a value of 1 45 The translation equation terms A B and C would be defined as 0 01 0 and 0 respectively that is multiply by 0 01 with a 0 pre offset and 0 post offset The Specify Data Type flag would set to Y with Input Data Type as WORD and Output Data Type as FLOATING POINT Table 3 16 Output Data Types Supported for Translation Tables Data Type Size Bits Value Range State 1 OFE ON Byte 8 0 to 255 Word 16 0 to 65535 Signed Word 16 32768 to 32767 Longword 32 0t0 4294967295 Signed Longword 32 2147483648 to 2147483647 Floating Point 32 999999999 9 to 9999999999 99 Only 7 digits of precision If the Specify Data Type flag has been set to N the Input Data Type field will be set to NIL Pressing the Enter key at this point completes the entry of the translation table entry An informative message is displayed on the status line indicating the completion of the translation table entry creation Note that the just completed translation table entry ONE_HALE is now listed in the status area of the screen left hand side as an available translation table entry CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference
363. uires you to first delete it and then recreate it with the new name To initiate an engineering units conversion table entry modification you must first select the Modify a unit conversion menu option either by cursoring to the option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the M key The ADS Builder will prompt you for the name of the engineering units conversion table entry to be modified Only existing entries may be modified the New unit conversion menu option must be used in order to create a new engineering units conversion table entry In this example assume that you wish to modify the engineering units conversion table entry PERCENT Type the entry name PERCENT into the prompt field When you press the Enter key the form for the specified engineering units conversion table entry is displayed with the Input value high field initially selected ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT CON2 Default Scan Rate Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate Dir ADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Eng u Modify an E U C entry PERCENT Name PERCENT Input value low eae Output value low Input value high 32767 Output value high Specify Data Types Y N N Input Data Type NIL Output Data Type NIL You can now proceed to change any of the fields except the Name field Pressing the Enter key with the last field selected or pressing the lt Save gt key from any field will comp
364. umn 1 with 80 columns The values you use will depend on the terminal type specified on the Modify System Parameters data entry form Chapter 4 ScreenOperations 4 3 4 4 The Start Row and Start Column control the position at which the screen is placed when it is displayed at run time For instance if a small window is required to be displayed at run time that indicates the status of certain points in the PLC it may be desired to place it on the far right hand side of the terminal In this case the Start Row Start Column values might be set to 15 and 60 respectively This will cause the top left hand corner of the screen to be positioned at row 15 column 60 When using this feature you should be careful to ensure that the Rows and Columns Value are such that the screen fits on your terminal at run time In our example a Rows value greater than 9 or a Column value greater than 20 would cause the screen to exceed the actual width of the terminal The defined location of the screen can be altered when the system is executed by using the PSHSCN command This feature means that a screen can be moved to a different location on the terminal as required at run time Assume that you want to use the default values such that the new screen will be created full sized The reverse video block is on Start Row When you press the Enter key it means that you have selected the default value for that field and the reverse video block moves to the next field
365. unctionality is also available for the MONITOR and TUNING screens To select a valid loop the Loop Name or the Loop Number of the desired loop can be entered by typing in the name or number or the and keys can be used to move the selection bar of the Loop Selection Menu over the desired choice in the menu The lt GOLD gt and lt GOLD gt keys can be used to page through the menu if there is more than one window of loop names lt GOLD gt T and lt GOLD gt B will advance the loop selection menu cursor to the top and bottom lines respectively Pressing the Return key once the desired loop name has been highlighted will select that loop If any characters have been entered into the prompt field at the bottom of the screen they will be accepted as the loop name instead of the highlighted entry in the Loop Selection menu If a valid name or number has been specified the data entry window will be displayed with the information from the loop entered into the fields The initial field for editing is set to the loop number All fields except the loop s name can be modified refer to the previous discussion on Creating Loops for details of the fields When the required modifications have been made press lt Save gt or Return on the last field to retain the modifications If the modifications are not required to be saved press lt Quit gt at any time GFK 0641 Chapter 16 PID TemplatesModule 16 9 Delete a Loop De
366. up table entries Command scripts Modify System Params System Name DRILL Terminal COIT Terminal Device COM2 Printer Device Default Scan rate ijlt Alarm Scan rate Startup screen ecoooocoooo To complete the selection press the Enter key The selected choice COM2 is now filled in as the printer device and the next field Default Scan Rate is selected Default Scan Rate Alldata sources memories in the PLC are scanned at a given synchronous rate Each source can be scanned at a specific rate or the default system scan rate This field might be edited several different times while a running system is tuned to request its data as infrequently as possible while still providing an acceptable update rate every time the ADC requests data from the PLC the scan time is affected by several milliseconds As a default the system scan rate is set up for every 1 0 second This value may be changed in increments of 0 25 seconds to any value within the range 0 25 to 9999 75 seconds GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 5 Default Alarm Scan Rate Allalarm sources memories in the PLC are scanned at a given synchronous rate Each source can be scanned at a specific rate or the default system alarm scan rate This field may also be edited several different times as the running system is tuned to request its data as infrequently as possible while still providing an acceptable update rate every time the ADC reques
367. urrently in effect 6 4 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Section 4 Selecting Foreground Colors While Editing For those terminals which support color you can change the foreground color the background color may not be changed to be applied to any characters typed onto the screen Assume that you want to change the foreground color to RED DRILL 50 Row Col Text Static To initiate the color change press the lt Color gt key A window is opened up on the screen prompting you to select a foreground color The default color selection highlighted is the currently selected foreground color White in this example DRILL 50 Row Col Text Static GFK 0641 Chapter 6 Screen Painter and Report Painter 6 5 Press the key twice or the key six times to select the desired choice of Red DRILL 50 Row Col Text Static Pressing the Enter key completes the foreground color selection alternatively you could have just pressed the R key Any characters typed in at this point will have the Red foreground color attribute applied to them If you should attempt to select a foreground color on a terminal which does not support color an error message will be displayed on the prompt message line Since the prompt message line uses the same physical screen line as the screen report editor status line the status line will be temporarily overlaid Pressing any key with the error message
368. ust be unique from any other engineering units conversion table translation table and lookup table entry name ENTRY ERROR Input low cannot be larger than Input high The input value high bound must be greater than or equal to the input value low bound ENTRY ERROR No Engineering calculation name A name must be specified ENTRY ERROR Output low cannot be larger than output high The output value high bound must be greater than or equal to the output value low bound 3 58 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Section 6 Lookup Table Lookup table entries are defined to provide a way to convert an input data value into a different output data value a change in data type may take place as part of the conversion A common conversion of this type is to produce an output text string based on a numeric input value Lookup table entries are intended to provide an easily accessible method for the manipulation and or conversion of data without the need to individually specify rules for every screen in the system There is no predefined limit on the number of lookup table entries which may be defined for a given system you are limited only by the amount of available memory on the ADC module Your lookup table entries can either be defined here before referencing them with a PLC data source alarm source or with a dynamic object see Screen Operations Chapter 4 or they can be created from wit
369. ute key or then select the appropriate foreground color Video attributes may be removed from a block in the same way As an example of altering video attributes and foreground color assume that you want to display the region bounded by rows 10 to 12 and columns 15 to 24 as shown below in reverse video 12345678690 1234567890 1234567890 DRILL 50 Row Col Z Text Static 6 16 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 GFK 0641 The first step is to select the region following the guidelines given previously 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 DRILL 50 Row Col Text Static At this point when you press the lt Video Select gt key a pop up widow of choices will appear From this window you can select to toggle the lt Reverse Video gt key which completes the operation Note that the select operation is automatically completed by executing such a change 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 DRILL 50 Row Col Text Chapter 6 Screen Painter and Report Painter 6 17 While a select operation is active new characters may be added to the screen The select area is expanded as the characters are typed in As an example of adding characters while the select operation is still active assume that the select operation as shown on the following screen has been started 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 DRILL 50 Row Col Text Static If you now decide that you want to type the char
370. utput value ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal col Create a lookup table entry Printer Name Dir NAD Input Data Type WORD Lookup Table Output Data Type WORD INPUT RANGE OUTPUT VALUE Name Every lookup table entry must be given a name This name must be unique with regards to lookup table translation table and engineering units conversion table entry names but does not need to be unique from all other names in the ADS system for example a PLC data source might be named TAG1 and a lookup table entry might also be named TAG1 A name may be from one to twelve alphanumeric and underscore _ characters and is NOT case sensitive As an example of creating a lookup table entry name assume that the name is to be MESSAGE Type the desired name into the Name field After the name has been entered press the Enter key When the Enter key is pressed the entry is completed and the Input Data Type field is selected next 3 60 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 Input Data Type Every lookup table entry must be tagged as to what type of data it operates on The input data types supported by the ADS system are specified in the table below Table 3 19 Input Data Types Supported for Lookup Tables Data Type Size Bits Value Range State 1 OFE ON Byte 8 0 to 255 Word 16 0 to 65535 Signed Word 16 32768 to 32767 Longword 32 0t0 4294967295
371. ving you the choice of listing the next group of screens or of quitting the list function ADS BUILDER Current System Name Terminal COIT COM2 Printer COM1 Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Screens SCREENO1 SCREENOZ SCREENO3 SCREENO4 SCREENOS SCREENO6 SCREENO SCREENO8 SCREENO9 SCREEN10 SCREEN11 SCREEN12 SCREEN13 SCREEN14 SCREEN15 SCREEN16 SCREEN1 7 SCREEN18 SCREEN19 SCREENZO SCREENZ1 SCREEN2Z2 SCREENZ3 SCREEN2Z4 id id id t i i Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate DRILL Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 New screen Modify screen Screen paint Delete screen Copy screen Key assignments List screens Print screen details Press lt RETURN gt to list more entries else lt QUIT gt Pressing the Enter key at this point will list the remaining screens When the lt Quit gt key is pressed the listing of screens currently displayed will remain displayed 4 10 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 1 00 s 1 00 s GFK 0641 Key Assignments Every screen in a system except alarm pages has its own associated set of assignments for the fifteen function keys supported by ADS These assignments are critical when a system is run by the ADS Executor since all user initiated actions are started by pressing function keys Wh
372. w on Background field Chapter 4 ScreenOperations 4 5 4 6 BackgroundColor The Background field is used to select the background color for the screen When you cursor onto the Background field a window is opened up on the screen showing what choices are available Eight colors are supported black red green yellow blue magenta cyan and white By default the system selects BLACK as the background color The user must select a background color which is different from the selected foreground color If you wish to accept the default selection of BLACK press the Enter key At this point the screen is created initially blank as shown below and the ADS Builder automatically enters the screen report editor see Section 4 on Screen Report Editing for details on editing a screen DRILL 50 Row J Col f Text Static After you have completed the editing of the screen select the lt Save gt key to exit the screen Aeport editor the screen contents will be saved in the ADS Builder s working memory You are then returned to the menu page with the status area updated to reflect the creation of the new screen Note that an asterisk is displayed to the right of the newly created screen number This designates that the screen is currently loaded in the ADS Builder s memory ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT CON2 Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCNR
373. was completed If you press the lt Quit gt key indicating that the command script deletion should be canceled you will be returned to the menu page no message will be displayed to indicate that the deletion was canceled If you specify a command script which does not currently exist you will be returned to the menu page with the message Invalid command script specified displayed on the status line GFK 0641 Chapter3 Configuration Operations 3 83 View Current Scripts 3 84 The ADS system allows you to view all the existing command scripts in a system one by one in alphabetical order To initiate the viewing of a system s command scripts first select the View current scripts menu option either by cursoring to the View current scripts option and pressing the Enter key or by pressing the V key In the following example two command scripts are currently defined in the system END_OF_DAY and INITIALIZE When the Enter key is pressed the form for the first command script that is listed is displayed along with a prompt on the status line giving you the choice of viewing the next script in the list or of quitting the view function ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0M2 Default Scan Rate View a command script Name END_OF_DAY REPORT 1 E REPORT 2 Enter ONE valid command per line Press lt RETURN gt to view next command script else lt QUIT gt CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Dis
374. with the message Invalid conversion entry specified displayed on the status line CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 View Current Entries The ADS Builder provides a way for you to view all the existing engineering units conversion table entries in a system one by one in alphabetical order To initiate the viewing of a systems engineering units conversion table entries you must first select the View current entries menu option either by cursoring to that option and then pressing the Enter key or by pressing the V key In the example shown below two engineering units conversion table entries are currently defined in the system DEG_C and PERCENT When the Enter key is pressed the form for the first entry is displayed along with a prompt on the status line giving the choice of viewing the next entry in the list or of quitting the view function ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT CON2 Default Scan Rate Printer COM1 Default Alarm Scan Rate Dir NADS_PCNRFMAN PCM Startup Screen Eng u View an E U C entry DEG_C Name DEG_C PERCENT Input value low O Output value low Input value high 32000 Output value high Specify Data Types Y N Input Data Type WORD Output Data Type FLOATING POINT Press lt RETURN gt to view next engineering calc entry else lt QUIT gt Pressing the Enter key at this point will display
375. wn one row within the current column lt Move cursor left one column within the current row gt Move cursor right one column within the current row lt GOLD gt T Move cursor to topmost row within the current column lt GOLD gt J Move cursor to bottommost row within the currentcolumn lt GOLD gt e Move cursor to leftmost column within the current row lt GOLD gt gt Move cursor to rightmost column within the current row TAB Move cursor to next tab stop within the current row Enter Move cursor down one row and to leftmost column of the new row The status area at the bottom of the screen will be updated to indicate the new cursor position Note that the cursor does NOT wraparound when the end of a line is reached onascreen report GFK 0641 Chapter 6 Screen Painter and Report Painter 6 3 6 Section 3 Controlling the Screen Attributes The lt Video Select gt key is used to display a window on the screen which allows the toggling of one of four different video attributes DRILL 50 Row Col Text Static Use the and keys to select the video attribute to be toggled As video attributes are changed the status line at the base of the screen is updated to indicate the current combination of selected video attributes Note that not all attributes are available for some terminals To clear all video attributes use the lt Clear Video gt key This turns off all of the video attributes c
376. x Set location 1 to SIGNED LONGWORD value v or prompt if no v PLCSETF v2 p c4 5 mx5 Set location 1 to FLOATING POINT value v or prompt if no v n mn 1 The syntax for specifying the loc reference is the same as for specifying a PLC data source location refer to PLC Data Sources for details except that the references must be consecutive within the same PLC memory type For example PLCGETW R1 and PLCGETW R1 1 9 are valid but PLCSETW R1 1 R2 5 9 and PLCSETW R1 0 14 Q1 are not 2 If no value parameter is specified a prompt will appear on the terminal s display line asking you to input a value STATE values are specified as 0 for OFF and 1 for ON 3 An optional 1 19 character prompt may be specified any alphanumeric character plus 4 An additional calculation may be optionally specified the additional calculation may be either a translation table entry a lookup table entry or an engineering units conversion table entry 5 Min Max bounding of the user s entry for value v may be optionally specified Table 8 6 Screen Commands Action Description SCREEN n Remove all screens and go to screen n PSHSCN n Lr c Overlay screen n at optionally specified row and column positions r and c POPSCN n Remove last screen overlaid or all down to and including n REMSCN n Remove last screen overlaid or only n 1 Tf n 0 a prompt will appear on the terminal s display line asking y
377. y or by pressing the D key ADS BUILDER Current System Name DRILL Terminal COIT C0MZ Default Scan Rate 1 00 s Printer C0M1 Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 00 s Dir ADS_PCN RFMAN PCM Startup Screen Display Formats ADS Print Destination STDPRN NEG_POS New display format Modify a display format E View current formats List formats Print formats Enter the name of the display format to delete x The ADS system will prompt for the name of the display format to be deleted As indicated above only existing display formats which are not referenced on any screen in the system should be deleted For example assume that the the display format NEG_POS is to be deleted Type the desired display format name NEG_POS into the prompt field Upon pressing the Enter key the current form for the display format is displayed on the screen along with a prompt on the status line asking you to confirm the delete or Quit If the Enter key is pressed at this point the display format will be deleted from the system Upon deletion of the display format you are returned to the menu page with an informative message displayed on the status line indicating that the deletion was completed If the lt Quit gt key is pressed indicating that the display format deletion should be canceled you will be returned to the menu page no message will be displayed to indicate that the deletion was aborted If you specify a d
378. y n Output the terminal s screen to the attached printer Clear and rewrite the screen Output text string to port Exit the ADS system 8 28 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual March 1994 GFK 0641 As an example of defining an alarm action assume that you want to overlay alarm page 34 on the terminal whenever an alarm is triggered by a value within the range 150 175 ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name OQVER_TEMP Source Data Type SIGNED WORD PLC Location AIS Scan Rate or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Range 150 175 Action TREVUTSE Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp N Latched N Notify N Auto ack N Output text to following alarm pages After entering the action definition press the Enter key to complete the entry The associated Text field is selected next ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name OQVER_TEMP Source Data Type SIGNED WORD PLC Location AIS Scan Rate or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Range 150 175 Action pshalm 34 Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp N Latched N Notify N Auto ack Output text to following alarm pages Text The Text field associated with a given range defines the text which will be displayed on any alarm page see Output Text to Alarm Page s later in this section to wh

3 - GE Intelligent Platforms: Support Home

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents